SAM Electronics NG3051S30KW RADARPILOT Platinum User Manual ED3100G130 RP CP

SAM Electronics GmbH RADARPILOT Platinum ED3100G130 RP CP

User Manual

Operating InstructionsNACOS PlatinumSoftware Version 1.0RADARPILOT PlatinumRADARPILOT (with transceiver NG 3050 / NG 3051)CONNINGPILOTItem No.: ED 3100 G 130 Revision: 03 (2011-08) Order No.:390008509
© SAM Electronics GmbH 2011The reproduction, distribution, and utilization of this document as well as thecommunication of its content to others without explicit authorization is prohibited.Offenders will be held liable for the payment of damages.All rights reserved in the event of the grant of a patent, utility model, or design.Alterations due to technical progress are reserved.SAM Electronics GmbHD - 22763 HamburgServiceCustomer Support CenterPhone: + 49 (0) 18 03 00 85 53Fax: + 49 (0) 18 03 00 85 54E-mail: shipservice@sam-electronics.deThe radar transceivers of this NACOS Platinum system are FCC registered as follows:X-Band 12.5 KW:Q07NG3050X12-5KWX-Band 25 KW:Q07NG3050X25KWS-Band 30 KW:Q07NG3051S30KWFor these units the following notes about FCC approval apply:NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuantto Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmfulinterference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates,uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with theinstruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equip-ment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be requiredto correct the interference at his own expense.NOTICE:This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.Operation is subject to the following two conditions:(1)this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.NOTICE:Changes or modifications made to this equipment not expressly approved by SAM Electronics GmbH in Hamburg may void the FCC authorization to operate this equipment.Radiofrequency radiation exposure information:This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance of 21 m between the radiator and your body (30 KW S-Band Radar). For more details (i.e. X-Band and various antennas and trans-mitting power) please refer to section A chapter 1.1.2 in this manual. This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or trans-mitter.
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating Instructions List of ContentsOI_ANC2010_TOC.fm /10.11.2011 3NACOS PlatinumList of ContentsI GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I - 11 About these Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I - 31.1 Aim and Scope of these Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I - 41.2 Validity of these Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I - 51.3 Availability of these Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I - 61.4 How to Find Information in the Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . I - 71.4.1 Structure of the Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I - 81.4.2 How to find Information on Specific Subjects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I - 91.5 Typographical Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I - 102 Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I - 132.1 Warnings and Notes in these Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I - 142.2 Meaning of Safety Signs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I - 152.3 General Safety Notes – NACOS Platinum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I - 172.4 Authorisation and Qualification of Personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I - 182.5 Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I - 192.6 Obligatory Safety Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I - 203 NACOS Platinum System Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I - 213.1 What is the NACOS Platinum? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I - 223.2 Customisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I - 233.3 Applicable Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I - 254 Multi Function Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I - 274.1 General System Description MFD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I - 284.2 Operating Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I - 294.2.1 Pointing Devices – Trackball and Mouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I - 304.2.2 Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I - 324.2.3 The ASCII Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I - 334.2.4 The RADAR Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I - 344.2.5 The TRACKPILOT Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I - 354.3 TFT Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I - 364.3.1 Nominal Viewing Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I - 374.3.2 Colour Distortions on Monitors with Flat Screens (TFT Monitors) . . . . . I - 384.3.3 Printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I - 394.4 Startup and Shutdown of MFDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I - 404.5 Basic Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I - 414.5.1 Adjusting the Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I - 424.5.2 Setting Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I - 435 NACOS Platinum Graphical User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I - 455.1 Super Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I - 465.2 Screen Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I - 47
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsList of Contents OI_ANC2010_TOC.fm /10.11.201145.2.1 Title Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I - 485.2.1.1 Brilliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I - 485.2.1.2 Active Application Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I - 495.2.1.3 Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I - 495.2.1.4 Alive Indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I - 495.3 Sidebar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I - 515.3.1 Permanent Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I - 525.3.2 Non-Permanent Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I - 545.3.3 Menu Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I - 565.3.3.1 Full Screen Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I - 585.4 Application Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I - 595.4.1 Application Area Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I - 605.5 Tabbed Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I - 625.6 Lists & Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I - 645.7 Dialogues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I - 665.7.1 Popup Edit Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I - 675.8 Tooltips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I - 685.9 Controls – Adjusting Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I - 695.9.1 Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I - 705.9.2 Field Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I - 715.9.3 Sliders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I - 725.9.4 Push Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I - 735.9.5 Dropdown Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I - 745.9.6 Check Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I - 755.9.7 Scroll Bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I - 765.9.8 Spin boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I - 775.9.9 Keys for Numeric Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I - 785.9.10 Zoom and Pan Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I - 795.9.11 Alphanumeric and Graphical Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I - 805.9.12 Alarm Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I - 815.10 Mouse Pointers and Clicks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I - 825.10.1 Pointers in RADAR and ECDIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I - 835.10.2 Mouse Pointers for Machinery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I - 84II QUICK START GUIDE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .II - 11 How to start quickly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . II - 31.1 The S-Mode for RADAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .II - 41.2 The S-Mode for ECDIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .II - 5III MAIN APPLICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . III - 11 Overview of Products and Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . III - 31.1 NACOS Platinum Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . III - 41.2 RADAR Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . III - 51.3 ECDIS Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . III - 7
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating Instructions List of ContentsOI_ANC2010_TOC.fm /10.11.2011 5NACOS Platinum1.4 CONNING Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . III - 81.5 TRACKPILOT Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . III - 91.6 MACHINERY Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . III - 101.7 Common Functions for Products and Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . III - 112 Common Functions for Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .III - 152.1 The Consistent Common Reference System (CCRS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . III - 162.2 Context Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . III - 182.3 The Chart Information Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . III - 213 Permanent Area for Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .III - 233.1 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . III - 243.1.1 Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . III - 253.1.2 Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . III - 263.1.3 Rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . III - 273.1.4 CCRP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . III - 283.1.5 Screen Stabilisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . III - 293.2 Navigation Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . III - 333.2.1 Integrity Marking of Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . III - 343.2.2 Heading and Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . III - 353.2.3 Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . III - 423.3 Vector and Trails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . III - 493.3.1 Ground / Water Stabilisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . III - 503.3.2 Vector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . III - 513.3.3 Trails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . III - 523.3.4 Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . III - 533.3.5 Predict . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . III - 543.4 Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . III - 553.4.1 The Chart Status Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . III - 563.5 Targets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . III - 583.5.1 Fusion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . III - 593.5.2 Sleeping Targets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . III - 60A RADAR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 11 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 31.1 RADAR Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 41.1.1 RADAR Safety – Electrical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 41.1.2 RADAR Safety – Radiation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 51.1.3 RADAR Safety – Mechanical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 61.2 Current IHO Standards / Regulatory Approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 71.3 System Structure and Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 81.4 Basics / Evaluation of the RADAR Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 111.4.1 Basics of the Evaluation of RADAR Video in Platinum Series . . . . . . . . A - 111.4.2 Achievable RADAR Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 141.4.3 Distortions of the RADAR Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 151.4.4 Undesirable Echo Displays and Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 16
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsList of Contents OI_ANC2010_TOC.fm /10.11.201161.4.5 RADAR Setting for the Display of Racon Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 201.4.6 RADAR Settings for Target Enhancer Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 201.4.7 RADAR Setting for SART Detection (X-Band only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 211.4.8 Transmission formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 231.5 Basic setting of the RADAR Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 241.6 RADAR Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 272 The RADAR Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A - 293 An Overview of the Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A - 314 RADAR Application Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A - 334.1 The Zoom and Pan Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 345 RADAR Sidebar - Permanent Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A - 375.1 RADAR Transceiver Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 385.1.1 Transceiver Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 385.1.2 Master / Slave Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 395.1.3 Pulse Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 405.1.4 Adjusting the Transceiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 405.2 RADAR Video Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 425.2.1 Gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 425.2.2 Sea . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 425.2.3 Rain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 435.2.4 Enhance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 435.2.5 Video Emphasis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 445.2.6 Hide Video / Overlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 445.3 Toolset1 and 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 465.3.1 EBL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 465.3.2 VRM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 485.3.3 Operating VRM and EBL jointly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 495.4 Parallel Index Lines (PI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 506 RADAR Sidebar - Non-Permanent Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A - 537 Target Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A - 557.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 567.2 Manual Target Acquisition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 597.3 Manual Target Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 607.4 Automatic Target Acquisition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 617.5 Settings for Dangerous Targets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 627.6 Settings for Acquisition/Guard Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 647.7 Target Fusion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 657.8 Deletion and Loss of Targets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 667.9 Critical Target . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 677.10 Target List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 687.11 Target Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 707.12 Trial Manoeuvre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 72
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating Instructions List of ContentsOI_ANC2010_TOC.fm /10.11.2011 7NACOS Platinum7.13 Reference Target Tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 787.14 ARPA Training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 797.15 ARPA Malfunctions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 817.16 AIS Malfunctions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 828 User Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 838.1 Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 848.2 Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 888.3 Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 908.4 Events and Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 929 CHARTRADAR (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 939.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 949.2 Basic Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 959.2.1 Temporary Hiding the Chart Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 959.2.2 Selection of Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 959.2.3 Matching the Chart with the RADAR Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 959.2.4 References Used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 959.2.5 Range Scale and Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 969.3 Selecting the Objects to be Displayed in the Vector Chart . . . . . . . . . . A - 979.3.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 979.3.2 Categories of Display Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 979.3.3 Select a Category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 989.3.4 Select the Primary Chart Information Set (PCIS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 989.3.5 Indication of Category in the Status Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 999.3.6 Defining the Symbol Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 1009.3.7 Setting the Display of Text Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 1009.3.8 Switch on Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 1009.3.9 Switch on Conditionally Displayed Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 1019.4 CHARTRADAR Application Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 1029.5 Application Area Context Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 1039.6 Setting the Depths Lines to be Displayed in the Vector Chart . . . . . . . A - 1049.7 Setting the Own Ship’s Draft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 1069.8 Activating the Chart Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 1079.9 Setting the Look-Ahead Sector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 1089.10 Chart Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 1099.11 Main Differences between CHARTRADAR and Full ECDISPILOT . . . . . A - 110C VOYAGE PLANNING AND MONITORING . . . . . . . . . . . . C - 11 Voyage Planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C - 31.1 Generation of Routes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C - 41.1.1 General Information about Pre-planned Tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C - 51.1.2 Generation, Handling and Administration of the Routes . . . . . . . . . . . . . C - 71.1.3 Route Display Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C - 91.1.4 Route Editing - Graphical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C - 101.1.5 Route Editing - Text Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C - 16
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsList of Contents OI_ANC2010_TOC.fm /10.11.201181.1.6 Details of the Waypoint Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C - 221.1.7 Checking of Routes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C - 251.1.7.1 Geometrical Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C - 261.1.7.2 Check against the Electronic Chart and the User made Chart Objects . . C - 291.1.7.3 Computation of Sailing Times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C - 311.1.8 Completing the Generation of the Route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C - 331.1.9 Import / Export Routes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C - 342 Chart and Route Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C - 352.1 Route Monitoring: Own Ship against the System Route . . . . . . . . . . . . C - 372.2 Chart Monitoring: Own Ship against Vector - / User Chart Objects . . . . C - 382.2.1 Monitoring on the Basis of a Vector Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C - 402.2.2 Monitoring against User Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C - 42D CONNING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D - 11 Operating the Conning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D - 31.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D - 41.2 An Overview of the Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D - 51.3 Conning Display - Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D - 71.4 Docking Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D - 81.5 Conning Home Waypoint List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D - 91.6 Conning Display - Machinery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D - 101.6.1 The Rate of Turn Indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D - 111.7 Conning Sidebar - Permanent Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D - 121.8 Conning Sidebar - Non-permanent Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D - 131.9 The Alarm List on Conning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D - 141.9.1 Wind and Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D - 151.9.2 Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D - 161.9.3 Autopilot Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D - 17F SENSORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F - 11 AIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .F - 31.1 AIS Summarized Briefly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F - 41.2 Overview of Functions and Operating Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F - 51.3 Setting the Voyage Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F - 61.4 Setting the transmitter / Transmitter Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F - 81.5 Channel Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F - 101.6 Receiving AIS Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F - 13IV OPTIONAL APPLICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IV - 1H MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .H - 1
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating Instructions List of ContentsOI_ANC2010_TOC.fm /10.11.2011 9NACOS Platinum1 Performance Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H - 32 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H - 52.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H - 52.2 Starting Chart Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H - 62.3 Chart Maintenance Application Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H - 72.4 Update of Charts from Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H - 82.5 Messages during Chart Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H - 92.6 Display Charts which are on a Media or a MFD (workstation) . . . . . . . . H - 102.7 Maintenance of Charts on your MFD (workstation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H - 112.8 Display Expander . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H - 122.9 Backup/Restore of Map Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H - 133 Manual ENC Update Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H - 154 Hardware Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H - 184.1 Periodical Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H - 184.1.1 Limited-Lifetime Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H - 184.2 Check of the Colour Reproduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H - 185 SW Version and Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H - 195.1 SW Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H - 195.2 SW Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H - 19V ALARMS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V - 11 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V - 31.1 Colour code for the alarm indications: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V - 41.2 Overview of the alarm window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V - 61.2.1 Example of an alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V - 72 Alarm Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V - 92.1 Behaviour when an Alarm comes up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V - 102.2 List of Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V - 112.2.1 Navigation Sensor Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V - 122.2.2 RADAR Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V - 172.2.3 AIS Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V - 192.2.4 ECDIS Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V - 222.2.5 Trackpilot Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V - 232.2.6 Trackpilot Alarm Signal Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V - 322.2.7 VDR Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V - 342.2.8 Machinery Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V - 35VI LISTS AND INDEXES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .VI - 1VII DOCUMENT HISTORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VII - 1
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsList of Contents OI_ANC2010_TOC.fm /10.11.2011101 Document History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VII - 3
GENERAL
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsI-1 About these Operating InstructionsI General.fm / 10.11.11 I-3NACOS Platinum1 About these Operating InstructionsIn this chapter, you will find general information about these operating instructions which have beendelivered with your NACOS Platinum. It informs you about:- I-Aim and Scope of these Operating Instructions on page I-4 - I-Validity of these Operating Instructions on page I-5- I-How to Find Information in the Operating Instructions on page I-7- I-Typographical Conventions on page I-10☞ jjjjtutDo not forget to read the chapter on general safety measures. This is obligatory to read! See chapter I - 2 on page 13.
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsI-1 About these Operating Instructions I General.fm / 10.11.11I-41.1 Aim and Scope of these Operating InstructionsThese operating instructions describe how the NACOS Platinum and its software applications work, andhow to operate the applications. Since the operating instructions are generic, i.e. generally applicable to the ship control system NACOSPlatinum, some information and functions or features described may not be used in your specific instal-lation. This depends on the customisation of your system. See chapter 3.2 on page I-23. For exact andspecific features of your particular installation, please refer to the relevant order and delivery documents.The NACOS Platinum must only be operated by persons who have passed the relevant mandatory training on the respective systems and applications. Only reading these operating instructions cannot replace such training.
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsI-1 About these Operating InstructionsI General.fm / 10.11.11 I-5NACOS Platinum1.2 Validity of these Operating InstructionsThese instructions are valid for the NACOS Platinum and its applications. Specific safety regulations forcomponents used in or in combination with the system are not affected by these instructions.
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsI-1 About these Operating Instructions I General.fm / 10.11.11I-61.3 Availability of these Operating InstructionsHave these operating instructions always at hand on location. If appl., ensure that copies are availableat all relevant operator panels, MFDs and Outstations. You can also access an online version of the oper-ating instructions directly in the NACOS Platinum system. See chapter "Menu Bar" on page I-56.
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsI-1 About these Operating InstructionsI General.fm / 10.11.11 I-7NACOS Platinum1.4 How to Find Information in the Operating Instructions
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsI-1 About these Operating Instructions I General.fm / 10.11.11I-81.4.1 Structure of the Operating InstructionsWhen reading through or skimming through the overall operating instructions, it is always a good ideato go from general to more specific subjects, i.e. to start with this general part of the operating instruc-tions and then continue with the part describing the application you wish to learn about. Again, in thedescriptions of the applications, read the introductory chapters before getting into detail. Otherwise youmight miss information which are assumed to be understood in the chapters describing specific details.The NACOS Platinum Operating Instructions are divided into different parts. The main parts arenumbered using roman numbers. The sections of the main applications like RADAR and ECDIS andoptional applications like Autopilot are labelled using capital latin letters, the sub-sections inside thesesections are numbered using arabic numbers. The documentation of an application can be handled as aseparate document and therefore can also be ordered separately. The structure of the NACOS PlatinumOperating Instructions is as follows:- I-GENERALThis is the part you are currently reading. It provides general information which are important inorder to be able to understand the other parts of the operating instructions.- II-QUICK START GUIDE Essential information on the individual applications giving a quick overview of important functions.- Common Functions- Operating in the Permanant Area- Navigation Sensors and Instruments- III-MAIN APPLICATIONS and IV-OPTIONAL APPLICATIONSDescriptions of the main applications and optional applications:- Common functions- Operating in the Permanent Area- Navigation Sensors and - RADAR- ECDIS- ...- Autopilot (optional)- ...- V-ALARMSInformation regarding NACOS Platinum system alarms.- F-SENSORSDescriptions on the sensoring equipment installed aboard.- H-MAINTENANCEInstructions regarding cleaning, preventive maintenance, regular maintenance.- VI-LISTS AND INDEXESStandard key word index, list of figures
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsI-1 About these Operating InstructionsI General.fm / 10.11.11 I-9NACOS Platinum1.4.2 How to find Information on Specific SubjectsThere will also be the case that you are basically familiar with the NACOS Platinum but only need punc-tual information on one specific topic or detail. In order to find information on such specific subjects, youcan use the- List of Contents- Index of key wordsHere, you can look up specific key words. You will also find, e.g. the names of functions, controls,and keys like [ESC] or [DUTY] at the beginning of the index.- II-QUICK START GUIDE Here you will find essential information on the individual applications which will give you a quickoverview of important functions.- List of AbbreviationsWhen describing a system like the NACOS Platinum, it is necessary to use terms and expressionswhich may be unfamiliar to you in the beginning. Most of the technical terms will be explained toyou as you read your way through the more general chapters, or when reading the chapters on thespecific applications. However, as a general source of information we have provided a list of abbre-viations. See VI-LISTS AND INDEXES.
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsI-1 About these Operating Instructions I General.fm / 10.11.11I-101.5 Typographical ConventionsThe typographical conventions used in the operating instructions are kept simple, but still it is essentialthat you are sure to understand their meaning before reading the instructions. The following special signsare used for specific purposes:[ ] (square brackets),< > (triangular brackets),{ } (curly brackets),These signs are used as shown in the following examples:
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsI-1 About these Operating InstructionsI General.fm / 10.11.11 I-11NACOS PlatinumExpression Explanation[KEY NAME] This convention is used to refer to an operator key on either a panel keypad (Machinery application), a key on a console’s keyboard, on a computer keyboard, or on the onscreen keyboard.The text is the same text as on the respective key. The text can be letters, digits or signs. Note that the text inside the brackets is written in capital letters.Example:Press [ALARM LIST] to view the Alarm List.This means that you must press the key with the text "ALARM LIST" written on it, in order to view the Alarm List.[KEY] + [2nd KEY] This convention is used to refer to a key combination on the onscreen keyboard or on a computer keyboard. Example:Press [ALT]+[F4] to close the window.This means that you must press and hold the [ALT] key, and while holding the [ALT] key you have to press [F4]. [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] The symbols in the square brackets refer to the respective arrow keys on operator panels (Machinery application).[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] The symbols in the square brackets refer to the respective arrow keys on a console’s keyboard, on a computer keyboard, or on the onscreen keyboard.Abcd List Heading capitalisation and bold typeface are used when directly referring to names of NACOS Platinum functions and UI elements such as menus, opera-tional modes, reports, lists, etc. The text can be in more than one word.Examples: Select Color & in the main menu.From any mode you can call up the Alarm List by pressing the [ALARM LIST] key on the panel.Main > Submenu > Sub-Submenu This is an abbreviated way for:Click on Main, then on Submenu and afterwards on Sub-Submenu☞ This symbol indicates a hint.<variable> Describes a text string of variable length and contents.The text inside the brackets is not the actual text, but a reference to a text which is individual to your specific system.The length of the text is not specified by the text inside the brackets.The expression can refer to both text and numbers. Example:The display will show <duty engineer>.This means that the display will show the name of the selected duty engineer, e.g. "3RD ENGINEER".
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsI-1 About these Operating Instructions I General.fm / 10.11.11I-12Table I / 1 Typographical conventions in these operating instructions{nnn} Describes a number with a fixed number of digits which is input or output. The number of letters inside the brackets describes the number of digits. The number must not include any decimal point.Example:Enter a channel number in the format {nnn}.This means that you must enter the number of a unit as a three digit number, without any decimal point.NOTE:You have to use zeros (0) to fill the empty spaces, if the number is less than 100 (e.g. 056){nnn.} Like {nnn}, but there may be a decimal point at any place in the number, or none.Example The value is displayed in the format {nnnn.}.In the example the value may be, e.g. "12.35" or "450.6" or "0045". When entering such values, the decimal point will sometimes be preset by the system. DD-MMM-YYYY The date in international format which is used in the system. Example: 21 AUG 2009 for the 21st of August 2009. HH:MM:SS The time format used in the system. The 24 hour format is used.Examples: 06:30:00 stands for half past six and 0 seconds in the morning (6:30 am) and 23:58:00 is two minutes to midnight. Expression Explanation
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsI-2 Safety PrecautionsI General.fm / 10.11.11 I-13NACOS Platinum2 Safety PrecautionsThis chapter describes general safety measures to be taken into account when working with or on theNACOS Platinum. In the chapters describing the applications of the NACOS Platinum you will find furtherimportant safety notes and warnings which are specific to the applications.
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsI-2 Safety Precautions I General.fm / 10.11.11I-142.1 Warnings and Notes in these Operating InstructionsThe warning levels and styles differ slightly from the suggestions of the ANSI Z.535 standard. We delib-erately decided to use a three-level system of warnings in these operating instructions which is a mix ofANSI and ISO standards, and which is very explicit and comprehensible. The different warning levelshave the following meaning: ☞ Notes & Hints: This symbol indicates useful notes and hints which will ease understanding thesystem or speed up operation.This sign is used whenever severe injuries or even death will occur as conse-quence of un-awareness or disregard of the described safety rules.This sign is used whenever severe injuries or even death may occur as conse-quence of un-awareness or disregard of the described safety rules.This sign is used when special care must be taken to prevent unexpected conse-quences such as damage to equipment, incorrect or incalculable operation and behaviour of equipment.
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsI-2 Safety PrecautionsI General.fm / 10.11.11 I-15NACOS Platinum2.2 Meaning of Safety SignsThe operating instructions use the following safety signs which you will also find on equipment. Theirmeaning is described shortly in order to give you an idea of the importance and the specific aspects tobe aware of.HIGH VOLTAGE!In case that the equipment is in use, dangerous voltages are present. Touching live parts of devices energised with these voltages will result severe injuries or even death. Appropriate actions must be taken. Before starting to work, observe the following safety rules:1. Switch off the equipment, disconnect the equipment from the mainssupply.2. Take precautions against inadvertent re-connection.3. To verify that circuits are dead and no voltage is present perform theappropriate measurements.4. Ground and short-circuit. 5. Cover live parts in the proximity or otherwise protect them againsttouching. The dangerous voltages are no longer present. Voltage may only be applied to components being worked on when this is expressly prescribed (e.g. during troubleshooting). Mains switches are live even when the equipment is switched off. During work always observe the relevant regulations for the prevention of accidents, e.g. German VBG 4, or EN 292. Only use suitable, intact tools and measuring instruments!DANGER! WORK IN PROGRESS! DO NOT SWITCH!The switch(es) marked with this sign must never be operated. Severe injuries or even death can occur as consequence of disregard.The sign will have amendments like the name of the person who has marked the switch(es) and time/date of mounting of the sign.Only the person stated on the sign may remove the sign and operate the switch(es).TURNING DEVICES!Marked devices or devices in the vicinity of this sign may start turning automati-cally if the equipment is in use. Always switch off the respective equipment or drives of the devices. Take precautions to prevent inadvertent reactivation of the devices before you start to work on the devices.
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsI-2 Safety Precautions I General.fm / 10.11.11I-16NACOS Platinum components contain electrostatic sensitive devices. Observe precautions for handling.The discharge of electrostatic energy into a semiconductor can destroy the semiconductor or change itsproperties. Before a respective unit’s housing is opened to remove or touch a board, the service equip-ment, Order No. 586-5011, must be used: 1. The mat must be positioned at the workplace.2. The added potential equalization cable must be connected to the snap fastener and the clamp to asuitable protective earth contact. The cable contains a 1 MW resistor which must not be removed.3. The wrist band must be put on. When the spiral cable is connected to the snap fastener, thedischarge line is established.4. Thoroughly grounded soldering, measurement and test tools must be used. If these tools aresupplied with power from the 230 VAC mains, this supply must be protected by a fault current plug,stock No. 593-8099.Boards and units that contain ESD-sensitive semiconductors are marked with the symbol shown above.All assisting persons who might come into contact with the endangered ESD-sensitive boards must alsouse the ESD equipment.WARNING! ELECTROMAGNETIC RADIATION!Marked devices or devices in the vicinity of this sign may emit electromagnetic radiation that can cause injury. Always switch off the respective equipment. take precautions to prevent inadvertent reactivation before you start to work on the devices. Observe the radiation danger zone of radar antennas. See table A / 1. ELECTROSTATIC SENSITIVE DEVICES!Devices marked with this sign are extremely sensitive with regards to electrostatic discharge (ESD). They may be handled only by qualified personnel who must take the appropriate actions to avoid discharges.
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsI-2 Safety PrecautionsI General.fm / 10.11.11 I-17NACOS Platinum2.3 General Safety Notes – NACOS PlatinumAs a very general rule, keep your workplace clean and tidy, it helps preventing accidents! Ensure unob-structed access to all workstations, operator panels, controls, and relevant switchgear cabinets in orderto enable instant response to alarms! You are obliged to read these operating instructions prior to operation and to adhere to the operating instructions in operation in order to prevent possible danger and to ensure compliance with the designated use of the equipment. Prevention of danger includes that operator personnel are trained and authorised for safe operation of the equipment. We assume no liability for damage due to improper operation which could have been prevented. NOTE:Further potential danger when working with and on the NACOS Platinum is described in the respective sections on these processes.
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsI-2 Safety Precautions I General.fm / 10.11.11I-182.4 Authorisation and Qualification of PersonnelPersons authorised to operate the system are specially instructed and trained operating personnel of theuser. Persons authorised to carry out cleaning, maintenance, and troubleshooting are the speciallytrained and skilled personnel of the user as well as SAM Electronics personnel being qualified by training,knowledge and experience. Persons operating or servicing the NACOS Platinum must be familiar with thegeneral safety regulations and specific safety systems and they must have passed all required trainingand must have read the relevant operating instructions and manuals before starting work.Only authorised persons may operate the NACOS Platinum. Danger for persons, things and the environment in case of improper operation or maintenance and repair of the NACOS Platinum.Only authorised persons are permitted to carry out cleaning and maintenance work, or troubleshooting on the NACOS Platinum!
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsI-2 Safety PrecautionsI General.fm / 10.11.11 I-19NACOS Platinum2.5 CommissioningDANGER! WORK IN PROGRESS! DO NOT SWITCH!It is not permissible to connect the ship’s mains to the system before setting-to-work by a qualified and authorised person. The mains must be switched off (e.g. by means of a common isolating switch or a circuit breaker) in the ship’s supply or the mains cable must be disconnected until commissioning is carried out.
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsI-2 Safety Precautions I General.fm / 10.11.11I-202.6 Obligatory Safety InspectionInspect and survey the safety systems at intervals prescribed by the responsible classification society orother relevant authorities.
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsI-3 NACOS Platinum System DescriptionI General.fm / 10.11.11 I-21NACOS Platinum3 NACOS Platinum System Description
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsI-3 NACOS Platinum System Description I General.fm / 10.11.11I-223.1 What is the NACOS Platinum?The NACOS Platinum is the state-of-the-art integrated Navigation-Automation-Control-System fromSAM Electronics. It consists of separate applications which form the desired specific system installed ona ship. In an installation, the set of applications may range from a stand-alone RADAR installation to afull-featured comprehensive installation. The NACOS Platinum design is the result of the efforts of a multidisciplinary usability team consisting ofspecialists from SAM Electronics, Chalmers University (Gothenburg, Sweden) and TNO Human Factors(Soesterberg, The Netherlands). In addition to high quality and reliability of the cost-effective solution,the main focus of the NACOS Platinum is on usability, modularity and scalability, ease of installation,commissioning and servicing, as well as integration with third-party systems.NACOS Platinum products serve a large variety of possible installations in a professional shipborne envi-ronment ranging from stand-alone RADAR installations meeting the minimum requirements aboard up tocomplex installations on a large ship including RADAR, ECDIS, Route Planning, Conning, Machinery andvarious other applications to navigate the ship safely, and reliably to monitor and control the processesaboard. The applications of the NACOS Platinum are operated using standardised workstations. The workstationswill be called Multi Functional Display (MFD) further on. See chapter I - 4 on page 27. MFDs are thestandardised operating consoles used as MMI to the NACOS Platinum. They are based on PCs runningunder Windows 7. From a MFD, you will have access to the applications installed in your NACOS Platinumso that the workplaces aboard are standardised. All applications can be made available at any MFD. Seechapter I - 3.2 on page 23. Fig. I / 1 MFD console designThe full suite of NACOS Platinum applications and possibly integrated third-party products provide theuser with the required information and control functions and thus essentially support the user inperforming the assigned tasks both in everyday routines and in difficult situations or in case of problems.The vast amount of information resulting from the ship's operation is always presented in a well-struc-tured and concise manner so that users will have a clear overview of the ship's situation at all times.
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsI-3 NACOS Platinum System DescriptionI General.fm / 10.11.11 I-23NACOS Platinum3.2 CustomisationYour NACOS Platinum has been customised by SAM Electronics according to the ship-specific require-ments which were specified when the system was ordered. In this context, customising means installingthe required hardware and setting up the configuration of the hardware according to the ship-specificrequirements. Customisation covers the selection of available applications to meet your specific requirements but alsoinvolves adaptations regarding the individual applications. For example, the number of operator panelsused in the Machinery application can be individually configured. This is done using special system toolswhich are used by SAM Electronics engineers and technicians only, and documented in the delivery docu-ments.Hence, in these operating instructions, the words "customisation" and "configuration" refer to thecustomisation provided by SAM Electronics, unless specific NACOS Platinum functions such as, e.g., theprinter configuration are dealt with. For exact and specific features and functional scope of your particularinstallation, please refer to the relevant order and delivery documents.NACOS Platinum products serve a large variety of possible installations in a professional shipborne envi-ronment ranging from stand-alone RADAR installations meeting the minimum requirements aboard tocomplex installations on a large ship including RADAR, ECDIS, Route Planning, Conning, Machinery (Auto-mation) and various other applications to navigate the ship safely, and to monitor and control the proc-esses aboard. Installation, customisation, configuration, as well as initial startup are carried out by SAM Electronicsaccording to the order specifications upon delivery of the NACOS Platinum. Thus, this is not covered bythese operating instructions. The actual installation aboard a ship is always specifically customised to theindividual needs. The scalability of the NACOS Platinum enables individual systems across the entireproduct range, e.g. a the minimum ship configuration in the figure below, the so-called IMO set: Fig. I / 2 Minimum installation – IMO set OutstationOutstationBridge Bridge IP RadarIP Radar
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsI-3 NACOS Platinum System Description I General.fm / 10.11.11I-24At a higher expansion stage, a small-ship configuration could include RADAR as well as Navigation &Automation: Fig. I / 3 Example of a small-ship installationAn example for a complex installation on a large ship is shown in the following figure below: Fig. I / 4 Example of a large-ship installation Outstation OutstationECRBridge BridgeIP RadarIP Radar Gateway to CCTVGateway to InfotainmentGateway to CommunicationsGateway to A dmin/C4Outstation OutstationOutstation Outstation OutstationECR ECRBridge Bridge Bridge Bridge Office OfficeIP RadarIP Radar IP Radar
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsI-3 NACOS Platinum System DescriptionI General.fm / 10.11.11 I-25NACOS Platinum3.3 Applicable StandardsThis section lists the standards and class rules the NACOS Platinum is complies with. Basically, theNACOS Platinum meets the relevant IMO INS and IMO IBS requirements. The individual standards arelisted in the following.Table I / 2 Applicable StandardsApplication Applicable standardsRADAR IEC 60945 / IEC 61162 / IEC 62288 / IEC 62388 / MSC.192(79)ECDIS IEC 60945 / IEC 61162 / IEC 62288 / IEC 61174 / MSC.232(82)Heading Control System IEC 60945 / IEC 61162 / IEC 62288 / ISO 11674 Track Control System IEC 60945 / IEC 61162 / IEC 62288 / IEC 62065 / MSC.64(69) Annex 2
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsI-3 NACOS Platinum System Description I General.fm / 10.11.11I-26
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsI-4 Multi Function DisplayI General.fm / 10.11.11 I-27NACOS Platinum4 Multi Function DisplayThis chapter describes the MFD and the relevant peripheral devices which are required or optional equip-ment to operate the NACOS Platinum.
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsI-4 Multi Function Display I General.fm / 10.11.11I-284.1 General System Description MFDThe NACOS Platinum applications are operated using standardised MFDs. A MFD is based on a PersonalComputer running under Windows 7 which is used for input and output of data of the NACOS Platinumusing the graphical user interface (GUI) of Windows. From a MFD, you will have access to the applica-tions installed in your NACOS Platinum. The GUI handling is the same on each MFD, i.e. the workplacesaboard are standardised. All applications can be made available at any MFD. See chapter 3.2 on page I-23.MFDs are installed in the consoles aboard, and they are equipped with a 22" or 26’’TFT monitor and atrackball. Optionally, MFDs can also be equipped with mouse and keyboard. See chapter 4.2 on page I-29. Fig. I / 5 MFDThe GUI is based on Microsoft Windows 7. However, you do not have direct access to Windows so thatthe MFD cannot be used like a normal PC, e.g. to install software and run applications other than theapplications related to the NACOS Platinum. In these operating instructions, we assume that you are reasonably familiar with basic Windows functionssuch as window operations, dialogue handling, menu and button operation, selecting list items oroptions, and so on. Nevertheless, many of the screen elements and basic operations are explained inthese operating instructions. See chapter 5 on page I-45, which explains features which are specificallyimportant for operation of the NACOS Platinum.When the MFD is started, a basic screen is displayed, which is referred to as Super Home from whereyou have access to all functions and information which are available on the specific MFD. If the MFD isalready running, select Super Home from the main menu or click in the menu bar to switch to SuperHome. See chapter 5.1 on page I-46.
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsI-4 Multi Function DisplayI General.fm / 10.11.11 I-29NACOS Platinum4.2 Operating Devices
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsI-4 Multi Function Display I General.fm / 10.11.11I-304.2.1 Pointing Devices – Trackball and MouseAll user interface controls are operated by the mouse or trackball which is connected to the respectiveMFD. Even if you are already familiar with using input devices like mouse or trackball, you will find oneor the other important note in this section. Fig. I / 6 Possible pointing devicesTo start an operating step move the pointer on the screen by moving the trackball or mouse. Move thepointer to the desired position on the screen, e.g. to a text item, a numerical value, a symbol, or anydesired position e.g. on the PPI. The shape of the pointer changes when you point at different elementson screen. The pointer’s shape depends on the application and the element you point at. See chapter I- 5.10 on page 82. When you point at a click-sensitive (clickable) element on screen then you can press and release (click)one of the trackball keys to display information or activate a function. The possible types of clicks areexplained separately. See chapter I - on page 31. The specific effect of clicking depends on the keyused, the element you clicked, and the operating situation. This is described in the specific parts of theseoperating instructions. Desktop trackball or mouse have two different buttons, DO and MORE key. Thefunctions of the DO and MORE keys are described in the following.DO KeyThe most frequently used of the keys is the DO key, i.e. the middle key on the built-in trackball and theleft button of the desktop trackball and mouse. Most elements on screen respond to this key by openinga menu from which you can select frequently used functions. ☞ In these operating instructions, "clicking" always means pressing the DO key. When you have topress the MORE key or the right mouse/trackball button, this will be explicitly explained in theinstructions.Built-intrackball Desktop trackball MouseDO keyNo function MORE key...DO key MORE keyScroll wheel
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsI-4 Multi Function DisplayI General.fm / 10.11.11 I-31NACOS PlatinumMORE Keys On the built-in trackballs the two keys are situated above the DO key, The right one is called MOREkey. The left key has no function. On the desktop trackball and mouse, this is the right button. The func-tions of the MORE key depend on the element you point at on screen. In some cases pressing the MOREkey opens menus, in other cases additional information are displayed. However, not all elements whichcan be operated by means of the DO key will also respond to the MORE key. Scroll WheelIf a scroll wheel is available, it can be used to scroll down lists or to zoom into or out of charts. Onlymouse and desktop trackball may be equipped with a scroll wheel.Types of ClicksIn NACOS Platinum you point at elements on screen and click or press the MORE key to display infor-mation or cause action. The following types of clicks are possible: Table I / 3 Types of clicks in NACOS PlatinumClick ExplanationSingle click ofleft key or DO key Perform action. This means pressing and immediately releasing again the DO key of the built-in trackball, or the left mouse or trackball key respec-tively. When you click on a button, this will start a process or open a dialogue. when you click on dropdown menus, this will open the menu. In a menu, to select an item, click on the item with a single click. A single click will also select and thus highlight an entry in a list. Double-click ofleft key or DO key In tables, a double-click will open a cell for editing. A cursor is displayed, and you can change the respective value like a text field. Editing resembles editing cells in Microsoft Excel. An example for such a table is a waypoint list that contains the waypoint number, name, position and some other properties, which you can change in that table by double-clicking on the cells. When you click on a folder icon in folder structures, which you will find, e.g., in the Machinery application, a double-click opens that folder and lists the subordinated contents.Press the MORE key or right-click using mouse or desktop trackballGet information, in many cases via a context menu. This is used for providing you with object-specific menu items, such as menus for properties and maintenance. These functions also provide access to adjustments, particularly in the Machinery application. Examples are: acknowledging alarms, displaying properties, etc.
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsI-4 Multi Function Display I General.fm / 10.11.11I-324.2.2 KeyboardTo enter alphanumerical values and also to operate the user interface, the MFD may be equipped witha membrane keyboard, which is integrated in the console.Fig. I / 7 Keyboard of a consoleIn some cases, an optional external keyboard is provided. For that purpose, a standard PC keyboard isused. Depending on the application you are working with, the function keys in the top row may havespecial functions. Please refer to the relevant descriptions of the individual applications. For example, inthe RADAR applications, function keys have different functions than in the Machinery application.If no external keyboard is available at all, values can also be entered using the so-called onscreenkeyboard which is an optional feature of the NACOS Platinum user interface. However, this depends oncustomisation. There may be a separate icon for the onscreen keyboard.Fig. I / 8 Onscreen keyboardYou can use this keyboard to enter text and numeric values or press function keys, just as you do whenyou use the physical PC keyboard. The onscreen keyboard thus emulates the PC keyboard and it can beused if, for whatever reason, the PC keyboard does not work. Simply click on the buttons to enter therespective letter or number, or activate the respective function of the key.Note: For the RADAR application the left part and for the TRACKPILOT the right part of the MFD consolecan be equipped with a dedicated keyboard panel. See the respective chapters for details.
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsI-4 Multi Function DisplayI General.fm / 10.11.11 I-33NACOS Platinum4.2.3 The ASCII KeyboardFig. I / 9 The Optional ASCII KeyboardThe MFD can be equipped with a ASCII keyboard in the console. It works like a common computerkeyboard, except for the fact that the backlight can be dimmed and that the location of the key-groupsis different and that the location of the key-groups is different. Backlight dimming
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsI-4 Multi Function Display I General.fm / 10.11.11I-344.2.4 The RADAR KeyboardFig. I / 10 The RADAR Keyboard
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsI-4 Multi Function DisplayI General.fm / 10.11.11 I-35NACOS Platinum4.2.5 The TRACKPILOT KeyboardFig. I / 11 The Trackpilot Keyboard
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsI-4 Multi Function Display I General.fm / 10.11.11I-364.3 TFT MonitorThe NACOS Platinum user interface is displayed on a 22" or 26’’ TFT monitor which is an integrated partof the MFD. The monitor is switched on and off automatically together with the MFD. To adjust themonitor’s settings, use the software functions and controls provided. See chapter I - 5.3.1 on page 52.
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsI-4 Multi Function DisplayI General.fm / 10.11.11 I-37NACOS Platinum4.3.1 Nominal Viewing DistanceThe monitors are designed according to IEC 62388. In chapter 6.13.2 of this test standard a maximumpixel pitch of 0.29 mm per metre of nominal viewing distance (1 min of arc) is required. Both monitorshave a pixel pitch of less than 0.29 mm. The requirement is fullfilled. Further-on above standard references to IEC 60945, Clause 4, where a minimum text height is requiredwith 3.5 mm per metre of nominal viewing distance and at least 11 pixels.The RADARPILOT as well as CHARTPILOT application provide text heights on both monitors (independentof monitor size) as follows:- "Large font with 5.5 mm- "Medium size font with 4.5 mm- "Normal size font with 3.5 mm- "Small font with 2.5 mmThe small font is not used for navigation related tasks.☞ The normal size font is used for navigation and determines the nominal viewing distance with 1metre for both monitors.This is sufficient for sitting positions in front of one of the workstations (typically 0.8 metre) as well asfor a standing position in front of the centre steering console (typically 1.0 metre). In this case theconsole has a depth of max. 0.8 metre.
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsI-4 Multi Function Display I General.fm / 10.11.11I-384.3.2 Colour Distortions on Monitors with Flat Screens (TFT Monitors)If the display content on a TFT monitor has remained unchanged for a long period of time and is thenreplaced by a different display, an effect can occur which is known as "ion spotting" in the case ofcathode ray tubes: the previous display is still faintly visible in the form of discoloration. In the case ofTFT monitors, in contrast to monitors with cathode ray tubes, this effect is reversible and thereforecannot be regarded as a defect. If the monitor is operated for a long time (several hours or days) witha different display, the discoloration disappears.
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsI-4 Multi Function DisplayI General.fm / 10.11.11 I-39NACOS Platinum4.3.3 PrintersFor the different printouts of the NACOS Platinum, two different types of printers are required:- Line printers for logs and other continually printed lists- Page printers for complete reports which are printed in one goRefer to the parts of the operating instructions describing the individual applications.
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsI-4 Multi Function Display I General.fm / 10.11.11I-404.4 Startup and Shutdown of MFDs☞ The NACOS Platinum and the related consoles and the electronics equipment are permanently upand running. They are only completely shut down by qualified authorised service personnel in caseof servicing and repair. The system components are then separated from the mains using a mainswitch on the bridge. When switching on the mains supply again, the equipment will startup auto-matically without further user action.This section describes how to use the shut-down function, if this is required, e.g. if the power supply hasto be switched off during a dockyard period, or if an individual MFD shall be switched off for specificreasons. Proceed as follows to switch off a MFD:1. Press [Alt] + [F4], or click the Menu button and then Shut Down. 2. Enter the required password.3. In the window which is displayed, select Shut Down and click OK.The other options Reboot or Log off can be used to re-boot the MFD immediately or to log offand on again. 4. Separate the unit from the mains using the mains switch on the bridge.This way, the NACOS Platinum program is terminated and the PC is shut down. The display will beswitched off automatically. To switch on the MFD use the main power switch (if appl., refer to the drawings in the delivery docu-ments). It will automatically start up and run in normal operating state, Super Home is displayed. If theMFD is already up and running and displaying a screensaver, just move the trackball slightly to displaythe graphical user interface of the MFD. As long as the ship is at sea and in operation, the NACOS Platinum must be fully operational, i.e. the NACOS Platinum and its applications must not be shut down. UPS systems must not be deactivated. Never switch off a MFD without having completed the described shutdown proce-dure. The TFT display will probably function in a normal manner when just switching off the power and then switching it on again. However, and this applies to all types of PCs used: if, at the moment it is switched off, the PC accesses the hard disk, the hard disk might be permanently damaged resulting in system failure of the MFD and loss of data.
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsI-4 Multi Function DisplayI General.fm / 10.11.11 I-41NACOS Platinum4.5 Basic Settings
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsI-4 Multi Function Display I General.fm / 10.11.11I-424.5.1 Adjusting the Display Use the brightness control symbols in the title bar( and ), in the Brilliance/Data Area menu or thekeys on the console to toggle between the available color schemes. See chapter I - 5.3.1 on page 52.With these keys any manual setting done with the sliders is reset to the factory-set default values. A MORE-click on the symbols opens the Brilliance/DataArea menu. With the Brilliance slider, the overall brilliance of the monitorcan be set. In parallel, the brightness of the backlight illumi-nation of the radar and/or TRACKPILOT keyboard is set. It isnot possible do dim the ASCII-keyboard from here.With the Data Area slider, the brightness of the elements ofthe sidebar can be set seperately.The symbols and have the same functions as described above.The corresponding keys on the console are:☞ If the screen appears completely dark due to a brilliancesetting which is unsuitable for the actual ambient lightand the symbols are no longer visible, just move themouse pointer into the top left corner and press a fewtimes the DO button. Brilliance will light up again.☞ In the PPI/or chart area the brilliance of the scales or the user symbols can be set seperately. Usea MORE-click in the PPI/or chart area in order to open the context menu and set the appropriatesliders.BrilliancedÆ
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsI-4 Multi Function DisplayI General.fm / 10.11.11 I-43NACOS Platinum4.5.2 Setting Date and TimeBoth date and time will be displayed permanently in the title bar: . Fig. I / 12 Date and Time DisplayThe symbol indicates that external synchronization of system time is not available – so that systemtime is running on the internal clock in the time-master DPU. Once the external time source becomesavailable again, the time is adjusted accordingly, and the red symbol dissapears.To set Date/Time klick on the small arrow at the very right. Adialog window opens.The operation of the controls is self-explanatory, do not forget toklick on Set after having corrected the values in order to applythem to the system.Click on Close to leave the dialog.
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsI-4 Multi Function Display I General.fm / 10.11.11I-44
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsI-5 NACOS Platinum Graphical User InterfaceI General.fm / 10.11.11 I-45NACOS Platinum5NACOS Platinum Graphical User InterfaceThis section describes the Graphical User Interface (GUI) of the NACOS Platinum. This includes the basicscreen layout starting from the moment the system is first switched on, as well as the basic screenelements and controls, general screen navigation, and how to switch between the individual NACOS Plat-inum applications. ☞ The descriptions of the user interface in this chapter start from very general, i.e. with the big areasand elements on screen which are then broken down to detailed explanations on specific items onscreen in the subsequent sections. If you are not familiar at all with the basic Windows controls andmouse/trackball pointers, it might be useful to read the respective sections before starting here. Seechapter I - 5.9 on page 69.
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsI-5 NACOS Platinum Graphical User Interface I General.fm / 10.11.11I-465.1 Super Home Super Home is the first screen that is displayed on screen after start-up of the MFD. Super Home willhelp you in quickly starting the main applications, and provide help in finding specific functions throughthe homepages of the individual applications. When you are working with the system, you can return toSuper Home by using the Super Home shortcut in the main menu or the button. Super Homeprovides links to:- All main applications´ homepages: RADAR, ECDIS monitoring, ECDIS planning, Conning andMachinery / Automation home- Secondary applications like AIS, Autopilot, Maintenance and possibly third party applications- Documents that help you getting started. Super Home has a title bar and menu bar. Clicking on the button will open the Super Home pageregardless of the current active application. Title bar and menu bar are described separately. See chapter5.3 on page I-51. Fig. I / 13 Example of Super Home The top row of applications of the Super Home page displays the main or primary applications that areinstalled in the system, in the example: RADAR, ECDIS, Machinery, and Conning. The thumbnail picturesof the applications are clickable and will link to the respective application. For example, if you click onthe RADAR thumbnail, this will open the RADAR application.The first link below the thumbnail of a main application is the link to the homepage of the application.Additional links will lead you to important functions in the applications. The second line of thumbnailscontains shortcuts to groups of functionality that are considered a logical group or additional application.For familiarization with the product, it is possible to select from the quick-links. - Take the Tour opens a presentation in which the advantages and functionality of the PLATINUMare presented.Main applicationsLogical groups and additional applicationsQuick access to additional infor-mation
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsI-5 NACOS Platinum Graphical User InterfaceI General.fm / 10.11.11 I-47NACOS Platinum5.2 Screen LayoutThe main page of an application consists of two main areas: the sidebar and the application area. Thesidebar on the left provides access to details and functions of the applications. The sidebar is describedseparately. See chapter 5.3 on page I-51. The application area located on the right shows the mainwindow of the active application. It can show the radar PPI, the ECDIS chart or Machinery mimics etc.The general behaviour of the application area is described separately. See chapter 5.4 on page I-59. Fig. I / 14 General screen layout of the NACOS Platinum (RADAR Mode)The general screen layout, especially the size of the different areas, may vary betwen the different avail-able applications.Sidebar
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsI-5 NACOS Platinum Graphical User Interface I General.fm / 10.11.11I-485.2.1 Title Bar The title bar provides information and functions which are permanently available in the system.Fig. I / 15 NACOS Platinum title bar of RADAR applicationThe figure above shows an example of the title bar with the RADAR application being the active appli-cation. The information and functions provided are explained in the following.5.2.1.1 BrillianceYou can use the / buttons in the top left corner to toggle between the availablecolor schemes for different ambient light conditions. Alternatively you can use the keyson the console or the appropriate entry in the menu. Five different color schemes are available for different ambient light conditions. Thebrilliance is toggled between 5%, 20%, 60%, 80% and 100%. The Data Area brilliance setting is not affected by these cobtrols. But it changes accordingly, becausethe brilliance setting is relevant for the whole screen.☞ The brilliance of the monitor does not change stepwise, in fact it changes smoothly from theprevious setting to the actual desired value.Fig. I / 16 Color schemes of the Color & settingsThe buttons are located in the top left corner which is easy to remember. This way, when the screen ishardly readable due to changing light conditions, you will be easily able to find the / buttons atthe fixed and easy to find location. 100% 20%
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsI-5 NACOS Platinum Graphical User InterfaceI General.fm / 10.11.11 I-49NACOS PlatinumHowever, you can also individually adjust the brilliance of thescreen. If you press the MORE key (right-click) on the / button to open the Brilliance menu. To adjust the settings,click on the right or left of the slider or drag the slider. The newvalue is shown on the right and the screen’s settings areadjusted accordingly.☞ There are no knobs or other controls on the monitor(s) to adjust the brightness.5.2.1.2 Active Application TitleThe title bar displays the name of the application which is currently active in the application area, e.g. Fig. I / 17 Active Application Title5.2.1.3 Date and TimeBoth date and time will be displayed permanently in the title bar: 5.2.1.4 Alive IndicationThe use of the brightness controls may inhibit visibility of information, particularly when using the night color tables!
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsI-5 NACOS Platinum Graphical User Interface I General.fm / 10.11.11I-50There are different possibilities available to verify the alive status of the MFD which are listed andexplained below.The Time DisplayThe system provides feedback that it is still active and operating, i.e. alive. This is specifically indicatedon each MFD in the title bar of the HMI by the seconds changing in the time display.If picture freeze occurs, all data on the screen as well as the display of the seconds will be frozen, sothat the operator is able to notice this fault.The Cursor and HMIPicture freeze caused by the computer or the graphics adapter of the MFD can also be recognized by thefact that moving the trackball or the mouse does no longer change the cursor position on the screen.If the computer or its application software has a severe fault it can also happen that the cursor is stillmoving but a click on any HMI element (for instance an operable button on the screen) is no longerworking correctly.The RADAR VideoThe transmission of the radar video from a connected transceiver to the MFD is monitored continuously.If the connection to the transceiver is disturbed or completely lost, the respective alarm messagesdescribing the reason for the fault are given (See chapter 7.15 on page A-81 for details).If the refresh of the radar video is not possible, the alarm No RADAR Video is issued; the video in thePPI is cleared and will no longer be updated.If no such alarm is indicated and you want to check the alive status of the radar transmission and thePPI update you should switch off all signal processing of the radar video, increase the video gain tomaximum in order to visualize all targets and eventually clutter in the vicinity, or - as a minimum - makethe video noise visible on the PPI. If the video noise is visible and is changing at each antenna rotation,this part of the system is alive and operable.In order to make the rotating antenna sweep visible, you can- "Step up and down with the radar range, or- "Change the video gain between minimum and maximum.In both cases the update of the video sectors on the PPI should be observable.The MonitorA green LED at the lower right corner of the MFD monitor indicates the running connection to the MFDcomputer. If the connection is lost or disturbed, the LED will stay green but start flashing once persecond and the screen will normally become dark. If the LED changes to orange the monitor is in stand-by mode waiting for sync signal, red indicates the switched off status. The LED will flash red in case ofexcessive temperatures.
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsI-5 NACOS Platinum Graphical User InterfaceI General.fm / 10.11.11 I-51NACOS Platinum5.3 SidebarThe width of the sidebar in each application is fixed, but it varies from application to application. Thesidebar consists of a permanent area, a non-permanent area, title bar and a menu bar, which areexplained in the following sub-sections. Fig. I / 18 RADAR sidebarPermanent areaMenu barAlarms ExpanderNon-permanent areaTitle barTRACKPILOT ExpanderTabsExpanders of the Tab
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsI-5 NACOS Platinum Graphical User Interface I General.fm / 10.11.11I-525.3.1 Permanent Area The upper half of the sidebar is the permanent area. It shows status information and controls that aremandatory according to regulations and thus must be permanently visible. In addition, the permanentarea can show information that is not mandatory but which you would expect to be permanently visibleor that are de facto standards. This area can never be overlapped or hidden by permanent pop-ups ordialogue windows.The height of the permanent area varies between the applications since some NACOS Platinum applica-tions require more permanently visible information that others. For instance, RADAR requires morepermanent controls than the Machinery application. The figure below shows the permanent area of theRADAR application: Fig. I / 19 Sidebar – permanent area of the RADAR applicationThe RADAR application has the largest permanent area in the system since it requires the most manda-tory controls. The RADAR permanent area is divided into two columns containing various groups. Thefollowing information are provided in the groups:- Displaycontaining orientation, motion, range and reference controls.- Heading and Speed (of own ship). Drift is not mandatory but it is included based on an early investigation into S-mode requirements.- Position- Vector and Trails- Chart- Targets- RADARcontaining the radar transceiver controls
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsI-5 NACOS Platinum Graphical User InterfaceI General.fm / 10.11.11 I-53NACOS Platinum- RADAR Videocontaining the video display controls- Electronic Bearing Lines (EBL), Variable Range Markers (VRM) and Parallel Indes Lines (PI).Alarm icons in front of a value indicate that the respective value is in alarm or warning status. Seechapter I - 5.9.12 on page 81.The buttons are push buttons used to toggle between hiding and displayingthe radar video and overlay.
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsI-5 NACOS Platinum Graphical User Interface I General.fm / 10.11.11I-545.3.2 Non-Permanent AreaThe lower half of the sidebar is the non-permanent area. It shows status information, parameters, toolsand controls. Some expanders are constantly visible, some can be hidden. See table below for details.The expanders are grouped and stacked by means of so-called tabs. Click on a tab to view the subordi-nated expanders. Using expanders you can expand and collapse, i.e. display and hide a variety of views,controls or setting screens. The height of the non-permanent area is flexible and depends on the size ofthe permanent area. If an opened expander exceeds the available space, a scrollbar is provided to scrollup and down the contents of parts of the non-permanent area or to scroll left/right within parts ofexpanders.The controls displayed in the non-permanent area depend on the active application. For instance, theRADAR application will display various settings screens. Machinery includes a navigation tool to browsethrough large sets of mimic screens. The figure below shows an example of the non-permanent area ofthe RADAR and ECDIS application: Fig. I / 20 Sidebar – example of the non-permanent area of the RADAR applicationThe Alarm line expander and the optional TRACKPILOT expander have a permanent bar below the titlebar. This additional permanent bar will display information such as the latest alarm message, ioperatingmode, settings, etc. The general handling and type of expanders are described separately. The detailedcontent and functionality of exoanders is part of the different application related chapters.☞ If you open multiple expanders they often donot fit into the sidebar. In such cases, other expanderswill be closed or cut off at the lower end.Tabs with which the expanders are stackedExpandersNon-permanent area
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsI-5 NACOS Platinum Graphical User InterfaceI General.fm / 10.11.11 I-55NACOS Platinum☞ The expanders shown and described in this handbook may vary from the ones visible on yoursystem. The presence and display of the expanders depends on the system´s configuration. Never-theless, all possible expanders will be described in this handbook.Table I / 4 Visibility of ExpandersExpander Name is always visible / is only visible if the system contains ...ENC always visibleTarget always visibleRoute ?Display always visibleTrackpilot Only visible if an Autopilot is present in the systemAlarms always visibleMeasurements ?Mimics ?
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsI-5 NACOS Platinum Graphical User Interface I General.fm / 10.11.11I-565.3.3 Menu Bar The menu bar provides functions for navigation between applications and screens in the NACOS Plat-inum. To open the menu, click on the Menu button in the bottom left corner of the display. The menuresembles the Start menu of MS Windows 7. The figure below shows an example of a NACOS Platinummenu which is displayed when clicking on the Menu button:Fig. I / 21 Opened NACOS Platinum main menu ☞ When you move the mouse or trackball pointer over the buttons of the menu bar, you will experi-ence a rollover effect indicating the button you are currently pointing at. This will help you topinpoint the right button for the current operating situation even in case of emergency.Shortcuts to the primary applicationsSearch functionThe individual buttons and elements are described below. See table I / 5.
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsI-5 NACOS Platinum Graphical User InterfaceI General.fm / 10.11.11 I-57NACOS PlatinumThe items and functions of the menu bar depend on the configuration. They are described in thefollowing table: Table I / 5 Items on the NACOS Platinum main menuMenu Item / Button Explanation When you click on the Menu button, the menu is opened like the Start menu of MS Windows 7. When the Show Full Menu Structure option is activated, the list will change to a tree view showing a complete menu structure in form of a folder struc-ture. The Option then becomes the Back option, and if you click on the Back option, the menu returns to the standard variant.Home The Home button takes you to the Super Home page. S-mode The S-mode button takes you to a standard settings mode of the current active application. S-mode for RADAR consists of a specific configuration of settings according to the relevant standards for RADAR. S-mode is like a clean-up function that brings the application to a default configuration closing all manually opened expanders. See chapter II - 1 on page II-3 for details.Search The Search button opens a text field and places the cursor in that search field to do a system-wide search. When you start to type in the text or numbers to be looked up, the menu switches into search result display mode. The search results are instantly displayed and continuously updated as you type in the character string. ☞ Full Screen The Full Screen button hides the sidebar. See chapter I - 5.3.3.1 on page 58. Unhide Sidebar The Unhide Sidebar button restores the sidebar. Only displayed when the current application is running in Full Screen mode. See chapter I - 5.3.3.1 on page 58.Shortcuts, e.g. Shortcuts access the configured main applications, e.g.: RADAR, ECDIS Moni-toring, ECDIS Planning, and Machinery. There are also shortcuts provided that access Super Home and the homepages of the main applications.Super Home Returns to the Super Home window. See chapter 5.1 on page I-46 for details.Favorites Using the Favorites you can quickly select specific (favorite or often visited) screens or application pages. Help Nothing happens.About Displays a window with information about the software version etc:Color & Brightness Nothing happens.Time & Date The menu window is closed.Shut Down Use this button to shut down the MFD. Observe the relevant safety notes! See chapter I - 4.4 on page 40
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsI-5 NACOS Platinum Graphical User Interface I General.fm / 10.11.11I-585.3.3.1 Full Screen ModeThe Full Screen (or hide sidebar) function is a mechanism that switches the display to a full screen viewthat shows only the application area, and the sidebar is hidden. However, full screen mode is only avail-able depending on the application:- RADAR does not allow the full screen mode.- ECDIS in monitoring mode does not allow the full screen mode. - Operating the TRACKPILOT as the TRACKPILOT-Master does not allow the full screen mode. - Machinery containing alarm displays does not allow the full screen mode. - Conning allows the full screen mode.To switch to full screen mode, click on the button (Full Screen) in the menu bar. The sidebar is thenhidden: Fig. I / 22 ECDIS in full screen mode In Full Screen mode, only the button becomes the button (Unhide sidebar). No other controls willbe visible. To unhide the sidebar again, simply click on the button in the bottom left corner. Thesidebar will then be restored.Full screen button has become the Unhide side bar button
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsI-5 NACOS Platinum Graphical User InterfaceI General.fm / 10.11.11 I-59NACOS Platinum5.4 Application Area
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsI-5 NACOS Platinum Graphical User Interface I General.fm / 10.11.11I-605.4.1 Application Area FramesThe application area on the right of the sidebar shows the main windowof the active application. It can show the RADAR PPI, the ECDIS chart,or Machinery mimics etc. The application area can have six differentlayout types. The grouped contents are arranged in separate frames.Fig. I / 23 Application area framesThe sizes of the frames are flexible in some of the operation modes of the MFD. In some applicationsthe dividers between the frames can be moved to resize the frames, in others not. For that purpose,click on the divider, hold the button and drag the divider into the desired direction. The picture belowshows an example of a screen with three frames:Fig. I / 24 Example: Machinery screen with three framesEach frame in a layout can contain multiple tabbed panels that group similar information. See chapter I- 5.5 on page 62. Switching Between LayoutsLayouts can be switched by selecting a new layout type using the buttons in the topright corner of the screen. The currently selected layout is indicated by the white icon. The other layouttypes are greyed out. 123Layout Selector
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsI-5 NACOS Platinum Graphical User InterfaceI General.fm / 10.11.11 I-61NACOS PlatinumSwitching to More Frames When you switch to a layout type with more frames than the current layout, e.g. from 1 frame to 2frames, the existing frames are kept and one or more new frames are added. The new tabs are loadedwith a default content. For that purpose, use the buttons in the title bar of the mainapplication window.If the application area has multiple frames, then you can select aspecific frame, in which the tabbed panel will be opened, by pressingthe MORE key (right-clicking) on the tab and selecting the desiredoption from the context menu. This behaviour is similar to the Open InNew Tab function in web browsers. Switching to Different Arrangement of Frames When you switch to an equal number of frames, e.g. from 2 horizontal to 2 vertical frames, some contentmoves. No content is hidden if it is not necessary. Between the two-frames layouts the bottom contentmoves to the right frame and vice versa. Between the three-frames layouts the top right content movesto the bottom right frame and vice versa.Switching to Less FramesWhen you switch to a layout type with less frames than the current layout, e.g. from 3 frames to 2frames, some frames will be hidden. In addition to choosing a new layout type using the buttons in thetop right corner of the screen, you can also switch to a lower layout type by closing the last tab in aframe. When the last tab is closed the frame is closed too.
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsI-5 NACOS Platinum Graphical User Interface I General.fm / 10.11.11I-625.5 Tabbed PanelsIn the NACOS Platinum applications, information are in many cases grouped on so-called tabbed panels.Tabbed panels are screen pages which are arranged on top of each other like a pile of paper sheets.The tabs identify the panels, and they are used to navigate through the panels. The picture below showsan example: Fig. I / 25 Example: Machinery screen with tabbed panels in three framesThe active tab is displayed in the foreground, and it is highlighted, which is e.g. indicated by a blue tab.The active tabbed panel has the so-called focus. That means that editing, e.g. entering values oradjusting the display, is only possible on that active tab. The other tabs are displayed as grey text sepa-rated with a vertical line. When you click on a hidden tab in the background, it is brought to the fore-ground and becomes the active tab. See table I / 25 above. You can also press [CTRL]+[TAB] on thekeyboard repeatedly to switch from tab to tab. In a multiple-frame-view, the other frames, which do nothave the focus, the front tabs are still highlighted by a grey tab but you will see that only one tab willbe active and have the focus. Active Tab Behaviour when Switching to Different LayoutsWhen you switch to a new layout type using the buttons (Layout Selector)the active tab has the following behaviour. If you switch to a layout type that has...- One more frame: the new frame becomes the active frame.- Two or three additional frames: the current active frame stays the active frame.- The same number of frames: the current active frame moves along with the switching behaviour.- Less frames: the current active frame remains the active frame unless it is the one which is closed.In that case the horizontally adjacent frame becomes active.In all cases the active tabbed panel will be highlighted, indicated by the blue tab.Note:Active TabForemost TabOther Tabs123Layout Selector
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsI-5 NACOS Platinum Graphical User InterfaceI General.fm / 10.11.11 I-63NACOS PlatinumIn some applications or display modes (e.g. radar) not all views may be available to the operatorTab Context Menu When you press the MORE key (right-click) on a tab, this will open thecontext menu. Using a tab’s context menu you can specifically adjustthe tabbed panel’s appearance on screen and move it to a differentlocation on screen. The following options are available:- Open in Displays the contents of the tab in a different frame, which you select in a sub-menu.- Tear Off Display the contents of the tab in a new, independent window that can be moved all over thescreen. To make the window a tab again, drag and drop the window by pointing at its upper leftcorner and move it back to the tab’s position in the upper left corner of the respective frame.Fig. I / 26 Tab after using tear-off function- CloseCloses the current tabbed panel.Torn-off tab ...now displayed as a window
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsI-5 NACOS Platinum Graphical User Interface I General.fm / 10.11.11I-645.6 Lists & TablesWherever useful in NACOS Platinum, system data which have a record structure are displayed in lists,e.g. alarms, track details, etc. In the following you will find examples of two lists.Fig. I / 27 Example 1: Target List in RADAR sidebarThe target list shows the the currently tracked radar targets. Using the scrollbar on the right you canscroll and page up and down the list. The next figure shows an example of the Machinery Alarm List: Fig. I / 28 Example 2: Alarm ListLists have a header, a details pane, and a footer. HeaderDetailspaneFooter
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsI-5 NACOS Platinum Graphical User InterfaceI General.fm / 10.11.11 I-65NACOS PlatinumList Details PaneIn the top row of the details pane you will find the column headings. You can changethe sorting order by clicking on a column heading. The sorting order is indicated bya small arrow. For example, the arrow up in the Name column indicates that the listis sorted by the Name column in alphanumerically ascending order. When you clickon the Name column again, this will revert the sorting order to descending.In some lists the sorting order is predefined. For example, the Alarm list must be sorted chronologically.Hence it is predefined that the Alarm list is sorted by the time column in descending order starting withthe oldest alarm. The width of a column can be adjusted by dragging the separator line between twocolumn headings. In some cases adjusting of width may be disabled. Also showing, hiding and reorderingof columns can be enabled or restricted in the individual case.List FooterThe footer of a list in some cases contains the number of list entries.
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsI-5 NACOS Platinum Graphical User Interface I General.fm / 10.11.11I-665.7 Dialogues Dialogues are opened when you click on buttons or they are opened by the system as a response toactions or events, e.g. in case of error. Message dialogues and popup edit windows need to be differen-tiated, and they are explained in the following.
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsI-5 NACOS Platinum Graphical User InterfaceI General.fm / 10.11.11 I-67NACOS Platinum5.7.1 Popup Edit Windows When you wish to adjust a value in the NACOS Platinum, you will in many cases click on an Adjustbutton to open a separate popup edit window. Such a window contains:- Edit fields with a label in front. The edit field will allow inputof text. Also, the small up-down arrows are provided thatincrements/decrements the value. See chapter I - 5.9.8 onpage 77. In rare cases a slider might also be available. - An indication of the range the value can have (for example0 - 360°).- OK button and a Cancel button. The OK preferably uses amore specific verb that is applicable to the specific action,like 'Adjust' or 'Send'.Click(Example)
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsI-5 NACOS Platinum Graphical User Interface I General.fm / 10.11.11I-685.8 TooltipsTooltips are an interface element that is used to provide you with instant information on elements yousee on screen. Tooltips are small text pop-ups which are displayed when you simply point at elementson screen. After a short delay, a small popup is displayed with a short description informing you aboutthe function or meaning of the element you pointed at. After a short while, the tooltip is faded out sothat you can see all screen information again.When you open the menu and move the trackball pointer down the list of menu items, tooltips aredisplayed for the individual menu items:Fig. I / 29 Tooltip of a menu item☞ Please note that you will not find tooltips on all elements on screen but on important displayelements and controls such as buttons and dropdown menus. Also, many screen objects like thetools, chart symbols and targets in the PPI of the radar can have tooltips to supply relevant infor-mation such as distance, bearing and ETA, or the own ship’s position.
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsI-5 NACOS Platinum Graphical User InterfaceI General.fm / 10.11.11 I-69NACOS Platinum5.9 Controls – Adjusting ValuesMost of the controls used in the NACOS Platinum applications are very similar to the known controls usedby Microsoft Windows. The picture below shows some examples of the controls:Fig. I / 30 Examples of NACOS Platinum controlsThe individual controls shown in the figure are described in the following sub-sections.Check boxesSee chapter 5.9.6 on page I-75.Dropdown menu See chapter 5.9.5 on page I-74.SliderSee chapter 5.9.3 on page I-72.Alarm/Warning icon related to the indicationSee chapter 5.9.8 on page I-77.Push buttonSee chapter 5.9.4 on page I-73.Field group, controls for the same topic See chapter 5.9.2 on page I-71.Field group nameFields withdropdown menusFields See chapter 5.9.1 on page I-70.Spin boxesSee chapter 5.9.8 on page I-77.Zoom and pan controlSee chapter 5.9.10 on page I-79.ScrollbarSee chapter 5.9.7 on page I-76.ExpanderSee chapter 5.9.10 on page I-79.Keys for numeric valuesSee chapter 5.9.9 on page I-78.
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsI-5 NACOS Platinum Graphical User Interface I General.fm / 10.11.11I-705.9.1 FieldsIn NACOS Platinum, values in form of text, numbers, slider settings, check boxes, etc. are generallyreferred to as fields. A field consists of the value and a label, the field name. Some of the fields are read-only, they only serve for information purposes. In other fields, the values can be adjusted. See chapterI - 5.9 on page 69.
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsI-5 NACOS Platinum Graphical User InterfaceI General.fm / 10.11.11 I-71NACOS Platinum5.9.2 Field GroupsField groups are represented on the NACOS Platinum user interface by a thin frame around a number offields. The frame indicates that the fields inside it belong together, i.e. that they belong to the samesubject or to a group of related items. Field groups have a name which is a kind of heading for the fieldsinside the group.
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsI-5 NACOS Platinum Graphical User Interface I General.fm / 10.11.11I-725.9.3 SlidersUsing sliders you can set a value within a range of possible values. Thecurrent value is indicated as you drag the slider to either side. Theminimum value is 0%, the maximum value is 100%. Simply clicking onthe slider’s handle displays the current value of the slider.When you click on the slider next to the current value, this will increaseor decrease the value by 10 or another predefined value.Show current valueDecrease value by 10
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsI-5 NACOS Platinum Graphical User InterfaceI General.fm / 10.11.11 I-73NACOS Platinum5.9.4 Push ButtonsPush buttons resemble buttons in the real world. When you press them, something will happen. Whenyou click on a push button on screen an action will be carried out or details will be displayed. Thepurpose of a button is indicated by its label, in some cases tooltips are provided. See chapter I - 5.8 onpage 68. ☞ The Hide Video / Overlay buttons are spring-loaded. They are onlyactive as long as the appropriate button of the pointing device ispressed.
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsI-5 NACOS Platinum Graphical User Interface I General.fm / 10.11.11I-745.9.5 Dropdown MenusDropdown menus are indicated by a small downward arrow next to afield. To open the menu, click on the arrow. To select different value forthe field, click the desired item on the dropdown menu. The field is thenupdated accordingly. To close the menu without making any changes,just click on any free area on screen or press the [ESC] button on thekeyboard.
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsI-5 NACOS Platinum Graphical User InterfaceI General.fm / 10.11.11 I-75NACOS Platinum5.9.6 Check BoxesCheck boxes indicate that there is an option that can be set or not. Inthe example in the figure on the right, the parallel index lines (PI) 1to 4 are ticked off, i.e. selected and thus activated. This is indicatedby the small check mark . To select a check box, just click on it sothat it is ticked off. To clear the check box again, click on it so thatthe check mark disappears ( ).
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsI-5 NACOS Platinum Graphical User Interface I General.fm / 10.11.11I-765.9.7 Scroll BarsScroll bars are displayed when contents do not fit on the screen or sidebar etc. You can then use scrollbars to move the display up and down or sideways to view hidden parts. To scroll the display in small steps you can click on the scroll arrows at the end of the scrollbar. To pagethrough the display in larger steps click on the scrollbar or drag the scroll box. Alternatively you can usethe navigation keys of the computer keyboard, e.g. arrow keys or [PAGE UP] and [Page DOWN] forvertical scroll bars.
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsI-5 NACOS Platinum Graphical User InterfaceI General.fm / 10.11.11 I-77NACOS Platinum5.9.8 Spin boxesSpin boxes are used in the NACOS Platinum to display and adjustnumeric values. To adjust the value you can enter the new valuedirectly in the text box. Alternatively, you can use the small arrowbuttons. When you click on the small arrows and hold the trackball button, then the velocity value in theexample will increase or decrease continuously until you release the button again. A single click on oneof the buttons will increase or decrease the value by one increment step.
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsI-5 NACOS Platinum Graphical User Interface I General.fm / 10.11.11I-785.9.9 Keys for Numeric ValuesWhenever it is possible or needed to enter a numeric value, theappropriate keys wil be displayed in the control window. Select thevalue to be changed and enter the desired value by clicking theappropriate keys.
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsI-5 NACOS Platinum Graphical User InterfaceI General.fm / 10.11.11 I-79NACOS Platinum5.9.10 Zoom and Pan Control The zoom and pan control in NACOS Platinum consists of a slider to adjust the zoom factor for, e.g., theECDIS chart, and the compass control with pan buttons, which you can use to move the image sectioncurrently displayed.Fig. I / 31 Zoom and pan controlTo zoom in in increments, click on , you will then see more details on the respective display. However,the overall area displayed is smaller. To zoom out again, click on the . You will then see less detailsbut you will have a better general overview of, e.g. an electronic chart displayed.To pan the display, use the panning arrows of the compass control. For example, if you click on thenthe display moves to the right in increments to view a different image section of a chart or whatever isdisplayed. The effect is like travelling with the eye over a large map.To center the display, e.g. after panning, just click on the icon once. - Compass control with 4 pan arrowsSlider to adjust zoom factorZoom inZoom out
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsI-5 NACOS Platinum Graphical User Interface I General.fm / 10.11.11I-805.9.11 Alphanumeric and Graphical Indications To make things stand out on mimics and on graphics presentations special kinds of indications areprovided. See figure I / 32. You will find the following four types of indicators:- Static graphics and symbolsThese are not operational. Neither manual nor automatic. They are visualized to help you gettingan idea of the real infrastructure aboard, e.g. of piping systems. The status is not shown becausethe device is not connected to any sensoring or to the interface. - Live updated graphics and values These graphics are not operated through the NACOS Platinum user interface, but the state and valueis automatically (live) updated by the system. These graphics are indicated with a drop shadow andcolored graphics or a value / text indicating their state (usually "running" or "stopped"). The dropshadow indicates live updating by the system. The color of the graphics is used to indicate the stateof the related machinery component. Even if it is blocked for some reason the color shall be main-tained as long as the state is known. For Machinery components the block state is indicated by a"B" shown next to the graphics. - Changeable (clickable) graphics and values These graphics can be operated using the NACOS Platinum user interface. They are clickable andcan be set or changed, and the value is automatically (live) updated via the system. These valuesare indicated with a drop shadow below the colored graphic or value. The color of the graphic isused to indicate the state of the related machinery component. For Machinery components the blockstate is indicated by a "B" shown next to the graphics. When the mouse pointer is over the objectthe pointer also changes to a pointing hand . - Manually changeable graphics and values This is an infrequent indicator. The state of a device can be set in the interface but the device isnot operated from the interface. Also the value is not live updated via the system. You have to goto the physical device and change the state. The indication on the screen is an aid to the humanmemory. However it also has the danger of indicating a different state than the device is actuallyin. These indicators will be visualized with a "manual" icon. The colored graphic will display thestate.Fig. I / 32 Visualisation types of indication
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsI-5 NACOS Platinum Graphical User InterfaceI General.fm / 10.11.11 I-81NACOS Platinum5.9.12 Alarm IconsIn NACOS Platinum all alarms will be indicated in the same way in all cases. The different states of analarm are indicated by different symbols in dedicated colors. The symbols will be used in the followingmanner:- Placed in front of the alarm line in Alarm Lists- Placed in front of the label in the permanent area of RADAR and ECDIS- As a separate symbol in mimic diagrams for binary alarms. (e.g. used for a level switch in a tank)- As a symbol placed behind the Unit of an analogue value displayed on a mimic diagram. (e.g. usedfor display of a temperature with a limit)- As a symbol placed beside a function block symbol (indicating the state of machinery components,e.g. pumps, valves, generators etc.Fig. I / 33 Example of alarm typesFor detailed information about alarms, please refer to the V-ALARMS part of these operating instructions.
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsI-5 NACOS Platinum Graphical User Interface I General.fm / 10.11.11I-825.10 Mouse Pointers and Clicks In NACOS Platinum you will experience that the shape of the mouse or trackball pointer will change indifferent situations as you move it over the screen. The basic shape is always the arrow used to openmenus and options on screen. In text fields, the pointer becomes a text edit caret ; on dividers, thepointer turns into a double arrow indicating that you can resize something, and so on. Table I / 6 Mouse pointersThe different shapes are explained in the following for the RADAR and ECDIS applications as well as forthe Machinery application. The possible types of clicks are explained separately. See chapter I - on page31. Precision select Text edit caret (cursor) Cross hair Move Arrow Resize, double arrow Pointing hand Waiting
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsI-5 NACOS Platinum Graphical User InterfaceI General.fm / 10.11.11 I-83NACOS Platinum5.10.1 Pointers in RADAR and ECDISYou will find the following specific types of pointers in the RADAR and ECDIS applications:Table I / 7 RADAR and ECDIS pointersPointer Explanation Arrow Standard pointer when you are not pointing at an any specific object on screen in the application area but when you point at menus, fields and other controls in the sidebar, in dialogues, or in frames showing lists etc. Precision select Standard pointer when you are not pointing at an any specific object on screen in the application area. Cross hair Cross hair– one target:When the mouse pointer is over one target, the cross hair pointer indicates that the target can be acquired. A single left click acquires the target.cross hair – multiple targets:When the mouse pointer is over multiple targets, the cross hair pointer indi-cates that the targets can be acquired. A single left click opens a menu that displays the relevant acquisition options (for instance Acquire RADAR, Acquire AIS, Acquire Both, Escape)When the mouse pointer is over an acquired target a box around the target indicates that it is already acquired and properties / data of the target can be accessed. A single right click displays the properties in a tooltip or popup. This popup should automatically hide after a few seconds.Position indication When you move the pointer over the RADAR PPI or the ECDIS display, then the respective position is indicated in a text box together with range and bearing. Pointing hand When the mouse pointer is over a clickable object, the pointing hand indi-cates that the object is clickable. Both left and right clicks can have an effect. , , When the mouse pointer is over a moveable object, for example a "handle" of a variable range marker, the arrows indicate the direction in which the handle of the object can be moved.
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsI-5 NACOS Platinum Graphical User Interface I General.fm / 10.11.11I-845.10.2 Mouse Pointers for MachineryYou will find the following specific types of pointers in the Machinery application:Table I / 8 Machinery pointersPointer Explanation Arrow Standard pointer when you are not pointing at an any specific object on screen in the application area but when you point at menus, fields and other controls in the sidebar, in dialogues, or in frames showing lists etc. Pointing hand When the mouse pointer is over a clickable object, the pointing hand indi-cates that the object is clickable. Both left and right clicks can have an effect.
QUICK START GUIDE
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsII-1 How to start quicklyII Quick Start Guide.fm / 10.11.11 II-3NACOS Platinum1 How to start quicklyAfter power-on, the system starts automatically and displays the Super Home page. See 5 on page I-45. From this page, the appropriate functions of the system can be chosen.Since the electronic units are always in standby, even if the screens are dark, it is neccessary to be ableto return to a specified state, the power - on state.For this, the S-Mode is relevant.Once the appropriate button is clicked on the screen, the RADAR/ECDIS returns to the settings that havebeen present on power-on.
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsII-1 How to start quickly II Quick Start Guide.fm / 10.11.11II-41.1 The S-Mode for RADARPressing the S-Mode button for RADAR leads the following settings:- Range: 6 nm- Orientation: North up- VRM1 on- EBL1 on- Vectors & plots: on, 6 minutes- Transceiver settings remain unchanged- Target acquisition status remains unchanged - Route remains visible (if activated)- ENC: if available and active, the display will be reduced to “Base Display” - Color-scheme / brightness control remains unchanged.- expanders are closed apart from the target list
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsII-1 How to start quicklyII Quick Start Guide.fm / 10.11.11 II-5NACOS Platinum1.2 The S-Mode for ECDISPressing the S-Mode button for ECDIS leads the following settings:
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsII-1 How to start quickly II Quick Start Guide.fm / 10.11.11II-6
MAIN APPLICATIONS
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsIII-1 Overview of Products and ApplicationsIII Main Applications.fm / 10.11.11 III-3NACOS Platinum1 Overview of Products and Applications
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsIII-1 Overview of Products and Applications III Main Applications.fm / 10.11.11III-41.1 NACOS Platinum ProductsThe NACOS Platinum Series is offering four advanced products for various vessel and user requirementsas follows:Table III / 1 NACOS Platinum and its ApplicationsEach product provides one or more applications and possible options as indicated above. Each productcomprises also the necessary hardware to run these applications. The hardware consists of the Multi-Functional-Display (workstation), navigation and engine interface, and in case of MACHINERY also auto-mation I/O and controllers, and in case of RADAR also an X- or S-band antenna unit. The applicationscome along with supporting packages for service, training, configuration, and others. The product nameas above is written at the top left frame corner of the monitor of the corresponding workstation (not thescreen!).Each navigation product can be combined with the optional TRACKPILOT application. In that case thekeyboard of the corresponding workstation is fitted with the joystick and labelled with TRACKPILOT. Onthe Platinum home page the additional TRACKPILOT application will be shown. Further on the hardware is extended by an extra electronic unit as well as a special TRACKPILOT inter-face. The TRACKPILOT application does not have its own user interface but is integrated in the non-permanent area of RADAR or ECDIS.ECDISPILOT and MULTIPILOT can be combined with the optional MACHINERY application. In that casethe Platinum home page shows the MACHINERY application in addition and the workstation is connectedvia network to the automation subsystems.ApplicationsProduct RADAR CONNING ECDIS MACHINERYRADARPILOT Option:Advanced Option:ChartradarECDISPILOT Option:Advanced Option:AutomationMULTIPILOT Option:Advanced Option:AutomationMCS
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsIII-1 Overview of Products and ApplicationsIII Main Applications.fm / 10.11.11 III-5NACOS Platinum1.2 RADAR ApplicationThe RADAR application shows the raw video as well as the radar targets processed by the antenna unitwhich has been selected by the operator. The new IP RADAR technology allows the operator to switchvia network to any assigned antenna unit on-board (one or more X-band as well as one or more S-bandunits). Advanced filter techniques are used for clutter supression and enhanced small target detection.Various navigation tools are available for collision detection and calculation based on the pre-processedtargets. AIS targets from a separate AIS transponder unit are processed exactly in the same way as radartargets. RADAR and AIS targets can be merged together. The user may edit his own user symbols androute data on a separate layer under the radar presentation.Fig. III / 1 Overview of the RADAR ScreenThe "Advanced RADAR" option provides next to other features a CONNING application. The user mayswitch over to this application at any time or have a separate display for permanent use.
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsIII-1 Overview of Products and Applications III Main Applications.fm / 10.11.11III-6Fig. III / 2 Overview of the Chartradar ScreenThe "Chartradar" option provides an ECDIS background within the bearing scale on the PPI. Chart databases for ENC are used. The Chartradar is approved as ECDIS back-up and designed to meet the IEC62288 and IEC 62388, a standard for radar with chart.
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsIII-1 Overview of Products and ApplicationsIII Main Applications.fm / 10.11.11 III-7NACOS Platinum1.3 ECDIS ApplicationThe ECDIS application for the ECDISPILOT as well as CHARTRADAR and MULTIPILOT presents the ownship embedded in an ENC chart. Various tools are available for route planning and voyage execution, fornavigation, for route checking, for shallow water warning and for collision avoidance. AIS targets from aseparate AIS transponder unit and radar targets are processed together and merged in the same way asfor the RADAR application. 1)Fig. III / 3 Overview of the ECDIS Screen1) A Standalone-ECDISPILOT does not process RADAR targets.
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsIII-1 Overview of Products and Applications III Main Applications.fm / 10.11.11III-81.4 CONNING ApplicationThe CONNING application provides an overview of the navigational situation of the vessel. It displays allnavigation data and if fitted with the optional engine interface also rudder and propulsion related data.Fig. III / 4 Overview of the Conning Screen
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsIII-1 Overview of Products and ApplicationsIII Main Applications.fm / 10.11.11 III-9NACOS Platinum1.5 TRACKPILOT ApplicationThe TRACKPILOT application controls the vessel for constant heading, course or along a pre-plannedtrack as prepared with the ECDIS planning function. With the option SPEEDPILOT the speed of the vesselalong a leg can be controlled to reach the final destination at a pre-planned time.Fig. III / 5 Overview of the Trackpilot Expander
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsIII-1 Overview of Products and Applications III Main Applications.fm / 10.11.11III-101.6 MACHINERY ApplicationThe MACHINERY application provides remote indicators and controls for the complete automation systemon-board. Subsystems may include main engine control, fuel supply, cooling, generators, fire detection,electric power distribution, ballast, etc.Fig. III / 6 Overview of the Machinery Screen
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsIII-1 Overview of Products and ApplicationsIII Main Applications.fm / 10.11.11 III-11NACOS Platinum1.7 Common Functions for Products and ApplicationsThe table below gives an overview about the common NACOS Platinum functions which are used in theRADAR and ECDIS applications and which can form a RADARPILOT, a CHARTRADAR, an ECDISPILOT,or a MULTIPILOT. The main differences between these products are as follows:- RADARPILOT: Basic radar functions incl. ARPA and AIS targets, no chart functions- CHARTRADAR: As above, plus chart functions with black background colour table*- ECDISPILOT: Chart functions in full colour, AIS targets on top- MULTIPILOT: CHARTRADAR plus ECDIS with ARPA and AIS targets 1)Fig. III / 7 Common Functions for Products and ApplicationsFunction tested against Task RADARPILOT CHARTRADAR ECDIS MULTIPILOTNavigation sensor management IEC 61162 IEC 62388/ Ch13 plot own ship with vectors/ trails EEEEStabilize display IEC 62388/ Ch9 display traffic scenario, HU, north EEEENavigation tools IEC 62388/ Ch8 provide EBL, VRM, (and LOPs)* EEEEProcess radar video IEC 62388 / Ch 5,6 display raw radar video EEEETarget handling IEC 62388/ Ch10 display ARPA and AIS targets EEEEDisplay chart objects IEC 62388/ Ch11 display buoys,beacons, etc. EEEDisplay basic chart areas IEC 61174 display land and water areas EEEDisplay user symbols (maps) IEC 62388/ Ch 8 display user setbea-cons, lines, etc. EEEECCRS IEC 62388/ Ch7 relate all nav. data to single ref. point EEEEAlarm management IEC 62388/ Ch15 process alarms on 3 levels EEEERoute planning IEC 61174 provide waypoint editor with control EEEEChart monitoring IEC 61174 check passage against chart depth EEEChart maintenance IEC 61174 update chart informa-tion EEEConning IEC 62288 show navigation instruments EEEETrack control IEC 62065 controls ship on pre-planned route EEEEWorkstation hard-ware IEC 60945 monitor; operating device; processor EEEE1) The detailed arrangement of foreground and background layers is shown on the following page
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsIII-1 Overview of Products and Applications III Main Applications.fm / 10.11.11III-12The table on the next page presents the most important layers and their priority shown for the CHARTRADAR. The arrangement for the MULTIPILOT is only slightly different. The priority of the radar video is changedin favour of the chart objects. The radar video layer is shifted down and placed in between basic chartareas and chart objects acc. to IEC 61174 (see arrow 1). The dusk and night colour sets used for thechart areas are extended to the full daylight colour set. All other functions are the same.
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsIII-1 Overview of Products and ApplicationsIII Main Applications.fm / 10.11.11 III-13NACOS PlatinumData Source Function Controls Presentation Layer Objects and Priority (for CHARTRADAR)From navigation sensorsOwn Ship (on top),with headmarker, vector and trails, AIS and ARPA targetsnone Navigation Tools, comprising EBL, VRM and LOPRADAR Video, raw video as received from antenna unit, sea and rain filtererd as selected by the userChart Objectsbuyos, beacons, traffic sepear-ation, text labels, dangerous zones, coastlines, planned routeUser symbols,user defined buoys, beacons, lines and areasBasic Chart Area,land, water, depth lines
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsIII-1 Overview of Products and Applications III Main Applications.fm / 10.11.11III-14The arrangement of layers is shown for the CHARTRADAR from top to bottom. For the MULTIPILOT theraw video is shifted down as indicated by the arrow 1).All the common functions as listed earlier and the layers as listed in the previous table are integrated toa complete application for RADAR or for ECDIS.If the two applications RADAR or ECDIS are combined on a single workstation to build-up a CHAR-TRADAR or MULTIPILOT only those functions are added, which are not already available with the firstapplication. Each of the functions as listed above is only started once on a workstation. But dependingon the actual configuration it may have a slightly different appearance. Differences are listed i.e. at theend of the Chartradar chapter.Some common functions have been extracted from the description of the individual applications and setin front of the RADAR and ECDIS description.Examples are the Consistent Common Reference System (CCRS) (See chapter III - 2.1 on page III- 14),the navigation sensor management, and the common user interface (HMI) (See chapter I - 5 on page I-45).More complex and more seldom used common functions have been extracted as well and set behind theRADAR and ECDIS description.Examples are the alarm management (See chapter V - 2 on page V-9), the route and chart monitoring(See chapter C - 2 on page C-37), and the optional conning and track control function.Please refer to the corresponding subsequent chapters for more detailed information.
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsIII-2 Common Functions for NavigationIII Main Applications.fm / 10.11.11 III-15NACOS Platinum2 Common Functions for Navigation
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsIII-2 Common Functions for Navigation III Main Applications.fm / 10.11.11III-162.1 The Consistent Common Reference System (CCRS)The NACOS Platinum navigation system is designed as a Consistent Common Reference System (CCRS).It references all horizontal measurements such as target range, bearing, relative course, relative speed,closest point of approach (CPA) or time to closest point of approach (TCPA) to one single point on-board,the Consistent Common Reference Point (CCRP), typically the conning position of the bridge. The offset between the installation location of a navigation sensor i.e. for position, speed, or headingand the CCRP is compensated by the Platinum system. The offset between a radar antenna position andthe CCRP is compensated as well. If multiple antennas are installed, there is a provision for applyingdifferent position offsets for each antenna in the radar system. The offsets are applied automaticallywhen any radar sensor is selected.The CCRP can be selected by the user, the default setting is the conning position. For precise radarmeasurements it can be set to the just selected radar antenna. The relations are shown in the followingtwo diagrams.Fig. III / 8 CCRP on RADARMeasurement relative to the Conning Position. (CCRP = Conning)All bearings, distances, positions are indi-cated relative to the conning position on the ship´s bridgeMeasurement relative to the RADAR antenna (Bow RADAR as an example) (CCRP = RADAR)All bearings, distances, position etc are indicated as seen from the radar antenna location.All different radar antennas on the ship can be selected as the reference for the radar CCRP.
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsIII-2 Common Functions for NavigationIII Main Applications.fm / 10.11.11 III-17NACOS PlatinumFor systems with integrated Track Control System (Autopilot) it is important to use the same referenceposition for the track control and for the monitoring process of the ECDIS. For both purposes the so-called System Position, located in the bow of the ship, is used system-wide.In NACOS Platinum the System Position is called Track Control position, which can be selected withCCRP = Track in the GUI as an optional reference point.Fig. III / 9 CCRP on ECDIS For measurements relative to the own ship (EBL, VRM, Cursor, target data) on the NACOS Platinum theConning Position is used normally. In contrast to a RADAR system, where the reference may also be theposition of the radar antenna, in a stand-alone ECDIS no alternative reference position than the TrackControl position can be selected by the operator.Measurements relative to the Conning Position (CCRP = Conning)The chart monitoring func-tion of the ECDIS sub-system is done for the CCRP=Track Control Posi-tion, i.e. the guard sector (also called look-ahead sector) starts at the bow of the ship. Length and width of the sector can be adjusted in the ECDIS-HMI.
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsIII-2 Common Functions for Navigation III Main Applications.fm / 10.11.11III-182.2 Context MenusContext Menus in the Application AreaContext menus are available in the application area, i.e. the PPI in RADAR mode and the Chart Area inECDIS mode. Most of the menus are described in the different functional chapters of the applicationsrunning on the MFD. This chapter shall give an overview about the entire context related functionalityavailable today in the main navigational applications. By a DO or a MORE click into the application area a context menu is opened which contains all possibleuser actions at the current click position. For this purpose the area near the click position is analysed bythe system which is then presenting a choice of several options.Context Menus with DOFor the case that the DO click is unambiguous (only one object is found below the cursor) the action orselection is done without context menu.If more than one object is found, the context menu opens and the operator must select the operationwhich he wants to access.Examples:- AIS class A / RADAR Video:A radar target and an AIS target is available. - RADAR Video / VRM1:A radar target and the VRM1 can be selected.- Waypoint 9 / Leg 009-010 / PI3:The waypoint symbol, the leg behind waypoint 9 or the Parallel Index Line 3 can be selected.Context Menus with MOREThe MORE click into the application area presents a more or less predefined selection of functions whichis depending on the active running application or the operating mode of the application area or even thefact that one or the other function is in On or Off state.For RADAR and ECDIS mode the same set of functions is used where some of them are only possible inECDIS mode; i.e. the RADAR mode has a reduced sub-set of these functions, they are marked with (R)in the following list 1) 1) The number and functionality of context menus may be increased in future.
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsIII-2 Common Functions for NavigationIII Main Applications.fm / 10.11.11 III-19NACOS PlatinumFig. III / 10 Structure of Context MenusDepending on the system status and the object found under the cursor other or more entries may beavailable, for example Clear Trails, Reset PI Lines, Center EBL; the additional entries may also have ownsecondary sub-menus.In some cases it is necessary first to select an item on the screen with the DO key in order to haveaccess to the relevant context menu.Examples:- Select a user made chart object (a symbol, a line or area, an event or a text note) in order to haveaccess to it via the User Symbols menu.- Select a waypoint or a leg of the route to get the Route menu with its sub-menus.LayersThe different graphic overlays in the application area are organized in so called layers. Via a MORE clickinto the PPI / chart area you can access the different layers.The Layer context menu has two main functions- Selection of visibility of the available layers- Brightness control of the visible layers.Off-Center Ship (R)Set Chart Center (R)Ship in Center (R)Layer (R)ChartChart Information (R)Create LOPTarget (R)User Symbols (R)RouteENC ChartRADAR VideoScalesNav.ToolsTargetsUser SymbolsOwn ShipCurved HLChange to RADARProjectionOpen ECDIS Chart1DeselectCancel ARPACancel AllAcquire ARPAREF Target On/OffReverse Fusion
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsIII-2 Common Functions for Navigation III Main Applications.fm / 10.11.11III-20Fig. III / 11 Layer Context Menu The availability and the controllability of the different layers are dependent on the active main application(RADAR or ECDIS mode, etc.). For example in ECDIS you may switch off the radar video and the chart,but you cannot dim the chart, and in RADAR mode you may switch off the chart, but not the radar video.Caused by the rules and standards some of the layers are not allowed to be dimmed to complete dark-ness.
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsIII-2 Common Functions for NavigationIII Main Applications.fm / 10.11.11 III-21NACOS Platinum2.3 The Chart Information WindowWith a MORE click within the PPI/Chart area and then on Chart Information in the context menu, theChart Information window is opened.In this window, information about different criteria of the chart database and the chart cells can bedisplayed.Fig. III / 12 The Chart Information window
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsIII-2 Common Functions for Navigation III Main Applications.fm / 10.11.11III-22
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsIII-3 Permanent Area for NavigationIII Main Applications.fm / 10.11.11 III-23NACOS Platinum3 Permanent Area for NavigationThe common part for the applications.As mentioned in the general chapters, the screen ist divided into the application area and the sidebar.Fig. III / 13 Permanent Area for NavigationThe sidebar itself is divided into the permanent area and the nonpermanent area. The permanent areacontains elements and displays that refer to the settings of the radar, the ECDIS and the entire system.The elements are grouped. In the following chapters, each group of the application sidebar will bedescribed separately.The right part of the permanent area in the sidebar is related to the radar system. It is described in thechapter RADARPILOT. The left part of th esidebar is fully valid for the RADARPILOT, ECDISPILOT andthe MULTIPILOT. Any dependencies of the controls on the selected main operation mode (RADAR orECDIS) are described in the following chapters.☞ All settings in the permanent area made in RADAR mode or ECDIS mode are synchronized betweenthe modes, with other words, switching between the modes does not change the common settingsand adjustments.Apllication Sidebar RADAR Sidebarsee
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsIII-3 Permanent Area for Navigation III Main Applications.fm / 10.11.11III-243.1 DisplayThis group affects the general settings of the radardisplay and the chart area of the ECDIS:- the angular screen orientation- the movement of the own ship on the screen- the display range and the range rings- the CCRP, i.e. the reference point on your ship used for calculation of the system data like COG,SOG, CTW/STW and position and for calculation of the ship-relative data like bearing and distanceof EBL and VRM and the cursor in the application area.Screen stabilisation
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsIII-3 Permanent Area for NavigationIII Main Applications.fm / 10.11.11 III-25NACOS Platinum3.1.1 Orientation Displays the radar picture and the superimposed chart in three differentways. - Head-Up:The heading of own ship points upwards, the radar video is movingwith the yawing of the ship- North-Up:Geographic north points upwards, the radar video is stabilized with thegyro heading- Course-Up:The course which exists at the instant of switch-on or re-orientation of this mode points upwards,the radar video is thereafter stabilized with the gyro heading.In Course-Up Mode a click with MORE on the Course-Up indicator takes over the current headingas the new reference heading.☞ After switch-over and re-orientation, the target trails are not influenced; they remain visible in thenew mode.When the ECDIS display mode is selected, the system can additonally be switched into the planningmode. This mode is called Browse mode. See chapter B - 1.3.2 on page B-8 and section 3.1.5.Browse mode is only supported in North-Up and Course-Up orientation. Selection of Head-Up automati-cally switches back to the Monitoring mode.
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsIII-3 Permanent Area for Navigation III Main Applications.fm / 10.11.11III-263.1.2 RangeThe display range can be chosen from a selection of ten nautical ranges (PPIradius between 0.25 NM and 96 NM) and two docking ranges (PPI radius 250 mand 500 m).☞ In the nautical range and also in the docking ranges, all distances are statedin NM and all speeds in kn.☞ If the range selection is done by means of the radar keyboard, the ranges areselected stepwise (up or down).The Range can also be set by means of the radar keyboard or by the zoom control. See chapter 4.1 on page A-34.RANGE
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsIII-3 Permanent Area for NavigationIII Main Applications.fm / 10.11.11 III-27NACOS Platinum3.1.3 RingsFixed range rings can be displayed. Range rings are concentric circles with the reference position of theselected CCRP as their centre 1), and are situated at equal distances from one another.Depending on the selected range, the radii of the rings and the distances between them are different:Table III / 2 Range Rings1) For reference position see See chapter 2.1 on page III-16Range 250m 500m 0,25NM 0,5NM 0,75NM 1,5NM 3NM 6NM 12NM 24NM 48NM 96NMDistance Ring 50m 100m 0,05NM 0,1NM 0,25NM 0,25NM 0,5NM 1,0NM 2NM 4NM 8NM 16NM
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsIII-3 Permanent Area for Navigation III Main Applications.fm / 10.11.11III-283.1.4 CCRPThe Consistent Common Reference Position can be chosen from threedifferent possibilities:- Conning:The measurements are stated relative to the conning posi-tion, which is a defined position on the bridge.- RADAR:The measurements are stated relative to the position of theselected radar antenna.It another transceiver is selected, thereference position is changed automatically. If RADAR is notselected as CCRP, its location on the ship symbol is markedby a small cross: - Track:Referring to section 2.1 it must be noted here that theTrackpilot is utilising the data of the so called System Posi-tion in the bow of the ship for its control purpose and alsofor calculation of all ship relative data (course and trackdeviation, drift angle, bearing, distance and time to go towaypoint and wheel over point, etc.). When in the TrackpilotSection of this manual the term own ship or own ship‘sposition is used, the own ship‘s System Position (at thebow of the ship) is referenced.See chapter 2.1 on page III-16 for details on reference systems.In each case the minimized ship symbol , the speed vector,EBL, VRM, range rings and stern line are starting from the selected CCRP and all measurement tools andthe graphic cursor are working and indicating relative to this reference point.Note: The display of the own ship symbol outline in true scale is depending on user selection andthe selected display range, if True Scaled is switched on.
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsIII-3 Permanent Area for NavigationIII Main Applications.fm / 10.11.11 III-29NACOS Platinum3.1.5 Screen StabilisationAs far as the screen stabilisation is concerned, there is a choice betweenthe following:- True Motion (TM): The radar video of not moving targets (buoys, beacons, land orlighthouses) is fixed; the own ship symbol moves across thescreen. The PPI/chart area orientation is North-Up or Course-Up.Either manually, or automatically by means of a TM reset, theown ship symbol on the PPI/chart area is reset in good time before the PPI/chart area boundary isreached; this resetting is done in such a way that the larger part of the PPI/chart area lies aheadof own ship.For the ECDIS application, the TM resettakes place in the instant that the indica-tion of the CCRP has reached a distance of10% up to 70% of the chart diameter fromthe centre of the PPI.For RADAR, the value is not adjustable.See chapter A - 4.1 on page A-34 fordetails.The appropriate value for ECDIS TrueMotion Reset value can be set by meansof the slider in the ECDIS > Settings >True Motion dialog:- Relative Motion (RM): Own ship's position is fixed; the radar video moves relative to own ship in accordance with themovement of own ship. As far as the PPI/chart area orientation is concerned, it is possible to choosebetween Head-Up, North-Up and Course-Up.Centre of the PPI/chart10% - 70% of the radiusLight grey area: The area where the off-centered CCRP or position indication of the radar antenna may be located.
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsIII-3 Permanent Area for Navigation III Main Applications.fm / 10.11.11III-30Examples for True/Relative Motion and Head-/North-/Course-UpIn figures III / 14 and III / 15, screen excerpts from two instants of the same scenario are shown sche-matically for the five Monitoring display modes:Instant 1- Own ship's course 60°, speed 20 kn- Two moving targets, courses 60° and 150°, speed 10 kn for both-Two fixed targets- Two grid lines showing the alignment of the electronic chartInstant 2The same scenario, but after an own ship's course change to 10° (all other data unchanged).Displays of the following are set: Own ship symbol, course and speed vectors, past plots of the targets.Except in the case of True Motion, the centre of the screen excerpt shown is the own ship's positionthat was set with Set Center function of the context menu in the PPI/Chart Area.☞ The display of the own ship symbol is depending on user selection and on the selected display rangeif "true scaled" is switched on in the Presentation tab.
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsIII-3 Permanent Area for NavigationIII Main Applications.fm / 10.11.11 III-31NACOS PlatinumFig. III / 14 Display in the modes True Motion and Centered DisplayTrue Motion (with true vectors and past plots)Instant 1 Instant 2Centered Display (with true vectors and past plots)Instant 1 Instant 2
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsIII-3 Permanent Area for Navigation III Main Applications.fm / 10.11.11III-32In this mode, the headline is shown as a short, thick line.Fig. III / 15 Display in the modes North-Up RM, Course-Up RM and Head-Up RMNorth-Up RM (with relative vectors and past plots)Instant 1 Instant 2Course-Up RM (with relative vectors and past plots)Instant 1 Instant 2Head-Up RM (with relative vectors and past plots)Instant 2Instant 1
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsIII-3 Permanent Area for NavigationIII Main Applications.fm / 10.11.11 III-33NACOS Platinum3.2 Navigation SensorsThis chapter describes the navigation sensors available in the system. The main navigation sensors usedfor the heading, speed and position instruments are monitored depending on the “sensor selectionmode”. Those sensors which are available twice or more in the installation can be supported by an auto-matic selection mode indicated by AUTO in the different displays.- If the selection mode is AUTO the switching over to another sensor of the same type is done witha warning indicating the new sensor selection.In AUTO mode the switch over to a manual sensor (Manual Speed or Manual Position) is accompa-nied by an alarm if the manual data have not been set before.- If the manual sensor selection is chosen the switching over to the backup sensor must be donemanually after the respective alarm or warning has been given.In the meantime (until a new sensor has been selected) the system is using the last valid values ofthe disturbed or faulty sensor which produced the alarm.It is required to perform the switch over to the new sensor as soon as possible, but not before itsdata have been checked for plausibility and correctness.Details are given in chapter V-ALARMS as required in the explanations to the different sensor alarms.The automatic selection mode is the default setting after start or restart of the system.In any case (in manual or automatic sensor selection mode) the set data for the sensors running in manual mode must be checked regularly and a real sensor must be selected as soon as possible.
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsIII-3 Permanent Area for Navigation III Main Applications.fm / 10.11.11III-343.2.1 Integrity Marking of SensorsAccording to the currently valid peformance standards, invalid information or information with low integ-rity shall be clearly marked qualitatively and/or quantitatively. In NACOS Platinum a qualitative markingof sensors by alarm icons is used 1). For this purpose the main navigation sensors used for the instruments in the permanent area are contin-uously monitored by the system. If the signal of a sensor is no longer received or is corrupted, or if itis marked invalid by the sensor itself or by the NACOS internal sensor monitoring, a respective "sensortimeout" or a "sensor invalid" alarm message is given for the faulty sensor 2). In case of activated AUTO selection mode another connected sensor (if available) can automatically byconnected to the respective instrument and the instrument data remain available and valid.If this is not possible, or if the manual selection mode is used, the sensor will be marked invalid by an alarm icon shown before the sensor label in the instruments displayed on the permanentarea. This can happen for the HDG, STW SOG and COG labels in the Heading & Speed group and for the posi-tion data in front of the LAT and LON labels.If the manual input mode is selected (caused by sensor failure or decision of the operator) and the manually set data are used for any navigation sensor, this will be shown by the icon, whichis indicating manual input mode and additionally the warning level 3.On a vessel at sea manually set sensor data are generally to be treated as doubtful and with low integrityas they must permanently be monitored and adapted to the real situation by the operator.1) For a complete list of available alarm icons refer to chapter see chapter V - 1.1 on page V-4.2) If you need more detailed information about the sensor modes, valid/invalid marking or other details of thedifferent sensor interface protocols, refer to the Technical Manual delivered with the system.
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsIII-3 Permanent Area for NavigationIII Main Applications.fm / 10.11.11 III-35NACOS Platinum3.2.2 Heading and SpeedThis group displays information about the actual values forheading and speed and offers the possibilities to choose differentheading and speed sensors 1).In front of each depiction of one of the sensors, there may be asymbol indicating a warning or an alarm.Table III / 3 Integrity Marks for Heading/Speed Sensor DataThe meaning of the indicators is explained in detail in chapter V-ALARMS.☞ The values for STW, COG and SOG will go into alarm status if RADAR is selected as the CCRP,but no radar transceiver is selected.Heading - HDGThe value for heading is the direction the bow of the own ship is pointing at. It isderived from the compass system of the ship. Behind the heading value, the actualchoice and the selection mode of the heading sensor is displayed.AUTOMeans that the heading sensor is chosen by the system automatically. The bestavailable sensor will be used. If a failure occurs on the actual sensor, the backupsensor is chosen, if available, and a warning is given. Gyro xFrom the number of gyro compasses that are connected to the system, one can be chosen to be usedas heading sensor. Sensor selection mode is manual.1) The sensor selection list is depending on the navigation sensors connected to the system.Yellow Input from the process is disconnected in the software, and the value is entered manually by the operatorRed Error in the Control and Supervision system, the indication is invalid or the value received from the sensor is outside the legal limitsBe aware that a missing or wrong speed input to the compass system can also produce remarkable course errors.
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsIII-3 Permanent Area for Navigation III Main Applications.fm / 10.11.11III-36Manual (Option)The actual course of the own ship can be entered manually. Incase a manual value is present, the indication of the value ispreceeded by a in the same line.After having changed the heading sensor to manual mode, use the Set Gyro... function in order to enterthe desired value.☞ This choice is normally not visible. It can only be used for special purposes such as demo systemsetc.
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsIII-3 Permanent Area for NavigationIII Main Applications.fm / 10.11.11 III-37NACOS PlatinumAbout Speed SensorsSpeed sensors are treated as part of the CCRS. (See chapter III - 2.1 on page III-16 for details). Thismeans that the indicated speed data and the speed vector dispayed in the PPI/chart area are valid forthe CCRP sected under "CCRP" on page III-28There may be several speed sensors connected to the system. One of them is chosen by the system onstartup. In the case of speed sensors which transfer the longitudinal speed only, the drift and set canbe entered manually, because those devices cannot detect the effect of leewayand current. As an alter-native to selection of a speed sensor, it is also possible to input the speed manually, if necessary. If fixedARPA targets are available, the speed can also be determined by Reference Target Tracking. Seechapter 7.13 on page A-78 for details.☞ The speed sensors also include position sensors which transfer not only the position but also thespeed and course made good. Compared to the present-day state of the art, they generally do notmeet the IMO Performance Standards for SDME (Speed and Distance Measuring Equipment, IMOresolution MSC.96(72). Therefore, they might not be configured in the system, and so it might notbe possible to select them for speed input.Two different values for the speed of the ship are displayed:- STW: Speed through WaterOnly the longitunial speed (i.e. the speed in ship´s direction) is indicated behind STW. An arrowheaddescribes the ahead or astern velocity. The speed through water results in a speed vector describedby CTW, STW. The speed through water often is not equal to the speed over ground, set and driftmay influence the measurement. Speed logs for waterspeed (single axis log) often do only measurethe longitudinal speed, i.e. the speed mainly produced by the propulsion of the ship. In this casethe CTW is equivalent to the actual heading.The resulting velocity is also indicated as a CTW/STW vector on the HMI and graphically in the PPI/chart area.- SOG: Speed over GroundThe speed over ground is the most accurate and best way to determine the ship´s speed. It is oftenmeasured by two-axis logs, doppler-logs or alternatively by position sensors which calculate theship´s speed from the difference of positions and the time elapsed while sailing.The resulting velocity is indicated as a COG/SOG vector on the HMI and graphically in the PPI/chartarea.It must be ensured that an approved SDME (Speed and Distance Measuring Equipment) is connected, that means that all speed sensors must accord to IEC 62388 (2007) and to IMO resolution MSC.96(72).
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsIII-3 Permanent Area for Navigation III Main Applications.fm / 10.11.11III-38Speed through Water - STW 1)Next to the depiction STW there is a small indication like anarrow-head. This is the speed vector indicator. It shows thedirection of the vector addition of the longitudinal and thetransversal own ship´s speed through water. If the ship is moving straight forward through the water, thearrow head points upward, if it is moving straight backward,the arrow head will point downward. The arrow head may also point into any other direction,then the transversal speed component makes the ship movesideways through the water 2).AUTOMeans that the STW or waterspeed sensor is chosen by the system automatically.The best available sensor will be used. If a failure occurs on the actual sensor,the backup sensor is chosen if available, and a warning is given.. Log xThe selected speed log is used as system sensor for water speed. The sensorselection mode is manual.ManualThe actual STW of the own ship can be entered manually. In casea manual value is presenlty used, the indication of the value ispreceeded by a in the same line.Before having changed the speed sensor to manual mode, use the Set Speed... function in order toenter the desired value, which should match as good as possible to the real speed through water of yourship.1) The selected CTW/STW vector for speed through water is used as the data source for Water Stabilisation ofthe targets in the radar PPI/chart area.2) Transversal speed information is only available if a 2-axis speed log is connected.Speed vector indicatorLongitunalSpeedTransversalSpeedVector addition(resultuing Speed)
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsIII-3 Permanent Area for NavigationIII Main Applications.fm / 10.11.11 III-39NACOS PlatinumOwn ship symbol with vector.WaterCTW/STWGroundCOG/SOG
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsIII-3 Permanent Area for Navigation III Main Applications.fm / 10.11.11III-40Course over Ground - COG 1)The value for course over ground is calculated - by use of the heading and the log sensors (a bottom-track-log for example) or - computed from the measured values of a sensor and additional information (a water-track-log andthe values for drift and set for example). - It can also be computed from the difference of own-ship positions within a specified time (normallydelivered by a position sensor in a specific telegram). The method the COG is computed depends on the sensors selected. For example, in case of the speedlog its longitudinal and transversal speed values together with the heading value are used to calculatethe true course vector over ground. The system decides itself and chooses the best and most accurateway to compute the COG. In any case the indicated COG is based on the data received from the speedsensor shown behind the SOG value.☞ The COG/SOG instrument in the Permanent Area displays course and speed over ground as a datapair describing the direction and the length of the speed vector over ground.Speed over Ground - SOG1)AUTOMeans that the speed over ground sensor is chosen by the system automatically.The best available sensor will be used. If a failure occurs on the actual sensor,the backup sensor is chosen and a warning is given. Manual Sensor SelectionLog xThe selected speed log is used as system sensor for ground speed. If the selectedlog is a single axis log, it is advisable to enter set and drift to correct for tidalcurrents.GPS xPosition sensors may be selected as input for SOG values. See also hint on page III-37 for details.REF TGTREF TGT speed input can only be selected on radar systems and if, as a minimum, one tracked targetis selected as a reference target (shown as on the PPI, see chapter A - 7 on page A-55 fordetails.)STWSets the SOG to the same value as STW. In this case it is advisable to enter set and drift to correct fortidal currents.☞ If set and drift are not set or initialized, it may happen that the COG/SOG data will be made invalid.1) The selected COG/SOG vector for speed over ground is used as the data source for Ground Stabilisation ofthe targets in the radar PPI/chart area.R1
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsIII-3 Permanent Area for NavigationIII Main Applications.fm / 10.11.11 III-41NACOS PlatinumSet DriftDepending on the choice of sensors, the values for direction andstrength (speed) of the drift are computed by the system or theyhave to be entered by the user, in order to get an accurate meas-urement for COG and SOG. In order to enter the set and driftmanually, open the dropdown lists for SOG, click on Set Drift...and enter the values in the appropriate fields.Afterwards, click on Set to accept the values entered.ManualThe actual STW of the own ship can also be entered manually. Incase a manual value is presently used, the indication of the valueis preceeded by a in the same line.Before having changed the speed to manual mode, use the SetSpeed... function in order to enter the desired value.☞ Setting a manual speed value for the SOG instrument often also requires the manual Set and Driftinput, in order to correct for the set and drift created by wind and waves and the current.Manual speed and REF TGT speed input are only to be used as temporary solution. In both cases it must be observed repeatedly if the values used are still valid and stable.
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsIII-3 Permanent Area for Navigation III Main Applications.fm / 10.11.11III-423.2.3 PositionThe position display indicates the Lat/Lon values, the position status and its selection mode. WithAdjust, the position dada can optionally be corrected for position errors.In front of each depiction of thevalues LAT/LON, there may be asymbol indicating a warning oran alarm.Table III / 4 Integrity Marks for Position Sensor DataThe meaning of the signs is explained in detail in chapter V-ALARMS.About Position SensorsPosition sensors are treated as a part of the CCRS. See chapter III - 2.1 on page III-16 for details. Thismeans that the LAT/LON values indicate the position of the selected CCRP (Conning/RADAR/Track). Forthis function the sensor locations defined on service level are utilized.If more than one position sensor is connected to the system, a position monitoring function will auto-matically be activated and will be running on the MFD 1).The data transmitted from a position sensor to the system may contain additional information aboutvalidity , sensor type, sensor mode etc. These data are combined in the sensor label shown in the posi-tion display.Yellow Input from the process is disconnected in the software, and the value is entered manually by the operatorRed Error in the Control and Supervision system, the indication is invalid or the value received from the sensor is outside the legal limitsIt must be noted that the necessary accuracy is achieved only if all positions used relate to the same chart datum, preferably WGS 84.- When using the system as a planning system, position coordinates obtainedfrom a chart with a datum deviating from WGS 84 must be converted to WGS84 User Symbols and route data.- The only position receivers that may be connected to the NACOS Platinumsystem are those that output the position values in the geographical referencesystem WGS84 via an interface as per IEC 61162-1.- It must be ensured that an approved EPFS (Electronic Position Fixing System)is connected, that means that all position sensors must accord to IEC 62388(2007) and to IMO resolution MSC. 112(73).1) This function is a mandatory requirement for ECDIS.
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsIII-3 Permanent Area for NavigationIII Main Applications.fm / 10.11.11 III-43NACOS PlatinumExamples:Types of sensors: GP (for GPS), GL (for GLONASS), GA (for Galileo), LC (for LORAN C), IN (for INS)...Modes of sensors: A (for autonomous), D (for differential), P (for Precision), R (for RTK), F (for floatRTK)...Modes E (for Estimated), M (for Manual), S (for Simulation) are not accepted as valid input data.
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsIII-3 Permanent Area for Navigation III Main Applications.fm / 10.11.11III-44Position Sensor SelectionChanging the position sensor will also have an effect on the position monitoring function. The sensor selection list is dependent on number, type and mode of the position sensors connected tothe system.AUTOMeans that the position sensor is chosen by the system automatically.The best available sensor will be used. If a failure occurs on the actualsensor, the backup sensor is chosen and a warning is given.mGPS nSelects the desired position sensor from the list of available sensors inthe system. As long as the mouse pointer is positioned above the depiction of asensor, the position data delivered by this sensor and also the offsetposition of the sensor from the actual CCRP position are displayed ina tool tip window.m indicates the sensor mode, GPS may be replaced by another sensor type,n indicates the sensor number.Manual DRAs long as Manual DR is selected, the manually entered posi-tion will be used as the basis for all further position calcula-tions by dead-reckoning. This method uses the gyro headingand the speed of the selected COG/SOG speed sensor to esti-mate the own-ships position. In case a manual value ispresent, the indication of the value is preceeded by a inthe same line.The accuracy of the dead-reckoned position (shown in the positon display as: Manual DR) must be checked continually, because its accuracy is very poor and its position error is increasing over time. For safety reasons, an available position-sensor must be selected as soon as possible.
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsIII-3 Permanent Area for NavigationIII Main Applications.fm / 10.11.11 III-45NACOS PlatinumSet Estimated...The actual position can be entered manually by means of the on-screen keyboard. After a position sensor failure the last valid data received from thesensor are automatically present in the input fields. Be sure tocorrect the data input if the last valid data taken over from thesensor are no longer valid.Position MonitoringIn addition to the selectable position plot of the 2nd position sensor (see 2nd Past Track) for display inECDIS mode, the system provides an automatic position monitoring between the selected sensor and anyother connected position sensor.In the position instrument you select the main position sensor to be used in the entire system for displayand control purposes. These sensor data are compared to the data received from the secondary availableposition sensor. For this purpose the best available secondary sensor will automatically be selected bythe system.Assumed you have two sensors GPS1 and DGPS2 connected to the system, there are several differentstates of the position monitoring process:1. GPS1 is selected: DGPS2 is used for comparing its position data to the selected position.2. DGPS2 is selected: GPS1 is used for comparing its position data to the selected position.3. DR Mode is selected: DGPS2 is used for comparing its position data to the estimated position of thedead reckoning calculation.4. Any position (GPS1, -2 or DR Mode) is selected, but none of the secondary sensors is available(switched off, defective or producing invalid data): The alarm Redundant Position Lost will be given.Monitoring LimitsThe limits used for the position monitoring process are generated by the system automatically (i.e. thereis no possibility for the operator to have an influence on it). The following table gives an overview aboutthe dependencies based on the theoretical sensor accuracy.Table III / 5 Monitoring LimitsPosition accuracy Example Limit 1)1) To avoid unnecessary alarms, an additional speed dependentlowest limit is used to filter out the natural position noise. very good DGPS very smallgood GPS smalllow Loran high
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsIII-3 Permanent Area for Navigation III Main Applications.fm / 10.11.11III-46Position Monitoring AlarmIf the defined limit between the two compared positions is exceeded, the alarm Redundant PositionDiffers is given. For this purpose the distance in meters between the selected and the secondary posi-tion is calculated.
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsIII-3 Permanent Area for NavigationIII Main Applications.fm / 10.11.11 III-47NACOS PlatinumPosition AdjustFor various reasons, it can happen that the position of the electronic chart on the screen is not in agree-ment with reality (i.e. with the ship's own position and with the radar or ARPA targets). In such cases,the Position Adjust function offers the possibility of adding the necessary correction value to thesystem position used in the NACOS.Position Adjust is used to correct a constant position-error (position offset) of the selected position sensoror of a manually set position in Manual DR mode.Position OffsetIf the displayed LAT/LON position is incorrect, the videos and the target symbols of fixed point-targets(e.g. buoys or landmarks) do not coincide with the chart symbols of these targets or with the user madesymbols that are entered at the correct positions in the chart.A position offset of the position sensor can also be made visible without displaying the chart backgroundon a radar, if you observe the coincidence of AIS target symbols with their target videos:- If all targets have an offset in the same N/E direction, a position error is very probable.- If all targets have the same bearing offset, it is more probable that either the radar itself or thecompass system needs to be adjusted.Correction by Position AdjustThe position error can be corrected manually by making the video or symbol of a fixed target coincidewith its chart symbol:1. Switch on a sufficiently small display range to be able to observe and measure the position offset.If no radar targets are available as a reference use other means to determine the position error. 2. Click on the Adjust button in the Position display. In the input dialog which then opens, key in theNorth and East values of the offset you want to eliminate. South and West values must be set asnegative values.Note: If the chart object is located north / east of the relevant radar target you must key in a North /East value and vice versa. With other words: you must shift the chart object to the radar or ARPA target.3. Clicking on Set in the input dialog takes over the offset value 1). 4. As a result, the correction values displayed in the Adjust dialog take effect as a position offset andthis offset is added to the position data of the sensor.The Position Adjust function must be used extremely carefully! An offset is added to the received position data, which will have an impact on all NACOS applications based on or using position data!The position offset has an effect throughout the whole system, i.e. also on the automatic track keeping. For this reason, it can happen that, as a result of the position adjust, an alarm message (e.g. the TP Track Limit alarm of the TRACK-PILOT) is triggered on connected units and that the Trackpilot takes corrective actions to steer back to the pre-planned track line 1).1) If this shall be avoided, switch the TRACKPILOT into Heading or Course mode before you apply aposition offset to the system position.1) 1) Click on Cancel if you want to discard all inputs
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsIII-3 Permanent Area for Navigation III Main Applications.fm / 10.11.11III-48• The entire track and chart synthetics move by an amount equal to the position offset. Withother words the own ship's position jumps on the screen (the PPI / chart area) exactly by thatoffset.• The position offset that is entered continues to be displayed in the Adjust dialog. • In this way, each direction (N/S and E/W) can be corrected by up to 999 m.• The LAT / LON data are marked with the manual input symbol as long as a position offsetis applied.5. Check that the other symbols of the chart and the AIS target symbols too now coincide as well aspossible with their radar echoes. If necessary, the steps 2 to 3 can be repeated to correct the posi-tion offset.Deleting the Position OffsetThe position offset can only be deleted manually by clicking on the Adjust button and entering 0 m foreach direction. The position offset is not deleted automatically when a different position sensor is selected.If the entire video has a rotational displacement relative to the chart, this indi-cates that there is probably a compass error which cannot be deleted by a posi-tion offset. Either the synchronisation within the compass system is inadequate (this must then be corrected) or the compass system itself has a static or dynamic course error. This should, if possible, be corrected in the compass system.Check regularly whether the position offset is still valid, especially after a change of positional accuracy from DGPS to GPS and vice versa or after selection of another position sensor.When the watch is changing over, the selected offset must definitely be pointed out to the new officer of the watch.
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsIII-3 Permanent Area for NavigationIII Main Applications.fm / 10.11.11 III-49NACOS Platinum3.3 Vector and TrailsBasically, the display of vectors and trails depends on the wayof speed determination within the system. Speed Over Ground (SOG), the so-called Bottom-Track, orSpeed Through Water (STW), the so-called Water-Track canbe used in order to compute the vectors for the own ship andthe targets.The speed vectors of the own ship and of targets, the trails oftargets, the past-position plot and the path prediction for theown-ship can be configured here.The speed vector, the target trails and the target´s past posi-tion plot can be displayed as true or relative. The own ship´s position plot is only displayed as true plot, i.e. it is independent of the T/REL setting.☞ The setting T for true or REL for relative measurements is valid for all vectors and trails within allnavigational applications of an MFD.As mentioned before, the calculation principles for relative or true data have some important differences:The relative data are calculated directly by the ARPA. The ARPA uses the plots of consecutive antennascans in order to calculate relative course and speed of the target. Out of this, CPA and TCPA can becalculated.In order to calculate true data of a target, the own ship´s course and speed must be known. The accu-racy of the true data calculation depends on the accuracy of the sensors from which the own ship´scourse and speed are provided.If there is any doubt that the own ship´s speed data are not correct, use the REL target data and PPI presentation for collision avoidance purposes!
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsIII-3 Permanent Area for Navigation III Main Applications.fm / 10.11.11III-503.3.1 Ground / Water StabilisationFor true vectors and trails it can be selected if the ground speed or water speed based stabilisation shalltake place. Ground stabilisation is normally used for all kind of navigational functions. Water stabilisationis often used for anti-collision functions. In case of relative display mode, the stabilisation is not relevant.Select - Ground for Bottom Track computation. The speed over ground (see COG/SOG) will beused to determine the true vectors and trails.- Waterfor Water Track computation. The speed through water (see CTW/STW) willbe used to determine the true vectors and trails.The position plot of the own ship and the path prediction are always ground stabilised (i.e. use the COG/SOG vector).
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsIII-3 Permanent Area for NavigationIII Main Applications.fm / 10.11.11 III-51NACOS Platinum3.3.2 VectorThe direction of the own ship speed vector corresponds to the existingcourse of the own ship. The length corresponds to the existing speedof own ship.Together with the calculated speed vectors of the tracked targets, thedisplay of the speed vector can be switched on and off, and the timerepresented by the displayed vectors can be specified. Furthermore, itcan be seen from the vector symbol of own ship whether the vector isrelative to the sea (Water selected in Stabilisation = one arrow-head) or relative to the bottom (Ground selected in Stabilisation =two arrow-heads).Vectors of targets can be displayed as true or relative. In relativevector mode the own ship´s vector is not shown. See chapter 3.1.5 onpage III-29 for graphic examples.The length of the vectors depends on the time that is selected in thedropdown-list.Own ship symbol with vector.WaterGround
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsIII-3 Permanent Area for Navigation III Main Applications.fm / 10.11.11III-523.3.3 TrailsFor radar echoes moving on the PPI, video trails can be displayed. These trails can beused as synthetic afterglow of the target video. Trails are generated from previousantenna scans and can be varied as follows:- The display of trails can be switched on and off.- Their length can be specified.- If the screen stabilisation is set to Rel. Motion, the trails can be displayed withthe PPI/chart area orientation North-Up and Course-Up relative to own ship orwith true (absolute) orientation, i.e. in relation to the sea bottom or water stabi-lized. - The trail history can be deleted so that they have to build up again• by the setting Off in the menu and selecting the time again• by a MORE click into the PPI and selecting Clear TrailsIn the true display mode, trails make it possible to reach a conclusion quickly about the manoeuvreperformed by radar targets. In the relative display, the trails provide a quick overview of the danger situ-ation (a constant bearing can quickly be recognized). However, only qualitative information can beobtained from them.Switching the Display of the Trails On and OffThe display of the trails is switched on and off by clicking on the Trails field.Specifying the Length of the TrailsClick on the Trails field with the MORE key; then, in the dialog that is opened as a result, click on thedesired timeIn the Trails field, the length currently being selected is indicated, i.e. the max. length of the trails onthe PPI.Switching the Trails to Relative or True DisplayThe switch-over is performed by clicking into the Relative/True field in the Vectors & Trails group.This selection is then also valid for target vectors and their past plots.Deletion of TrailsClick on the PPI area with the MORE key. In the dialog that is opened as a result, click Clear Trailswith the DO key.☞ The trails are also deleted whenever a switch-over occurs which changes the entire radar videotransceiver selection or range, but they then appear again and build up over time.If the trails are lengthened, they reach the new specified length only after the time differ-ence (i.e. in the case of switching over from 4 to 12 minutes, 8 minutes will pass before the trails correspond to a length of 12 minutes). The reduction of the trail length too takes some time.
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsIII-3 Permanent Area for NavigationIII Main Applications.fm / 10.11.11 III-53NACOS Platinum3.3.4 PlotThe past position plot corresponds to the past movement ofthe own ship. On it, there are four time markers, whosedistance apart in time can be set. The setting of the timemarker spacing also defines the entire length of the plot thatis displayed. This setting and the on/off switching of the pastplot display take place in common with the past plots andtime markers of the targets.Plots can not be deleted, so that they do not have to buildup again after switching them off.The length of the past plot depends on the time that isselected in the dropdown-list. The plots can be displayed asrelative or true. In REL mode the own ship´s plot is notshown. The way of displaying plots is switched together withthe vectors and trails of targets in combination (T/REL selec-tion).If the time interval for past position plots is lengthened, it reaches the new specified length only after the time difference has passed (i.e. in the case of switching over from 6 to 12 minutes, 6 minutes will pass before the past position plots correspond to a length of 12 minutes). The reduction of the interval too takes some time.Time markers
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsIII-3 Permanent Area for Navigation III Main Applications.fm / 10.11.11III-543.3.5 PredictIn the small display ranges up to 1.5 NM, depending on thesize of the symbol, it is possible to display the probable track(the predicted path) along which the own ship will travel if itmaintains its existing rate of turn and its existing speed. Theprediction time can be set here.In comparison to the own ship symbol in true scale, theprediction graphics is drawn with thinner lines.The prediction length can be set by the time value in thedrop down list belonging to the Predict setting.PredictiontimeHeadingLine
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsIII-3 Permanent Area for NavigationIII Main Applications.fm / 10.11.11 III-55NACOS Platinum3.4 ChartsOn the RADARPILOT there is the option to overlay the radar videoand vector charts 1). Chart overlay can be switched on and off by theENC drop down menu.The chart content itself can be adjusted to an operator selectablelevel in the same way as in ECDIS mode or on the ECDISPILOT.Select Presentation, ENC and Display in the non-permanent expander to access the details of possiblesettings. On the same expander the displayed depth contours and depth shades can be influenced. ☞ It is recommended to reduce the number of chart elements displayed on the radar PPI as far aspossible when radar monitoring has priority.Determining the edition numberIn order to determine the edition number of the presentation library, right-click in the application area and choose Object info.In the lower part of the application area,a new window opens. Click on ChartLegend, Presentation, PresentationLibrary. In the Details group the editionnumber is displayed.1) Other selectable chart types will be made available in future. If installed on your system, raster charts cannot beselected for overlay on the radar PPI.
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsIII-3 Permanent Area for Navigation III Main Applications.fm / 10.11.11III-563.4.1 The Chart Status LineFig. III / 16 The Chart Status LineTitleChart: The Chart Status Line is always visible if a Vector Chart Application is active, e.g. in ECDIS aswell as in Chartradar modeWarningNon ENC (incl. yellow warning symbol), this is only visible if the ENC vector charts on screen and atleast one part of the screen is filled with data from a "Non Official Vector Chart".In the Cursor-Tool-Tip of this part of the screen the text: "Non-HO data may not be used for navi-gation. Please refer to paper chart." will be visible in that part of the screen.Category- Standard is the IHO Standard selection for visible chart objects- Base is the IHO Definition for the minimum required selection of visible chart objects- All means that all chart objects are visible, except objects for data quality indication (data qualityobjects mostly overwrite the whole screen, therefore a special button exists in the presentationmenu)- Customized means that the user´s selection of visible chart objects is displayedIf in the Customized mode at least one visibility group is switched off, then the appropriate modeand an additional '-' character will be displayed.If in the Customized mode at least one visibility group is added, then the appropriate mode andan additional '+' character will be displayed.In the Cursor-Tool-Tip of this part of the screen the details of the actual selections are displayed.Date DependentAlways: Is only visible if in the presentation menu the selection button "Date Dependent" is set to"Always".In the Cursor-Tool-Tip of this part of the screen the text: "Date dependent objects are alwaysvisible. Information displayed may be incorrect for the present date and time." will be visible.Depth[m]: The actual units for chart depth values belonging to the chart cell at the own ships position in Trueor Relative Motion mode or at the center position of the chart area in Browse mode.Title Warning Category Date Dependent Depth Status
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsIII-3 Permanent Area for NavigationIII Main Applications.fm / 10.11.11 III-57NACOS PlatinumStatusOverscaled Xn.n: The chart cell at the own ships position in True or Relative Motion Mode or atthe chart centre position in Browse Mode is displayed with a larger scale than defined for this cell. Theactual overscale factor is displayed as Xn.n. (e.g. X2.5 means that the chart is displayed with Range 2.5times smaller than normally defined).The text Better scale available will be displayed here (additionally) if a chart is available at the sameposition with a better 'Navigation purpose' (larger scale). More chart details will be made visible if youchange to a smaller display range scale. The text No ENC available will be displayed here if no chartwith an appropriate scale exists at the own ship´s or center position. In the Cursor-Tool-Tip of this partof the screen a detailed text will be displayed additionally.
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsIII-3 Permanent Area for Navigation III Main Applications.fm / 10.11.11III-583.5 TargetsARPA and AIS targets can be displayed simultaneously on the PPI. Insome cases it is possible that one and the same object is tracked asan ARPA target and also activated as an AIS target. If the ARPA andAIS target have similar data for distance, course and speed, they canbe fusioned. This means that they are treated as one target as longas the similarity is existant. The limits for the similarity of the data canbe defined by the operator. See chapter 3.5.1 on page III-59In other cases it is possible that the two targets are treated as twodifferent objects.Anyway under Fusion, the system can be set in a way that one type of targets has priority beingdisplayed. Nevertheless, both types of targets are still tracked or remain activated in the background. Independent of the selected priority in the PPI it can be selected for an individual target which data andgraphics shall be shown. See chapter 7.2 on page A-59, "Reverse Fusion" for details.Additionally it can be selected under Sleeping which type of sleeping AIS targets are to be displayedcontinuously.With the selection Trial the trial manoeuvre function can be activated or switched off. See chapter 7.12on page A-72 for details.
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsIII-3 Permanent Area for NavigationIII Main Applications.fm / 10.11.11 III-59NACOS Platinum3.5.1 FusionDefines temporarily the priority for showing the ARPA or AIS target symbol andtarget data in case that the defined target association limits are fulfilled. See chapter3.5.1 on page III-59 for details about target fusion function and settings.Fusioned radar echo and AIS activated target, AIS symbol is displayed.
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsIII-3 Permanent Area for Navigation III Main Applications.fm / 10.11.11III-603.5.2 Sleeping TargetsAIS targets are divided in Class A or Class B targets. - Class A are commercial vessels,- Class B are leisure craftsWith this selection list it can be chosen which types of sleeping AIS targets aredisplayed in the PPI continuously and are available in the target list.☞ Even if the AIS target display is switched off for above mentioned vessels (i.e. even if None isselected), all received AIS target information is continuously processed in the background.In any case those AIS targets being classified as Dangerous can be activated automatically if thisfunction is not switched off. (See chapter 7.5 on page A-62). If AIS targets are already tracked andtheir display is switched off in the above menu, already activated targets remain in the PPI and inthe target list.
RADAR
ED 3100 G 110 / 02 (2011-10)Operating InstructionsA-1 General InformationA RADAR.fm / 10.11.11 A-3NACOS Platinum1 General Information
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 110 / 02 (2011-10)Operating InstructionsA-1 General Information A RADAR.fm / 10.11.11A-41.1 RADAR SafetyThe radar can perform its safety function only if it is in proper state. Observe the following rules toensure correct functioning of the radar.- Check the radar’s transmission power and the receiver sensitivity regularly by means of the perform-ance monitor – see RADAR part of the operating instructions.- Position receivers connected to the NACOS Platinum system must comply with the standard IEC61162-1, which largely corresponds to NMEA 0183.- ARPA target data directly depend on the accuracy and proper functioning of the selected speedsensor and the gyro compass.- Correct interpretation of indicated data requires knowledge about the implemented ConsistentCommon Reference System (CCRS). See chapter III - 2.1 on page 16.1.1.1 RADAR Safety – Electrical Systems☞ If the units are to be disconnected from the ship's mains, keep in mind that each antenna unit, eachtransceiver electronics unit and each indicator has its own supply of power from the ship's mains.If synchro transmitters are used for the transfer of signals, e.g. transfer of the heading signal fromthe compass system, a dangerous voltage is present in the units until the reference voltage isswitched off.Pay particular attention to the notes and warnings referring to possible faults in the radar display, since such faults can impair the detection of targets.HIGH VOLTAGE!Even when the equipment is switched off, there can be dangerous voltage present at exposed contacts in the units. Therefore, before a unit is opened, it must be ensured that the voltage supply to the unit is disconnected from the ship's mains, and that it remains disconnected.Because of the capacitors contained in the units, there can be a dangerous voltage present in any unit several minutes or even for hours after switching off and disconnection from the mains supply. The different electronic units of the RADAR system may be opened by qualified, trained persons only.If it should be necessary to work on gearboxes while they are opened, pay special attention to the setting of the high-voltage supply switch (interlock). It is situated inside the gearbox and switches off the high voltage of the transceiver as soon as the cover of the gearbox is opened. BUT: For service purposes the interlock can be set into a position that high voltage is present inside the gearbox. Refer to the technical manual for details.
ED 3100 G 110 / 02 (2011-10)Operating InstructionsA-1 General InformationA RADAR.fm / 10.11.11 A-5NACOS Platinum1.1.2 RADAR Safety – Radiation☞ There is no international agreement about the danger posed by high frequency radiation of the kindproduced by the radar systems. In most countries, a radiation density exceeding 100 W/m2 isconsidered dangerous; in some countries, values over 10 W/m2 are regarded as not beingcompletely safe. If in doubt, observe the applicable local regulations, and always ensure minimumpossible exposure.Table A / 1 Radiation danger zone of radar antennasWARNING! ELECTROMAGNETIC RADIATION!Do not enter the radiation danger zone of the rotating antenna, and make sure that no other person enters the danger zone. See table A / 1. Before working on the antenna unit, the antenna switch on the unit must be set to 0 and the transceiver must be disconnected from the ship's mains.Antenna Type TransceiverA=Up B=DownRadius of the Radiation Danger ZoneRadiation Density100 W/m2Radiation Density50 W/m2Radiation Density10 W/m25 ft X-Band 12.5 kW, Version A 1.4 m 2.8 m 14 m25 kW, Version A 2.1 m 4.2 m 21 m25 kW, Version B 1.65 m 3.3 m 16 m8 ft X-Band 12.5 kW, Version A 0.65 m 1.4 m 7 m25 kW, Version A 1.3 m 2.6 m 13 m25 kW, Version B 0.9 m 1.8 m 9 m14 ft S-Band 30 kW, Version A 1.3 m 2.6 m 13 m30 kW, Version B 0.7 m 1.6 m 7.8 m
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 110 / 02 (2011-10)Operating InstructionsA-1 General Information A RADAR.fm / 10.11.11A-61.1.3 RADAR Safety – Mechanical SystemsTURNING DEVICES!When the radar system is switched to ON, it is possible that, instead of the expected antenna, a different one will begin to rotate depending on the settings and configuration adjusted before shutdown of the radar system. Therefore, it must be ensured beforehand that all antennas can rotate freely and that there are no persons in the danger zones of all antennas. Before starting work in the vicinity of a radar antenna, make sure to switch off the man-aloft switch which is situated on the bottom side of the gearbox. Refer to the technical manual for details.CRUSHING HAZARD!Gearboxes and other mechanical units of the RADAR system may be opened by qualified, trained persons only. DANGER OF VIOLENT PRESSURE TO HANDS AND FINGERS!Uncovered toothed belts and wheels inside the housing.Make sure the MAN ALOFT SWITCH is set to "0" when working at the opened gear box!
ED 3100 G 110 / 02 (2011-10)Operating InstructionsA-1 General InformationA RADAR.fm / 10.11.11 A-7NACOS Platinum1.2 Current IHO Standards / Regulatory ApprovalsAccording to the international convention for the Safety of Life at Sea (SOLAS) chapter V radar equip-ment is classified into three categories depending of the size of the ship. The RADAR Platinum series isapproved for the highest two categories CAT 1 and CAT 2. The table below provides a summary of capa-bilities and differences for both categories as implemented in this radar series.Table A / 2 Categories of RADARIf the CHARTRADAR option is installed, above categories are extended with the suffix C as follows:Category of ship/craftCAT 2 1)1) Earlier classified as 12" radarCAT 1 2)2) Earlier classified as 16" radarSize of ship/craft 500 gt to <10000gt All ships/craft ≥10000 gtMinimum operational display area diameter 250 mm 320 mmMinimum display area 270 mm x 270 mm 340 mm x 340 mmUsually used monitor for Platinum 22’’ TFT 26’’ TFTAuto acquisition of targets Yes YesARPA target capacity 40 40Activated AIS target capacity 40 40Sleeping AIS target capacity 200 200Trial manoeuvre Yes YesWith 22” TFT monitor: CAT 2 CWith 26” TFT monitor: CAT 1 CThe NACOS Platinum and especially the RADARPILOT Platinum is not yet approved for High Speed Crafts (HSC)
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 110 / 02 (2011-10)Operating InstructionsA-1 General Information A RADAR.fm / 10.11.11A-81.3 System Structure and InstallationOn the following pages drawings of two typical radar system installations are shown. The system internalwiring (interconnection) of the Ethernet LAN and other signals is shown on a basic level. For details ona more technical level, refer to the Technical Manuals.Fig. A / 1 IMO-Set installation
ED 3100 G 110 / 02 (2011-10)Operating InstructionsA-1 General InformationA RADAR.fm / 10.11.11 A-9NACOS PlatinumFig. A / 2 INS-5 InstallationFor the INS-5 installation as shown above, consisting of 5 MFD plus Conning Display, additional compo-nents of NACOS Platinum are neccessary in order to form a redundant, approved ship control system.See the appropriate chapters of the mentioned components for further information.
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 110 / 02 (2011-10)Operating InstructionsA-1 General Information A RADAR.fm / 10.11.11A-10SafeguardsThe following table gives an overview about the failure modes and the respective system status as wellas possible measures supporting maximum system availability.Table A / 3 RADAR Failure ModesAs shown in the above table in case of an installation with two or more radar systems each system isworking independently from the other one, a failure in one system does not affect the operation of theother systems. Each system can work as stand-alone radar without changing any configuration settings.Failure description Status Measure and ResultAntenna Unit (antenna, gearbox or transceiver) inoperable or defective This antenna / trans-ceiver cannot be selected by any MFD any moreRADAR operation with all other installed Antenna Units is still avail-ableDisplay Electronics (MFD-PC) inoperable or defective One of two (or more) radar indicators is not availableOperate X- or S- Band radar via the secondary or any other still available MFDDisplay Monitor inoperable or defectiveRADAR Keyboard inoperable or defective RADAR indicator remains available Operate the MFD with on screen commands and Track ball only; full operating level is availableTrackball inoperable or defective Limited basic radar operation via the keyboard remains availableNetwork Switch or its power supply defective RADAR indicator and connected transceiver are not availableOperate another X- or S- Band radar via the secondary or any other still available MFDSensor Interface, i.e. Data Processing Unit (DPU), Data Communication Unit (DCU) or its power supply defectiveAll radar indicators and transceivers remain avail-ableSystem automatically activates the secondary DPU or DCU, the main navigation sensors (for HDG, SOG, POSN) remain available.In a double installation, one of the transceivers is inoperable or defective The transceiver is not available The remaining transceiver 1) can be set as slave on the second indicator; picture is visible at both indicators.1) If one of the sensor signals is missing, that navigation data are derived from one of the other sensorsas far as possible, either automatically or manually. For details please refer to chapterSee chapter III- 3.2 on page 33In a double installation, one of the MFDs is inoperable or defective The system cannot be controlled by this MFD any longerBoth transceivers can be controlled with the remaining MFD unit; both radar pictures can be observed sepa-ratelyIn a double installation, "No RADAR Video" alarm is shown The actual transceiver is not available 2)2) Transmission of the radar video from a connected transceiver to the MFD is monitored continuously.If the connection to the transceiver is disturbed or completely lost, the respective alarm messagesdescribing the reason for the fault are given (See chapter A - 7.15 on page A-81 for details). If the refresh ofthe radar video is not possible, the alarm No RADAR Video is issued; the video in the PPI is cleared and willno longer be updated.Switch to the remaining transceiverIn a multiple transceiver installation, one of the transceivers is inoperable or defectiveThe transceiver is not available Remaining transceivers can be set as slave on one of the other indicators, picture is visible on all indicators.In a multiple transceiver installation, one of the MFDs is inoperable or defec-tiveThe system cannot be controlled by this MFD any longerAll remaining transceivers can be controlled with the remaining indi-cator electronics units, all radar pictures can be observed separately.
ED 3100 G 110 / 02 (2011-10)Operating InstructionsA-1 General InformationA RADAR.fm / 10.11.11 A-11NACOS Platinum1.4 Basics / Evaluation of the RADAR Video1.4.1 Basics of the Evaluation of RADAR Video in Platinum SeriesGenerally, the echo data received by the transceiver can be amplified, attenuated or filtered in order toenhance the display of desired data like targets. The main intention of the signal processing is the clearand unmistakeable display of radar targets and the suppression of unwanted echoes like sea clutter,rain clutter or interferences.Amplification, attenuation or filtering is done in several ways, with continuosly or digitally working filters.(Some can be set from 0% to 100%, others can only be switched on or off).Further on, echo data with the same azimuth delivered from one or more radar pulses („sweep-to-sweep-data“) can be processed or data from one or more antenna turnarounds („scan-to-scan-data“) can beevaluated.The amplitudes of echoes can be evaluated in order to determine whether the echoes are targets ornoise, or the correlation of sweep-to-sweep or scan-to-scan data can be used to enhance the radarpicture:Table A / 4 Scheme of RADAR Video EvaluationAmplitudes are influenced for example by the Gain and Sea settings, correlation is done amongst othersby the Enhance functions.In the following, the different filters, their basic techniques and advantages or limitations are describedin the sequence they appear on the screen.Raw RADAR DataProcessingAmplificationAttenuationFiltered RADAR DataAmplitude TreatmentCorrelative TreatmentSweep-to-sweepScan-to-scan
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 110 / 02 (2011-10)Operating InstructionsA-1 General Information A RADAR.fm / 10.11.11A-12Short Pulse/Long Pulse is available for any range of the radar. The internal pulse length changes withrespect to the selected range automatically. For detailed information on the pulse lengths for any range,please refer to the table in section 1.4.2 of the Operating Instructions.The default setting for the pulse length should be Short Pulse. A longer pulse has a higher energy, butnot a higher amplitude. Thus, it delivers stronger echoes. It is allowed to switch between the two pulselengths at any time.If target enhancement or any other filtering methods are active, the stronger echoes are processed bythe filters and are able to improve a weak radar picture. The Tune function can be set manually or automatically. Tune influences the center frequency of theentire radar echo evaluation process. For the adaption of Tune, no radar echoes are needed and inter-ference from other radar devices is suppressed so that automatic tuning (AFC) has the best results andshould be used as default. An optimum tuning is not only important for a clear visual display of thetargets on the video but is also a necessary prerequisite for the ARPA functions.Gain setting influences the amplitudes of all echoes and works like an amplifier that makes it possibleto enhance all echoes and noise in the same way in order to get a better picture. But, as said before,also the noise will be amplified and can disturb the clear display of targets. Gain should in any case beset in such a way that slight noise is always visible.Rain can be set to Off or Low, Medium and High. With an optimal setting of Rain only the boundaryof the rainy area facing towards the transceiver is displayed and echoes within or behind the rainy areawill be displayed if their echo is still strong enough after having been filtered. Weak echoes will not bedisplayed if their echo is too small after the signal has been processed by the filter.For each setting, a correlative signal processing takes place and filters out the noise of the rainfall.Echoes which are strong enough will be displayed, others may disappear.Sea can be set to manual or automatic mode. In manual mode, its setting influences the amplitudes ofthe radar echoes in such a way that it attenuates echoes close to the antenna very much and that itattenuates echoes which are more distant to it only very little. Due to the fact that the distance of atarget is represented by the time its echo needs to return to the antenna, this is called „sensitivity-time-control“ (STC). Nevertheless, echoes which are as strong as the unwanted reflections of the sea may besuppressed and not visible, or they may appear and disappear, depending on how strong thesurrounding unwanted reflections are.In automatic mode, a fixed, approved value for the Sea filter is set. Advantages or limitations to theeffect are the same as in manual mode. In the case of heavy rain, snow and hail, it can be expected that, even if the setting is correct, radar targets which only produce weak reflections - especially targets situated behind a strong rain front - will remain undetected. Such targets can appear suddenly when leaving the rainy area.
ED 3100 G 110 / 02 (2011-10)Operating InstructionsA-1 General InformationA RADAR.fm / 10.11.11 A-13NACOS PlatinumSimultaneous operation of Rain and SeaEnhance combines an adaptive STC, an additional correlative filter and a so-called „target enhancement“in four selectable steps. See also the table on page A-14.Definitions:Adaptive STC is a second STC that is derived from the medium value of the echoes of the last sweeps.It is added to the manual STC and is able to suppress clutter.The correlative filter works in scan to scan mode or over several scans respectively with its parametersrelative to the selected range. In large ranges, the correlation filter will need several scans until an effectto the picture is visible, in smaller ranges the effect of the filter is faster. It is also able to suppress noise.Target enhancement is used to display even very small or weak targets. For example, if an echo isthis small that it only lights up one pixel of the screen, it could be overseen or regarded as noise orclutter. Target enhancement makes it a little bigger, so that is is better to discover among the moredynamic clutter or noise. With this enhanced target, the correlation filter can work much more precisely.In order to get information of when to use which of the four levels of the Enhance function, pleaserefer to the user manual. See chapter 5.2.4 on page A-43.In the case that anticlutter sea value is set too large, weak targets can be lost, especially at close range. If the sea is very rough, it can be expected that radar targets which only produce weak reflections will remain undetected, even if the setting is correct.In case that Rain and Sea are operated simultaneously, especially in very rough weather conditions, the detection of radar targets may fail even if all settings are correct, because the sum of clutter (reflections of sea and rain) is as high as or even higher than the reflec-tion of targets.When the Enhance function is running, the scan-to-scan correlation might have the result that small, fast-moving targets or Racon codes are displayed with reduced intensity or might be suppressed.
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 110 / 02 (2011-10)Operating InstructionsA-1 General Information A RADAR.fm / 10.11.11A-14In the table below the settings of the respective filters are described:Table A / 5 Qualitative description of Enhance levelsInterference Rejection is a means to suppress interferences caused by other radars working on thesame frequency. For example, if two radars of the same kind operate very close to each other and thePRF and signal frequency are similar or equal, the radars will influence each other with their pulses orechoes. Circles or coils will appear on the PPI. With Interference Rejection on, most of those effectswill be eliminated by a filter that is able to detect those special signals. Targets will not be suppressed.See also A-Distortions of the RADAR Video in section 1.4.3.Video Emphasis can be used to increase the detection of targets of the radar. Very strong echoes willbe shown in orange colour. It can help to decide whether an echo is one or two combined objects. Forexample, without VE the echo is only a large yellow spot, with VE switched on it is visible that the yellowspot contains 2 smaller orange dots, it can be decided that there is a structure in the yellow spot or thatthere are two echoes very close to each other. The display of targets on the PPI will be improved, targetswill not get lost if VE is switched off. Also structures in land areas or in rainclouds or seaclutter can bemade more visible by the VE function, for instance a light house on a land area or buoys with only ashort distance to the land, whose echoes would normally melt into the ones of the land. 1.4.2 Achievable RADAR RangeThe theoretically achievable radar range limited by the curvature of the earth depends on the heightof the antenna above the water surface and the height of the target, and is applicable under normalatmospheric conditions - see the following table.Table A / 6 Achievable RADAR RangeWhether radar targets can be detected up to this theoretical range, even with optimum video setting,depends not only on the atmospheric conditions but also on the characteristics of the target:Enhance Off Low Medium HighAdaptive STC no no yes, but small yes, medium valueCorrelation no yes, with short time-constant yes, longer time-constant than „LOW“yes, longer time-constant than „MEDIUM“Target enhancement very little, small targets just visible little medium highAntenna Height Above Water SurfaceTheoretically Achievable RADAR Rangeat a Target Height of1 m 3 m 10 m 30 m 100 m 300 m 1000 m8 m 9 NM 12 NM 13 NM 18 NM 28 NM 44 NM 76 NM15 m 11 NM 13 NM 16 NM 21 NM 31 NM 47 NM 79 NM30 m 12 NM 16 NM 19 NM 23 NM 34 NM 50 NM 82 NM
ED 3100 G 110 / 02 (2011-10)Operating InstructionsA-1 General InformationA RADAR.fm / 10.11.11 A-15NACOS Platinum- Large targets with good reflection characteristics produce strong echo signals and are displayed withcorresponding clarity on the screen.- Smaller targets situated in the shadow of large objects are not illuminated by the radar pulses andare therefore not displayed.- Flat coasts have an unfavourable reflection cross-section and cannot be recognized until they havebeen approached more closely. On the other e , high coastlines and mountainous regions furtherinland are recognised at a very early stage.- In the coastal approaches, the tide rip lines and surf areas are displayed similarly to coastlines.However, this rather irritating display can be a valuable orientation aid for the coastal navigator.- The reflections of radar waves from ice depend largely on the surface structure of the areas illumi-nated by the radar. Rough and jagged surfaces produce good echo displays, whereas smoothlyfrozen-over surfaces, rounded surfaces and surfaces at an oblique angle generally reflect the trans-mitted pulses away from the ship. Thus, for example, the echo display of large icebergs can fluc-tuate extremely severely, depending on the existing aspect.- The detection of low-lying blocks of ice (growlers) probably presents the greatest uncertainty:1.4.3 Distortions of the RADAR VideoBecause of the physical characteristics of the radar principle used, the video displayed does not corre-spond exactly to the position and form of the reflecting target. A distinction must be drawn betweenradial distortions (in the direction of the target) and azimuthal distortions (perpendicular to the targetdirection) - see figure on next page.Radial DistortionsRadial distortions in the direction of transmission are caused by the fact that a target reflects the trans-mitted pulse for as long as the pulse is moving past the target 1). Thus, radial lengthening depending onthe pulse duration occurs on the screen. In the case of range measurements, it must be noted that theecho edge facing own ship corresponds to the true front edge of the target.If there are several targets behind one another with small (radial) distances between them, they areshown separately on the screen if, and only if, their distance apart is so large that the radial lengthenedechoes do not overlap.Azimuthal DistortionsAzimuthal distortions are caused by the width of the beam radiated by the antenna. A point targetappears wider the further away it is. At a distance of 10 NM with a horizontal antenna-beamwidth of1.5°, an individual target is displayed as an arc with a length of 480 m. Because of this effect, individualtargets situated beside one another can merge to form a single target.Even if the anticlutter facilities are operated carefully, the echoes from growlers can no longer be definitely identified if moderate disturbances from the sea surface are present.1) The pulse length setting Long Pulse thus generates larger radial distortions than Short Pulse.
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 110 / 02 (2011-10)Operating InstructionsA-1 General Information A RADAR.fm / 10.11.11A-16☞ Not only individual targets but also small spits of land aligned in the radial direction appear widerthan they really are, and radially oriented entrances appear narrower than in reality.As a result ofazimuthal distortions and/or changes in the target position, the radar centroid of a target canchange, especially at short range. In the case of a target being tracked, this can lead to a suddenchange in the displayed vector.In addition to these undesirable azimuthal distortions, targets can also be deliberately widened withincreasing distance, so that narrow, close-range targets too can be seen clearly. This function is used inthe Enhance modes Medium and High. It ensures that the azimuthal distortion corresponds to theradial distortion over a wide range of distances. Because the radial distortion depends on the pulselength, the targets are displayed particularly large by the selection of Long Pulse.Fig. A / 3 Radial and azimuthal distortions of the radar video1.4.4 Undesirable Echo Displays and EffectsDisturbances of the radar video are caused by- meteorological processes,- reflections from the sea surface,- radar signals from other transmitters,- false echo displays,- sectors of reduced radar visibility,- superrefraction and subrefraction.Two adjacent targets merge to form one radar echo (azimuthal distortion)Radial distortionAzimuthal distortionRADAR videoActual size of the targetTwo targets behind one another merge to form one radar echo (radial distortion)Width of the beam radiated by the antennaA spit of land is displayed widerAn entrance is displayed narrower or not at allLand contourRADAR video
ED 3100 G 110 / 02 (2011-10)Operating InstructionsA-1 General InformationA RADAR.fm / 10.11.11 A-17NACOS PlatinumInfluences of Meteorological ProcessesThe influence of meteorological phenomena such as fog, rain, snow or hail on the radar video increaseswith the size of the droplets in relation to the radar wavelength, and with the density of the droplets.The shorter-wave X-Band radar (with a wavelength of 3 cm) is therefore generally impaired moreseverely by meteorological influences than is the longer-wave S-Band radar (10 cm wavelength).The following table describes the influences of rain and the influences on the radar:Table A / 7 Influences of Meteorological ProcessesIn general, it is advisable not to use long pulse in rainy conditions and it is better to use the S-bandradar rather than the X-band. If no S-band radar is available, it must be considered that X-band radarslose 50% of their coverage in heavy rains.X-Band RADAREven in the X-Band radar, fog causes practically no disturbances, whereas precipitations with larger drop-lets attenuate the transmitted radar pulses and thus weaken to a greater or lesser extent the display oftargets situated behind extensive areas of precipitation. Furthermore, throughout their entire extent, rain,snow and hail reflect part of the transmitted energy and produce echoes in the form of milky areas inthe radar video (backscatter).Because of the very different signal structures of useful targets and rain areas, rain clutter can be notice-ably reduced by the rain clutter suppression function.Reduction of target detection S-Band,short pulse S-Band;long pulse X-Band,short pulse X-Band,long pulseRain, 4mm/h, close range < 5nm Slightly Severely Slightly SeverelyRain, 4mm/h, medium range Nearly none Up to half Slightly SeverelyRain, 4mm/h, long range > 10nm Nearly none Slightly Slightly SeverelyRain, 16mm/h, close range < 5nm Slightly Severely Up to half SeverelyRain, 16mm/h, medium range Nearly none Severely Up to half SeverelyRain, 16mm/h, long range > 10nm Nearly none Severely Up to half Up to half
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 110 / 02 (2011-10)Operating InstructionsA-1 General Information A RADAR.fm / 10.11.11A-18In the case of strong, extended areas of rain, the losses become so great that the achievable range isreduced very severely. Useful targets might be completely concealed.Fig. A / 4 Reduced Range of First Detection in Dependance or Precipitation in X-BandS-Band RADARThe S-Band radar „sees“ through the rain with practically no attenuation losses, and even detects targetsin and behind a rain area. The echo signals caused by the rain are only displayed weakly. Similar behav-iour is exhibited in the case of hail and snow.In this case too, unusually heavy rain can reduce the achievable ranges and thus cause sudden loss oftargets.Fig. A / 5 Reduced Range of First Detection in Dependance or Precipitation in S-Band
ED 3100 G 110 / 02 (2011-10)Operating InstructionsA-1 General InformationA RADAR.fm / 10.11.11 A-19NACOS PlatinumReflections from the Sea SurfaceClutter echoes from the surface of the sea can be recognised from the fact that a mostly circular buteccentric area displaced in the wind direction and having non-uniform brightness is formed around theown ship symbol (sea clutter). These echoes make targets in this region more difficult to detect andtrack, but they have no effect on the display of targets situated behind the reflection zone.These disturbances are more severe in the case of a radar antenna mounted high up than for onemounted lower down. The area covered by these disturbances increases with increasing sea state, andis increased particularly by steeper waves.With the aid of the sea clutter suppression function, the disturbance echoes described above can bereduced. However, since this also weakens the display of targets and because the target might not bedisplayed with every revolution of the antenna, maximum concentration by the observer is necessary. Inthe case of automatic target tracking, the sea clutter suppression function can lead to the loss of targetsdue to the attenuation of the signals. Disturbances Caused by Other RADARsTransmissions from other radars working in the same electrical frequency band occur as disturbances inthe form of small points or dashes. These move in rapid succession along straight or curved tracks tothe centre of the screen or in the opposite direction.These disturbances appear particularly clearly at the larger range settings, but they impede radar obser-vation to an insignificant extent only. They can be almost completely eliminated by means of the Inter-ference Rejection function which is activated automatically on the Platinum RADAR but which can beswitched off if required.False or Indirect Echo DisplaysFalse or indirect echo displays ("ghost echoes") occur as a result of reflection of the radar pulses by theship's own superstructures of all kinds and by nearby objects that reflect very well. Therefore, a typicalfeature of these echoes is that they appear at the bearing of the reflecting surface, regardless of the realposition of the targets.When two ships pass one another on parallel courses, multiple echoes can often be observed as a resultof pulses reflected to and from several times between the ships' sides. On the screen, a series of equis-paced echo displays of decreasing intensity appears at the bearing of the object.Sectors of Reduced RADAR VisibilitySectors of reduced radar visibility occur as a result of own ship's superstructures which impair andprevent rectilinear propagation of the radar pulses. Theoretical determination of the geometry of thesesectors and of their influence on the display of targets is possible to an inadequate extent only. An effec-tive practical method consists of determining the shadow sectors against the background of disturbancesignals from the sea surface (sea clutter).Superrefraction - SubrefractionIf the normal refraction gradient for the radar wave in the maritime boundary layer of the atmosphereis changed by external influences, subrefraction occurs when the transmitted beam is bent upwards awayfrom the earth's surface, and superrefraction occurs when the transmitted beam is bent down towardsthe earth's surface.In the case of superrefraction, false echoes of targets outside the set range of measurement can occur:the echo of a transmitted pulse is not received within the set range but during the next transmit cycleor by the one after that. The resulting ghost echoes can occur at any position. Since the position of ghostechoes depends on the pulse repetition frequency, ghost echoes can be recognised as such by switchingover the pulse length or the range on the master radar.
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 110 / 02 (2011-10)Operating InstructionsA-1 General Information A RADAR.fm / 10.11.11A-20☞ Every pulse length has a particular pulse repetition frequency assigned to it; therefore, when thepulse length or range is changed, the repetition frequency changes too (See chapter 1.4.8 on pageA-23).1.4.5 RADAR Setting for the Display of Racon CodesThe code of Racons consists of a radially arranged dash-dot code which begins in the radar video a shortdistance behind the beacon position. By means of different codes described in the Lists of Lights, theapproach points equipped with Racons can be clearly identified.Most Racons transmit in the X-Band, but there are some Racons installed which transmit in the S-Band.The majority of Racons change their transmission frequency slowly throughout the entire frequencyband, and so they are not received in every revolution of the antenna.For the setting of the radar, the same basic principles are applicable as for SART detection (See chapter1.4.7 on page A-21)1.4.6 RADAR Settings for Target Enhancer DetectionThe target enhancer is an active device on a target vessel which transmits an X-band pulse upon recep-tion of any X-band radar signal. The pulse length of this secondary radar pulse does not typically reflectthe size of the actual target vessel but is fixed. In general this kind of equipment is used on small boatswhich have not a significant radar profile like pleasure boats or wooden boats or lifeboats. There are nospecial settings required for detection of target enhancers. They are just visualized like a very wellreflecting target.
ED 3100 G 110 / 02 (2011-10)Operating InstructionsA-1 General InformationA RADAR.fm / 10.11.11 A-21NACOS Platinum1.4.7 RADAR Setting for SART Detection (X-Band only)The information needed for reliable detection of SART's is described in IMO Circular 161. The content ofthat paper is reproduced on the following pages.ANNEXOPERATION OF MARINE RADAR FOR SART DETECTIONWARNING: A SART will only respond to an X-Band (3 cm) radar. It will not be seen on an S-Band (10 cm) radar. Introduction l. A Search and Rescue Transponder (SART) may be triggered by any X-Band (3 cm) radar within a range of approximately 8 n.miles. Each radar pulse received causes it to transmit a response which is swept repetitively across the complete radar frequency band. When interrogated, it first sweeps rapidly (0.4 μsec) through the band before beginning a relatively slow sweep (7.5 μsec) through the band back to the starting frequency. This process is repeated for a total of twelve complete cycles. At some point in each sweep, the SART frequency will match that of the interrogating radar and be within the pass band of the radar receiver. If the SART is within range, the frequency match during each of the 12 slow sweeps will produce a response on the radar display, thus a line of 12 dots equally spaced by about 0.64 n.miles will be shown. 2. When the range to the SART is reduced to about 1 n.mile, the radar display may show also the 12 responses generated during the fast sweeps. These additional dot responses, which also are equally spaced by 0.64 n.miles, will be interspersed with the original line of 12 dots. They will appear slightly weaker and smaller than the original dots. RADAR Range Scale 3. When looking for a SART it is preferable to use either the 6 or 12 n.mile range scale. This is because the total displayed length of the SART response of 12 (or 24) dots may extend approximately 9.5 n.miles beyond the position of the SART and it is necessary to see a number of response dots to distinguish the SART from other responses. SART Range Errors 4. When responses from only the 12 low frequency sweeps are visible (when the SART is at a range greater than about 1 n.mile), the position at which the first dot is displayed may be as much as 0.64 n.mile beyond the true position of the SART. When the range closes so that the fast sweep responses are seen also, the first of these will be no more than 150 metres beyond the true position. RADAR Bandwidth 5. This is normally matched to the radar pulse length and is usually switched with the range scale and the associated pulse length. Narrow bandwidths of 3-5 MHz are used with long pulses on long range scales and wide bandwidths of 10-25 MHz with short pulses on short ranges. 6. A radar bandwidth of less than 5 MHz will attenuate the SART signal slightly, so itis preferable to use a medium bandwidth to ensure optimum detection of the SART. TheRADAR Operating Manual should be consulted about the particular radar parameters andbandwidth selection. Note about item 6: The bandwidth of the radar is not less than 5 MHz. Therefore, the setting described here is not necessary
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 110 / 02 (2011-10)Operating InstructionsA-1 General Information A RADAR.fm / 10.11.11A-22RADAR Side Lobes 7. As the SART is approached, side lobes from the radar antenna may show the SART responses as a series of arcs or concentric rings. These can be removed by the use of the anti-clutter sea control although it may be operationally useful to observe the side lobes as they may be easier to detect in clutter conditions and also they will confirm that the SART is near to own ship. Detuning the RADAR 8. To increase the visibility of the SART in clutter conditions, the radar may be detuned to reduce the clutter without reducing the SART response. RADARs with automatic frequency control may not permit manual detune of the equipment. Care should be taken in operating the radar in the detuned condition as other wanted navigational and anti-colli-sion information may be removed. The tuning should be returned to normal operation as soon as possible. Gain 9. For maximum range SART detection the normal gain setting for long range detection should be used i.e., with a light background noise speckle visible. Anti-Clutter Sea Control 10. For optimum range SART detection this control should be set to the minimum. Care should be exercised as wanted targets in sea clutter may be obscured. Note also that in clutter conditions the first few dots of the SART response may not be detectable, irrespec-tive of the setting of the anti-clutter sea control. In this case, the position of the SART may be estimated by measuring 9.5 n.miles from the furthest dot back towards own ship. 11. Some sets have automatic/manual anti-clutter sea control facilities. Because the way in which the automatic sea control functions may vary from one radar manufacturer to another, the operator is advised to use manual control initially until the SART has been detected. The effect of the auto sea control on the SART response can then be compared with manual control. Anti-Clutter Rain Control 12. This should be used normally (i.e. to break up areas of rain) when trying to detect a SART response which, being a series of dots, is not affected by the action of the anti-clutter rain circuitry. Note that Racon responses, which are often in the form of a long flash, will be affected by the use of this control. 13. Some sets have automatic/manual anti-clutter rain control facilities. Because the way in which the automatic rain control functions may vary from one radar manufacturer to another, the operator is advised to use manual control initially until the SART has been detected. The effect of the auto rain control on the SART response can then be compared with manual control. Note: The automatic rain and sea clutter controls may be combined in a single ’auto-clutter’ control, in which case the operator is advised to use the manual controls initially until the SART has been detected, before assessing the effect of auto.
ED 3100 G 110 / 02 (2011-10)Operating InstructionsA-1 General InformationA RADAR.fm / 10.11.11 A-23NACOS Platinum1.4.8 Transmission formatsTo optimise detection performance for the different weather conditions, the radar provides different pulselengths and repetition rates. The pulse repetition rates in relation to the range and the pulse length are shown in the following table:Table A / 8 Transmission formatsScanner rotation frequency 23/28 rpmRange (NM) 1)1) All values of the 0.25 NM range are also valid for the 250 m/500 m ranges0.25 0.50 0.75 1.5 3 6 12 24 48 96Short pulsePulse length (µs) 0.08 0.15 0.30 0.50 1.00 2)(0.90 3)2) 12.5 kW X-Band Transceiver3) 25 kW X-Band and 30 kW S-Band TransceiverPRF (Hz) 2000 1000 500Long pulsePulse length (µs) 0.15 0.30 0.50 1.00 2)0.90 3)PRF (Hz) 1000 500
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 110 / 02 (2011-10)Operating InstructionsA-1 General Information A RADAR.fm / 10.11.11A-241.5 Basic setting of the RADAR VideoSo that radar targets can be detected with certainty, an optimum setting of the radar video is of funda-mental importance.In the following, there is a description of how to set the video of a radar correctly on the master indi-cator. Only after these settings have been made on the master indicator can activated slave indicatorstoo be set in the same way (parameters that cannot be set on slave indicators are pointed out). 1)1. Select the 12 NM display range.Click onthe Adjust control. The TransceiverAdjust window is opened, settings canbe made.2. Tuning (adjustment of the frequency) (can be set on the master indicator only)Automatic tuning: Select the Auto checkbox. This is the default setting.The slider is moved automatically by the system into the position of the optimal value. ☞ If two X-Band or two S-Band systems are being operated simultaneously, disturbance of automatictuning might occur (if it is being used). In such cases, manual tuning is appropriate.Manual tuning: Clear the Auto checkbox and use the slider to perform manual tuning. The green indi-cator bar above the slider corresponds to the amplitude with which the input signal is available for signalprocessing. Observe more than one antenna rotation to find the maximum.Especially in the case of heavy rain and/or a rough sea, it is essential that the setting be adapted by trained personnel so that it is suitable for the situation.1) In ECDIS mode, only those settings are possible that can be performed with the radar keyboard (if a radar keyboard is installed).An optimum tuning is not only important for a clear visual display of the targets on the video but is also a necessary prerequisite for the ARPA functions.Click(Example)
ED 3100 G 110 / 02 (2011-10)Operating InstructionsA-1 General InformationA RADAR.fm / 10.11.11 A-25NACOS Platinum3. Gain (input amplification) Switch off the Enhance function. Use the Gain slider, andincrease the value with the trackball until slight noise isvisible on the PPI. Then reduce the value a little until thenoise has just disappeared, but not more. Switch on theEnhance function again and, if necessary, increase the gaina little (up to 100% for a favourable sea state).☞ With the Enhance function activated, the change in gainonly has an effect after several revolutions of the antenna.☞ On the keyboard, manual tuning is performed by turning the Gain knob.4. Select the desired display range.5. Anticlutter Sea (sea clutter suppression) With anticlutter sea, the input amplification at close range is reduced depending on the distance.Manual suppression of sea clutter: Use the Sea slider toset the value so that the clutter caused by a rough sea is asweak as possible but radar targets are still clearly visible.☞ If the Enhance function is switched on, the radar requiresseveral revolutions of the antenna in order to adjust itself tochanged anticlutter sea values. Therefore, any large changesshould only be made slowly (step by step).☞ On the keyboard, manual tuning is performed by turning theSea knob.Automatic suppression of sea clutter: Select the Auto checkbox behind Sea.☞ The automatic anticlutter sea function has the advantage that the clutter values taken into accountin the upwind direction are different from those taken into account in the downwind direction.Tocheck the display of very small target-echoes, it is necessary to switch over to manual operation.See chapter 1.4.1 on page A-11 for further description of this mode and its specifics.6. Anticlutter Rain (suppression of rain clutter)The suppression of rain clutter can be set to Off or three values: Low, Medium or High. If the value is set to Low or Medium, the filter works with pre-set coefficients just like in manualmode, if the value is set to High, the suppression is operated with correlative coefficients like inautomatic mode.In the case of anticlutter sea values that are too large, weak targets can be lost, especially at close range.If the sea is very rough, it can be expected that radar targets which only produce weak reflections will remain undetected, even if the setting is correct.In the case of heavy rain, snow and hail, it can be expected that, even if the setting is correct, radar targets which only produce weak reflections - especially targets situated behind a strong rain front - will remain undetected. Such targets can appear suddenly when leaving the rainy area.
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 110 / 02 (2011-10)Operating InstructionsA-1 General Information A RADAR.fm / 10.11.11A-26The anticlutter rain function has the advantage that it takes place individually for regions with widelydiffering precipitation. A manual rain clutter control is not available.Choose one of the the values so that the boundary of the rainy area is clearly visible and the clutterin the region behind it is as weak as possible. However, radar targets should still be clearly visible. See chapter 1.4.1 on page A-11 for further description of this mode and its specifics.7. Video EmphasisStrong video signals can be accentuated optically by switching on the Video Emphasis function. Thisfunction is switched on and off by selecting or clearing the Video Emphasis checkbox.8. Pulse length After switch-over to a smaller display range, check whether abetter display is obtained by switching to a different pulselength. Switching is done by selecting or clearing the LongPulse control.Orientation values for settings on the open seaUp to sea state 3 - 4, no rainGain 90% - 100%Anticlutter sea 20%Anticlutter rain OffEnhance Medium or HighInterference rejection OnPulse length SPUp to sea state 3 - 4, rain medium to heavyGain 85% - 95%Anticlutter sea 20%Anticlutter rain Medium or HighEnhance Medium or HighInterference rejection OnPulse length SP or LPSea state 6 - 9, with rainGain 80% - 90%Anticlutter sea 30% - 50%Anticlutter rain LowEnhance Medium or HighInterference rejection OnPulse length LP
ED 3100 G 110 / 02 (2011-10)Operating InstructionsA-1 General InformationA RADAR.fm / 10.11.11 A-27NACOS Platinum1.6 RADAR AccuracyBackgroundThe correct measurement of a target position by radar is determined by the bearing and range accuracyof the radar system. Both parameters are depending on physics, on installation, and on the ability of theuser to read accurate values from the screen. As far as the physics is concerned, the accuracy of bearing measurement basically depends on thenarrowness of the radar beam. The radar beam for X-band has a horizontal beam width of 1.5° with the5 foot antenna and 0.95° with 8 foot antenna. For S-band the corresponding value is 1.8° with 14 footantenna. These values describe the 3 dB corners on each side of the beam, where the transmitted poweris half of the centre value. Experience shows, that typically at sea these values are doubled. So the prac-tical beam width of an 8 foot X-band antenna is about 2°. It provides an echoe with a size of:-> 6 nm x sin 2° = 387 mFurther on physics is involved with range measurement. It depends on the pulse rate and length whichare determined by the user selected range. To minimize error when measuring the range of a target, putthe target echo at an outer position on the screen by selecting a suitable range.In terms of installation the bearing is usually taken relative to the ship's heading, and thus, properadjustment of the heading line at installation is an important factor in ensuring bearing accuracy. Finally the user aspect has to be considered. To minimize error when taking the bearing of a target fromscreen, put the target echo at an outer position on the screen by selecting again a suitable range.ResultsAccording to IMO (MSC.192/5.2) the radar system range and bearing accuracy shall be as follows:• "Range: within 30 m or 1 % of the range scale in use, whichever is greater;• "Bearing: within 1°in typical operational and environmental conditions.A well adjusted 1) Platinum RADARpilot is exceeding these requirements as follows:• "Range: within 15 m or 0.3 % of the range scale in use, whichever is greater;• "Bearing: within 0.5°in typical operational and environmental conditions.1) in terms of trigger delay and heading line adjustment
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 110 / 02 (2011-10)Operating InstructionsA-1 General Information A RADAR.fm / 10.11.11A-28
ED 3100 G 110 / 02 (2011-10)Operating InstructionsA-2 The RADAR KeyboardA RADAR.fm / 10.11.11 A-29NACOS Platinum2 The RADAR KeyboardFig. A / 6 The RADAR KeyboardSeveral RADAR functions can not only be operated via the GUI but also via the radar keyboard installedoptionally in the left part of the operating console. Follow the links to their description in this operatinginstructions as shown in the above figure.The radar keyboard consists of the main operating items for the radar electronics. The radar video itselfand also the artificial elements like VRM or EBL can be set, use the above picture to find quick accessto the relevant chapters.Operation of EBL, VRM and PISee chapter 5.3 on page A-46 for EBL, VRMAlarm management.See chapter 2.1 on page V-10RADAR VideoSee chapter 5.2 on page A-42Stepwise RADAR Range SelectionSee chapter 3.1.2 on page Display BrightnessSee chapter 4.5.1 onpage I-42Suppression of ItemsSee chapter 5.2.6 onpage A-44Relative/True SelectionSee chapter 3.1 on page Centering/Off-Centering the Own Ship. See chapter 4.1 on page A-34
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 110 / 02 (2011-10)Operating InstructionsA-2 The RADAR Keyboard A RADAR.fm / 10.11.11A-30
ED 3100 G 110 / 02 (2011-10)Operating InstructionsA-3 An Overview of the ScreenA RADAR.fm / 10.11.11 A-31NACOS Platinum3 An Overview of the ScreenFig. A / 7 Overview of the RADAR screenApplication part RADAR part RADAR application areaSidebar
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 110 / 02 (2011-10)Operating InstructionsA-3 An Overview of the Screen A RADAR.fm / 10.11.11A-32
ED 3100 G 110 / 02 (2011-10)Operating InstructionsA-4 RADAR Application AreaA RADAR.fm / 10.11.11 A-33NACOS Platinum4 RADAR Application AreaFig. A / 8 PPI with superimposed elementsFor detailed information about the handling of the displayed elements see the following chapters.Bearing scaleParallel index lineEBL2/VRM2, decenteredEBL1/VRM1,centeredRADAR video, with emphasis and superim-posed AIS target symbolHeading linePointer with position infor-mationStern lineVector,bottom track and look-ahead sectorParallel index linesPan and Zoom ControlGuard- / Aquisition Zone
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 110 / 02 (2011-10)Operating InstructionsA-4 RADAR Application Area A RADAR.fm / 10.11.11A-344.1 The Zoom and Pan ControlThe zoom control in NACOS Platinum consists of a slider to adjust the range setting for the radar or thezoom factor for the ECDIS chart display. The compass control consists of pan buttons, which you canuse to move the image section currently displayed.Fig. A / 9 Zoom and Pan ControlTo zoom in incrementally, click on , you will then see more details on the respective display. However,the overall area displayed is smaller. To zoom out again, click on the . You will then see less detailsbut you will have a better general overview of, e.g. an electronic chart displayed.Using the slider or the / controls switches the range for radar or the zoom factor for ECDIS in thesteps described later on. To pan the display, use the panning arrows of the compass control. For example, if you click on thenthe display moves to the right in increments to view a different image section of a chart or whatever isdisplayed. The effect is like travelling with the eye over a large map.To center the display, e.g. after panning, just click on the icon once.☞ It is also possible to off-center and re-center the ship by means of thecontext menu or by means of the button on the radar keyboard.Compass control with 4 pan arrowsSlider to adjust zoom factorZoom inZoom outCENTor
ED 3100 G 110 / 02 (2011-10)Operating InstructionsA-4 RADAR Application AreaA RADAR.fm / 10.11.11 A-35NACOS PlatinumDue to the fact that the bearing scale relates to the position of the CCRP in the PPI, the division of thebearing scale is altered in a way that the scale still fits to the de-centered position of the CCRP.In the case that a very large ship uses a verysmall scale for the display (e.g. 250m) it mighthappen that parts of the ship´s outline are situ-ated outside of the PPI. But neither the CCRPnor the indication of the position of the selectedradar antenna itself can ever leave the PPI,regardless of the settings for CCRP.Before either the CCRP or the indication of theposition of the selected radar antenna will leavethe PPI, they will be shifted back to the oppo-site point where they are supposed to leaveaccording to the ship´s movement at the timewhen the CCRP/the antenna indication havereached 70% of the radius of the PPI, meas-ured from the centre.Origin of the bearing scaleCCRPIndication of the position of the selected radar antenna
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 110 / 02 (2011-10)Operating InstructionsA-4 RADAR Application Area A RADAR.fm / 10.11.11A-36Centre of the PPI50% of the radius70% of the radiusLight grey area: The area where the off-centered CCRP or position indication of the radar antenna may be located.
ED 3100 G 110 / 02 (2011-10)Operating InstructionsA-5 RADAR Sidebar - Permanent AreaA RADAR.fm / 10.11.11 A-37NACOS Platinum5 RADAR Sidebar - Permanent AreaFig. A / 10 An Overview of the Permanent Area of the RADAR
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 110 / 02 (2011-10)Operating InstructionsA-5 RADAR Sidebar - Permanent Area A RADAR.fm / 10.11.11A-385.1 RADAR Transceiver SettingsThis group offers the selection of the desired radar transceiver andbasic settings for the radar. The transceiver can be adjusted bymeans of clicking on the Adjust button.The Adjust button is only sensitive and operable when one of the available transceivers is selected andconnected to the MFD and the MFD is selected as master.5.1.1 Transceiver SelectionFrom the dropdown-list select the transceiver whose radar video is to be displayed at the MFD. Thechosen transceiver and antenna motor are activated, if not yet done by another MFD.If No TX Selected is chosen, the appropriate transceiver is turnedoff and the respective antenna stops rotation, if it is not selected byanother MFD.In order to have the current status of one of the transceivers in the list displayed, movethe pointer to the depiction of the transceiver and let it stay for about one second, a smallwindow pops open and shows the information.A transceiver with the status Not Connected cannot be activated or controlled in anyway.☞ It is not advisable to select RADAR as the CCRP in the Display group of the Permanent Area, ifNo TX Selected has been chosen. In this case, all instruments would become invalid as the RADARCCRP is not defined.At the instant of switch-on of the radar function, the antenna begins to rotate and the emission of high frequency radiation is started. In the case of multiple installations, it can also happen that, instead of the expected antenna, a different one begins to rotate. There-fore, it must be ensured beforehand that the antennas can rotate freely and that there is nobody present close to the antenna turning circles.
ED 3100 G 110 / 02 (2011-10)Operating InstructionsA-5 RADAR Sidebar - Permanent AreaA RADAR.fm / 10.11.11 A-39NACOS Platinum5.1.2 Master / Slave SelectionIf Master is selected, the appropriate MFD becomes themaster operating unit for the transceiver. The formermaster MFD for the selected transceiver is no longermaster and on its screen the checkmark will disappear.Any MFD of the system configured as a radar indicator onservice level can be switched to act as the master. Onthe master indicator, the radar transmitter and thereceiver are operated. A slave-indicator cannot operatethe transmitter, but it can control the video adjustmentson the MFD.If you try to become the master of a transceiver with thestatus Not Connected, the checkmark of the Masterselector will disappear and the Adjust button willbecome insensitive again within 1-2 seconds.Technical background: The radar picture generated by the transceiver always has twice the diameter ofthe selected range of the master transceiver, in order to ensure a proper function of the off-center mode. Picture distortions may occur on the slave MFD if the radar range selected by the master MFD is more than one step smaller than the radar range of the slave and the slave indi-cator is de-centered. Adjust control changes state when master changes.Master, 3 NM Slave, 12 NMDue to the fact that the range of the master is more than one step smaller than the range of the slave, details outside the 6 NM (=2 x 3 NM) range are not visible!Scetch is not to scale!
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 110 / 02 (2011-10)Operating InstructionsA-5 RADAR Sidebar - Permanent Area A RADAR.fm / 10.11.11A-405.1.3 Pulse LengthLong Pulse is available for any range of the radar. The internal pulse length changes with respect tothe selected range automatically. For detailed information on the pulse lengths for any range, pleaserefer to page A-23.The default setting for the pulse length should be short pulse, which means no checkmark onLong Pulse. The short pulse delivers a better resolution, targets which are very close together will be displayed asseparated echoes.A longer pulse has a higher energy, but not a higher amplitude. Thus, it delivers stronger echoes andpossibly a better target visibility at longer ranges. But it may be possible that two targets which are veryclose together would be displayed as one echo.In general, it is advisable not to use the long pulse in rainy conditions.It is allowed to switch between the two pulse lengths at any time.If target enhancement or any other filtering methods are active, the stronger echoes are processed bythe filters and are able to improve a weak radar picture.5.1.4 Adjusting the TransceiverThe selected transceiver´s tuning and Interference Rejection canonly be adjusted by the MFD which is selected as Master for it.If Master is not selected, the Adjust control will be insensitive.TuningThe tuning (adjustment of the transceiver frequency) canbe influenced manually or by means of the automaticcontrol.☞ An optimum tuning is not only important for a clearvisual display of the targets on the video but is also anecessary prerequisite for the ARPA functions.Automatic tuningThe default setting is Auto Tune, the transceiver frequency is controlled automatically. The slider is moved automatically by the system into the position of the optimal value. If two X-Band or two S-Band systems are being operated simultaneously, disturbance of automatic tuningmight occur (if it is being used). In such cases, manual tuning is appropriate.Manual tuningClear the Auto Tune checkbox and use the slider to perform manual tuning. The green indicator barabove the slider corresponds to the amplitude with which the input signal is available for signalprocessing. Observe more than one antenna rotation to find the maximum.Interference Rejection
ED 3100 G 110 / 02 (2011-10)Operating InstructionsA-5 RADAR Sidebar - Permanent AreaA RADAR.fm / 10.11.11 A-41NACOS PlatinumInterference caused by other radars (see page A-19) can usually be eliminated by switch-on of the inter-ference rejection function. The default setting for Interference Rejection is On, but it can temporarilyswitched of by the operator.Peformance MonitorSee chapter H - 1 on page H-3 for details about the operation of the Performance Monitor.Magnetron HoursThe transmitting valve or magnetron is the onlydevice which has in comparison to other elec-tronic devices in the radar system a limited life-time. Typical running time hours are given inthe Maintenance section chapter 3.2.In order to check the actual operational hours ofa specific magnetron just place the cursor onthe transceiver in question in the selection listand a small status window is opened with themagnetron hours.
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 110 / 02 (2011-10)Operating InstructionsA-5 RADAR Sidebar - Permanent Area A RADAR.fm / 10.11.11A-425.2 RADAR Video SettingsThis group shows options which influence the display of the radarvideo on the MFD. These settings are influencing only the radarvideo on the operated MFD, but not on other MFDs which areconnected to the same transceiver as slave or master.5.2.1 GainGain setting influences the amplitudes of all echoes and works like an amplifier that makes it possibleto enhance all echoes and noise in the same way in order to get a better picture. But, also the noise willbe amplified and can disturb the clear display of targets. ☞ For optimum setting, adjust the Gain slider in a way that slight noise is visible on the PPI. Thenreduce the value a little until the noise has just disappeared, but not more.The gain can also be set by means of the Gain turning knob on the radar keyboard.5.2.2 SeaSea can be set to manual or automatic mode. In manual mode, its setting influences the amplitudes ofthe radar echoes in such a way that it attenuates echoes close to the antenna very much and that itattenuates echoes which are more distant to it only very little. Due to the fact that the distance of atarget is represented by the time its echo needs to return to the antenna, this is called „sensitivity-time-control“ (STC). Nevertheless, echoes which are as strong as the unwanted reflections of the sea surfacemay be fully suppressed and not visible, or they may appear and disappear, depending on how strongthe surrounding unwanted reflections are.In automatic mode, a fixed, approved value for the Sea filter is set. Advantages or limitations to theeffect are the same as in manual mode. ☞ The automatic anticlutter sea function has the advantage that the clutter values taken into accountin the upwind direction are different from those taken into account in the downwind direction.Tocheck the display of very small target-echoes, it is necessary to switch over to manual operation.In the case of anticlutter sea values that are too large, weak targets can be lost, especially at close range. If the sea is very rough, it can be expected that radar targets which only produce weak reflections will remain undetected, even if the setting is correct.Gain
ED 3100 G 110 / 02 (2011-10)Operating InstructionsA-5 RADAR Sidebar - Permanent AreaA RADAR.fm / 10.11.11 A-43NACOS PlatinumThe sea clutter suppression can also be set by means of the turning knob on the radarkeyboard.5.2.3 RainThe suppression of rain clutter can be set to Off or to three values: Low, Medium or High.If the value is set to Low or Medium, the filter works with pre-set coefficients just like in manual mode,if the value is set to High, the suppression is operated with correlative coefficients like in automaticmode.The anticlutter rain function has the advantage that it takes place individually for regions with widelydiffering precipitation.To check the display of very small target-echoes in a rain area, it is necessary to switch over to manualoperation.5.2.4 EnhanceThe target enhancement function is a scan-to-scan technology that helps differentiate between radartargets and noise. It can be set to Off or to three automatic values: Low, Medium or High.Refer to chapter 1.5 for the correct gain setting in combination with the activation of the Enhance func-tion.Target enhancement is used to display even very small or weak targets. For example, if a target echo isthis small that it only lights up one pixel of the screen, it could be overseen or regarded as noise orclutter. Target enhancement makes it a little bigger, so that it is better to discover among the moredynamic clutter or noise. With this enhanced target, the correlation filter can work much more precisely.In the case of heavy rain, snow and hail, it can be expected that, even if the setting is correct, radar targets which only produce weak reflections - especially targets situated behind a strong rain front - will remain undetected. Such targets can appear suddenly when leaving the rainy area.When the Enhance function is running, the scan-to-scan correlation might have the result that small, fast-moving targets like high speed crafts or Racon codes are displayed with reduced intensity or might be fully suppressed.Sea
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 110 / 02 (2011-10)Operating InstructionsA-5 RADAR Sidebar - Permanent Area A RADAR.fm / 10.11.11A-445.2.5 Video EmphasisStrong video signals can be accentuated opticallyby switching on the Video Emphasis function. Video Emphasis can be used to increase thedetection of targets of the radar. Very strongechoes will be shown in light green colour. It canhelp to decide whether an echo is one or twocombined objects or whether a strong object iscovered by noise, for example the echo of a cloud.The display of targets on the PPI will be improved,targets will not get lost if VE is switched off. Alsostructures in land areas or in rainclouds orseaclutter can be made more visible by the VEfunction, for instance a light house on a land areaor buoys with only a short distance to the land,whose echoes would normally melt into the ones ofthe land.The examples show a radar echo that is covered bythe noise of a raincloud.5.2.6 Hide Video / OverlayThe radar video itself or the superimposed synthetics overlay canbe suppressed temporarily by holding down the appropriate push-buttons. As soon as the pushbuttons are released, the video orthe synthetic overlay are displayed again.RADAR picture without video emphasisRADAR picture with video emphasis
ED 3100 G 110 / 02 (2011-10)Operating InstructionsA-5 RADAR Sidebar - Permanent AreaA RADAR.fm / 10.11.11 A-45NACOS PlatinumSuppression of the radar video or the synthetic overlay is also possible by means of theradar keyboard. As long as the buttons are pressed down, the appropriate objects onthe PPI are suppressed.Video Overlay
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 110 / 02 (2011-10)Operating InstructionsA-5 RADAR Sidebar - Permanent Area A RADAR.fm / 10.11.11A-465.3 Toolset1 and 2Each toolset offers the use of one variable range marker (VRM)and one electronic bearing line (EBL).With the aid of the EBL and VRM bearings and distancesbetween an object and the own ship or bearings and distancesbetween two objects can be determined. ☞ When measuring bearing and distance between the ownship and an object, the current setting of the CCRP mustbe considered: The CCRP set to RADAR gives measure-ments relative to the selected radar antenna, and CCRPset to Conning gives values relative to the conning posi-tion on the bridge, as long as EBL and VRM are operatedin centered mode. See chapter 2.1 on page III-16. Using the dropdown-list beneath T, it can be chosen wetherthe bearing is to be displayed as true bearing (T) or relativebearing (REL). When the pointer is moved upon the dropdownlist, a windows appears showing the true and relative bearingof the recent VRM.Additionally, Move can be chosen if the origin of the bearingline is to move together with the own ship, Fixed can beselected if the origin is to remain at an absolute position on thescreen.5.3.1 EBLWith the EBL, the bearing of an object withrespect to own ship or the bearingbetween two objects can be determined.After switch-on by means of a click in theToolset group, the EBL are superimposedin the PPI. EBL appear with the same dataas they have been displayed last time. In order to alter the bearing of the EBL,click on it in the PPI. The EBL is nowdisplayed with a small "handle" in itsmiddle. Click and hold the handle and pullthe line to the desired bearing. In order to change the origin of thebearing line, click and pull its origin to thedesired position.Switch the EBL off and on again in orderto re-center it on the own ship.
ED 3100 G 110 / 02 (2011-10)Operating InstructionsA-5 RADAR Sidebar - Permanent AreaA RADAR.fm / 10.11.11 A-47NACOS PlatinumRe-centering of the EBL (and VRM if joined) can also be done by the context menuin the application area. Right-click in the PPI and choose Center EBLx.The current bearing is displayed in the Toolset group.To switch off display of the EBL, clear the checkbox in the Toolsetgroup.The EBL can also be set by means of the radar keyboard.To switch on the EBL, press the button for a short time. Adjust the bearing bymeans of the rotary knob. To switch off the EBL, press the button for about 2seconds.Latitude-Dependent Errors in the Display of the EBLWith the type of projection used for the longitude/latitude grid in the radar, the parallels of latitudebecome more strongly curved with increasing latitude, while the meridians converge increasingly withincreasing distance from the equator (i.e. the direction of a meridian at the edge of the PPI is not 0° -180° but might be 358° - 182°); in other words, their directions no longer correspond to the degreescale at the edge of the PPI.In contrast to this, the EBL is always displayed as a straight line; its bearing displayed as an EBL valuehas a deviation with its maximum at the most distant point from own ship.The following table shows the maximum bearing deviation for various latitudes and range settings.Table A / 9 Latitude-Dependent Errors of the EBLDistance of EBL from Own Ship Geographical Latitude 20 ° 40 ° 60 ° 80 °10 NM < 0.1 ° 0.1 ° 0.3 ° 0.9 °20 NM 0.1 ° 0.3 ° 0.6 ° 1.9 °40 NM 0.2 ° 0.5 ° 1.2 ° 3.8 °60 NM 0.4 ° 0.8 ° 1.7 ° 5.7 °80 NM 0.5 ° 1.1 ° 2.3 ° 7.5 °EBL1OFFEBL2OFFBearing
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 110 / 02 (2011-10)Operating InstructionsA-5 RADAR Sidebar - Permanent Area A RADAR.fm / 10.11.11A-485.3.2 VRMWith the variable range markers, thedistance of an object from own ship or (inconjunction with the EBL) the distancebetween two objects can be measured.After switch-on by means of a click in theToolset group, the VRM are superim-posed in the PPI. VRM appear with thesame data as they have been displayedlast time, if the VRM range is below thedisplay range. Otherwise it is switched onat 50% of the displayed range.In order to alter the range of the VRM,click on it in the PPI. The VRM is nowdisplayed with four small "handles". Clickand hold one of the handles and pull thering to the desired radius. The current VRM radius is displayed in theToolset group.To switch off display of the VRM, clear the checkbox in the Toolsetgroup.☞ If the display range is reduced when the VRM is in the switched-on state, the VRM might be situatedoutside the visible range. Switch the VRM off and then on again, to return it to the visible range.The VRM can also be set by means of the radar keyboard.To switch on the VRM, press the button for a short time. Adjust the range by means ofthe rotary knob. To switch off the VRM, press the button for about 2 seconds.VRM1OFFVRM2OFFDistance
ED 3100 G 110 / 02 (2011-10)Operating InstructionsA-5 RADAR Sidebar - Permanent AreaA RADAR.fm / 10.11.11 A-49NACOS Platinum5.3.3 Operating VRM and EBL jointlyTwo sets of EBL and VRM can be operatedjointly without influencing each other.They are displayed with differing colours.EBL1 and VRM1 are combined in onetoolset, as well as EBL2 and VRM2.The activation of EBL1 also activates VRM1if both are in the switched on state. Toactivate the joined setting click on theintersection of EBL and VRM. Both objectsget the small "handles" and can be oper-ated. Additionally, the intersection pointbetween VRM and EBL is marked and canbe used to alter bearing and range simul-taneously.The origin of the EBL and the VRM can bechanged simultaneously by clicking andpulling their origin. To re-center the combined EBL and VRM,switch the EBL off and on again. Switchingoff the EBL only recenters the VRM.Re-centering of the EBL (and VRM if joined) can also be done by the context menuin the application area. Right-click in the PPI and choose Center EBLx.
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 110 / 02 (2011-10)Operating InstructionsA-5 RADAR Sidebar - Permanent Area A RADAR.fm / 10.11.11A-505.4 Parallel Index Lines (PI)There are 4 independent Parallel Index Lines available.Depending on the setting in the PI group, the bearing is displayed astrue (T) or relative (REL) bearing☞ When parallel index lines are switched on, they appear in the form in which they were set last. Ifthe display range has been reduced in the meantime, they might be situated outside the visiblerange. In order to make the lines visible again without changing the range, the context menu canbe used. See description on next page for details.The four parallel index lines can be adjusted individually. The picture shows two of them.After switch-on by means of a click in thePI group, the lines are superimposed inthe PPI. They appear with the same dataas they have been displayed last time. In order to alter the distance of a line, clickon it. The line is now displayed with asmall "handle". Click and hold the handleand drag the line to the desired distance.
ED 3100 G 110 / 02 (2011-10)Operating InstructionsA-5 RADAR Sidebar - Permanent AreaA RADAR.fm / 10.11.11 A-51NACOS PlatinumIn order to change the bearing of the line,click on it. Then click and hold the lineanywhere but not on the small handle androtate it to the desired bearing.The balloon-text shows the actual bearingand distance data of the line.To reset the PI lines to the default state, right-click in the PPI and choose ResetPI lines in the context menu. The lines are set to 45° and 25% or 50% of thedisplay range to both sides of the PPI-center.The PI can also be switched on or selected by means of the radar keyboard. Pressthe key for a short time. The PI are switched on in numerical order, starting with the one thathad been used last. To switch off a specific PI, use the checkboxes 1...4 in the PI group orselect the specific PI with a short keypress on the PI-button and then switch off by pressing itfor about 2 seconds.Depending on the system configuration, the Non-permanent Area of the radar may not show every objectdescribed in this part. For example, if there is no Trackpilot in the system, the appropriate expander isnot shown. Anyway, every possible expander will be described here.In order to save space, a number of expanders have been combined into groups contained in three indexcards: Alarms, Presentation, Tools and Settings:PIOFF
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 110 / 02 (2011-10)Operating InstructionsA-5 RADAR Sidebar - Permanent Area A RADAR.fm / 10.11.11A-52
ED 3100 G 110 / 02 (2011-10)Operating InstructionsA-6 RADAR Sidebar - Non-Permanent AreaA RADAR.fm / 10.11.11 A-53NACOS Platinum6 RADAR Sidebar - Non-Permanent AreaFig. A / 11 RADAR Sidebar of the Non-Permanent Area- The Alarm line shows the oldest not acknowledged alarm of highest priority and provides alarmmanagement- The Alarm expander includes the alarm list and alarm settings for the ECDIS sub-system.- The Trackpilot expander provides indications and control elements for the heading control andautomatic track keeping system- The ENC expander provides settings for the visualisation of the electronic chart (ENC)- The Display expander provides target, route and own ship settings and allows setting of usersymbols into electronic chart- The Target expander provides the target list, the data of the most critical target and the AISmesage handling- The Routes expander provides utilities for route planning, route management and route/display.- The Settings expander contains different parameters for the setting of AIS and ARPA targets, theautomatic target acquisition and route display settings.
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 110 / 02 (2011-10)Operating InstructionsA-6 RADAR Sidebar - Non-Permanent Area A RADAR.fm / 10.11.11A-54
ED 3100 G 110 / 02 (2011-10)Operating InstructionsA-7 Target HandlingA RADAR.fm / 10.11.11 A-55NACOS Platinum7 Target Handling
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 110 / 02 (2011-10)Operating InstructionsA-7 Target Handling A RADAR.fm / 10.11.11A-567.1 OverviewTwo types of targets can be handled on the radar, ARPA targets and AIS targets. For the targets, theAIS electronics unit and the ARPA electronics of the radar are two independent sensors whose displaysand operating procedures take place on one and the same MFD. The two sensors deliver data independ-ently, the data of both sensors are used for the collision avoidance computation, which takes place inthe background of all actions. It can raise alarms, for instance if objects are on collision course.☞ A radar echo that is supposed to be taken in account is called an acquired target.☞ An AIS target that is supposed to be taken in account is called an activated target.Targets can be acquired/activated manually using the GUI or automatically by the system. This chapterfirst gives an overview of types of targets and their treatment in the system. If neccessary, cross refer-ences to manual/automatic target acquisition are noted.ARPA TargetsARPA targets are acquired or tracked radar echoes received from the selected transceiver. They can betracked from a distance near 0 NM depending on antenna height and the target´s ship structure up to 24 NMirrespective of the range scale in use. Before a radar echo can be used as ARPA target, its echo is evalu-ated by the ARPA electronics during a number of antenna revolutions. ARPA targets can be of thefollowing kind:Table A / 10 Symbols of ARPA Targets in RADARSee the chapters below for further information.ARPA targetsA radar echo on the PPI. It is displayed as a green bunch of pixelsA radar echo that has been acquired manually and that is under evalu-ation nowA radar echo that has been acquired automatically by the examination of the radar video in an acquisition/guard zone.An acquired target that is tracked by the ARPA electronics. Its past posi-tions and speed/direction vector can be shownA tracked target, which is selected and whose data are marked in the target listARPA targets may have an ID 1) displayed on the bottom right of the symbol. The ID consist of a consecutive number generated by the system preceded by the selected transceiver number.1) ID is used as a shortcut for (target) identifier in these operating instructions.Lost Target. If any of the abovementioned targets gets lost, a flashing cross is superimposed above the target symbol.flashing,red1 04flashing,red 1 04
ED 3100 G 110 / 02 (2011-10)Operating InstructionsA-7 Target HandlingA RADAR.fm / 10.11.11 A-57NACOS PlatinumAIS TargetsAIS targets are all targets whose data are received by the AIS electronics unit connected to the system.All AIS targets are visible per default after switch-on of the MFD. ☞ The display of groups of AIS targets (Class A, Class B , All) may be switched on and off by theoperator. Select All if you want to see all targets received from the AIS electronics unit.AIS targets can be of the following kind:Table A / 11 Symbols of AIS TargetsTarget FusionDue to the fact that an AIS target within the radar range normally also produces aradar echo, the symbols of tracked and activated targets are displayed close to eachother:In this case, it is possible to decide whether the object is to be treated as an AIStarget or as an ARPA target. See chapter 3.5.1 on page III-59 for details. In terms ofan improved display readability and avoidance of cluttering the screen, the objects canbe fusioned if they meet some boundary conditions. That means, that they can bedisplayed only as either AIS or as ARPA target depending on user selection. Seechapter 7.7 on page A-65 for details on Target Fusion.☞ The number of ARPA and AIS targets being tracked should be kept as small as possible; the pres-ence of too many targets causes confusion on the screen and distracts the operator's attention fromwhat is really important. Targets that are no longer relevant should be deleted (RADAR) or deacti-vated (AIS). AIS targetsA sleeping AIS target is a target that is displayed in the PPI. Its data are evaluated and can be shown on demand.A manually activated AIS target is displayed with detailed data such as HDG, true scaled outline (if available in the received data set and the PPI scale is large enough), ROT indicator, past positions and speed/direction vector can be shownAn automatically activated target by the collision avoidance computation or by a acquisition/guard zoneAn activated AIS target, which is selected and whose data are marked in the target listAIS targets may have an ID displayed on the bottom right of the symbol. The ID consists of the callsign or the ships name or the MMSI depending on the settings in the target presentation menu.Lost Target. If any of the above mentioned targets gets lost, a flashing cross is superimposed above the target symbol.For AIS targets the lost target alarm can be switched off in the Target settings.flashing,redBXGHE MS Hamburgflashing,red
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 110 / 02 (2011-10)Operating InstructionsA-7 Target Handling A RADAR.fm / 10.11.11A-58☞ In the case of tracked targets entering a clutter area (rain or sea clutter), a "target swap" mightoccur; parts of the rain front can suddenly be "tracked". A target swap can also occur if there aretargets situated close to each other or close to land. In the case of target swaps, no warning isgiven.
ED 3100 G 110 / 02 (2011-10)Operating InstructionsA-7 Target HandlingA RADAR.fm / 10.11.11 A-59NACOS Platinum7.2 Manual Target AcquisitionAcquiring a target with DOMove the pointer on top of the desired object. The pointer then becomes a hand or a gun sitesymbol . This depends on the object underneath the pointer:Table A / 12 Manual Target AcquisitionAcquiring/Deleting a target with MOREClicking on the target symbol with MORE opens the contextmenu. Choose Target and select- Deselect in order to stop the accentuation of thistarget in the target list.☞ It is not neccessary to Deselect a target beforeanother target can be selected, in fact it is possible tochange the selection of targets by just clicking themwith DO.- Cancel ARPA to stop tracking the object as ARPAtarget- Cancel AIS to stop tracking the object as AIS target,making it a sleeping target- Cancel All to stop tracking for all targets, all activatedAIS targets become sleeping targets- Acquire ARPA to force a radar echo to be tracked as ARPA target- Reverse Fusion to make a fusioned target that is handled as AIS target become an ARPA targetand vice-versaPointer becomes a hand a gun sightObject is not clearly identifiable, it could be an AIS target or a radar echo clearly identifiable, it is a single AIS target or a single radar echoreason AIS target and radar echo appear on the same position or are fusionedthe object is an AIS target with no radar echo (transceiver off or bad radar conditions) or the object is a radar echo that carries no AISindication after click with DOmake the choice...AIS target acti-vated radar echo with activated ARPA functionAIS target acti-vated radar echo with activated ARPA function
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 110 / 02 (2011-10)Operating InstructionsA-7 Target Handling A RADAR.fm / 10.11.11A-607.3 Manual Target SelectionAn activated AIS target as well as an acquired or tracked ARPA target canbe selected. Then, its data are marked in the target list. To do so, click onthe activated AIS target or the acquired ARPA target with DO. The targetwill be marked with a broken frame and its data are marked in the targetlist with blue color. Only one target can be selected at a time on the PPIor in the list.Fig. A / 12 Data of the Selected TargetSee chapter 7.10 on page A-68 for details about the target list.ARPA AISSelected targetsData of a selected target accentuated in the list
ED 3100 G 110 / 02 (2011-10)Operating InstructionsA-7 Target HandlingA RADAR.fm / 10.11.11 A-61NACOS Platinum7.4 Automatic Target Acquisition ARPA targets can be acquired automatically, sleeping AIS targets can be activated automatically as well.There are two possibilities to acquire/activate targets automatically:By means of the collision avoidance computation for dangerous AIS targets- The collision avoidance computation observes every AIS target whose data are received continu-ously. For any of those targets, the closest point of approach (CPA) and the time until the CPA isreached (TCPA) are computed and compared with operator-defined limits. If the CPA and TCPAvalues of a target fall short of the limits, the target is activated (AIS) and the Dangerous Targetalarm is raised. See also nest chapter for details.By means of the acquisition/guard zones for radar and AIS targets- Two of those zones can be switched on in order to perform automatic target acquisition/activationof ARPA and AIS targets. Any radar echo and AIS target that enters one of the zones will beacquired/activated and an alarm is raised.Automatic target acquisition and tracking are ensured only if the radar video is OK, i.e. if it is adjusted in the same way as would also be necessary for visual evaluation.Under particularly unfavourable meteorological conditions, it can happen even with an optimum setting of the radar that targets in the radar video cannot be detected automat-ically.Settings for collision avoidance computa-tion, i.e. Dangerous TargetsSettings for Acquisi-tion/Guard Zones
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 110 / 02 (2011-10)Operating InstructionsA-7 Target Handling A RADAR.fm / 10.11.11A-627.5 Settings for Dangerous TargetsDangerous Targets OnWith this function activated, targets tracked by the ARPA and also AIStargets can automatically be marked as dangerous targets by the auto-matic collision avoidance computation if their CPA/TCPA data fall short ofthe limits set in the Limits group. As a result, - the Dangerous Target alarm appears,- the target which has caused the alarm is indicated on the PPI bymeans of the flashing symbol or ; if a sleeping AIStarget has caused the alarm, that target is automatically activatedbeforehand. The flashing of the symbol stops after the alarm Dangerous Target for the appro-priate target has been acknowledged. The alarm is kept in the alarm list as long as one dangeroustarget is present.Auto Acquire AIS TargetsIn particular cases, it might be required to prevent AIS targets from being acquired by the collision avoid-ance computation, for example to avoid unnecessary alarms in port or at other berths caused by toomany AIS targets. In this case the checkbox AUTO ACQ AIS Targets must be cleared.☞ As long as AUTO ACQ AIS Targets is activated, even sleeping targets not being selected for displayare reckognized as Dangerous targets automatically. See chapter 3.5.2 on page III-60 for details.Limits-CPAThe limit for the distance to the closest point of approach of a target can be set here.If a target gets closer then the set limit, it is automatically marked as dangeroustarget and the alarm Dangerous Target is raised.Limits TCPAThe limit for the time to closest point of approach of a target can be set here. If the TCPA of a targetgets shorter then the set limit, it is automatically marked as dangerous target and the alarm DangerousTarget is raised.
ED 3100 G 110 / 02 (2011-10)Operating InstructionsA-7 Target HandlingA RADAR.fm / 10.11.11 A-63NACOS PlatinumPrerequisites for the Collision Avoidance Computation in case of AIS TargetsThe collision avoidance computation can be performed only if the relative speed between own ship andthe target is known. This must be determined from the speed vector over ground (COG, SOG) receivedfrom the AIS target and from the own speed vector over ground. The own speed vector over ground ismainly determined from the Bottom Track data of the selected speed sensor; otherwise, it is deter-mined with the aid of the COG/SOG of the selected position sensor.If an AIS target is not transmitting COG and SOG, no collision avoidance computation takes place for thistarget. Therefore, the target cannot be acquired automatically. If it is already being tracked, noDangerous Target alarm occurs in the case of a dangerous approach. The symbol of this AIS target isdisplayed dashed.If, because of missing data or caused by sensor selection, the own speed vector over ground cannot bedetermined, then for all AIS targets the collision avoidance computation and the Dangerous Targetalarm does not take place. The symbols of all AIS targets are then displayed dashed. Three minutes afterthe occurrence of this situation, the AIS No CPA Alarm, SOG Lost alarm appears
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 110 / 02 (2011-10)Operating InstructionsA-7 Target Handling A RADAR.fm / 10.11.11A-647.6 Settings for Acquisition/Guard ZonesIn the case of automatic target acquisition by means of acquisition/guard zones, the radar evaluates allradar echoes and sleeping AIS targets appearing in the acquisition/guard zones.If the radar echo appears at a certain position at least six times during ten revolutions of the antenna,it is evaluated as an ARPA target. If the echoes do not belong to a target already being tracked, theposition is treated as an acquired target and is marked with the flashing symbol . The TargetAuto-Acquired alarm appears, or - if the target has already been tracked when it entered the acquisi-tion/guard zone - the Target Entered Guardzone alarm appears. After acknowledgement of the alarm,the automatic target tracking begins.If a sleeping AIS target enters the region of a switched-on acquisition/guard zone, it is activated auto-matically, afterwards- it is marked with the flashing symbol or if the function AIS True Scaled Outline is activatedthe AIS target can be shown with the true scaled outlines -the Target Auto Acquired alarm appears, or - if the target has already been active when itentered the acquisition/guard zone - the Target Entered Guardzone alarm appears.If there are already 95% of the maximum number of ARPA targets or 95% of the maximum number ofAIS targets being tracked or acquired, the Check ARPA/AIS Target Capacity warning appears. In thiscase, at least one unimportant target must first be deleted before another target can be acquired.If there are already 100% of the maximum number of ARPA targets or 100% of the maximum numberof AIS targets being tracked or acquired, the ARPA/AIS Target Capacity Exceeded alarm appears.In this case, at least one unimportant target must first be deleted before another target can be acquired.Two independent acquisistion/guard zones can be switched on inorder to acquire targets automatically.The acquisition/guard zoneis switched on and off by checking the controls Zone 1 or Zone 2.☞ If the acquisition/guard zone is switched off, automatic targetacquisition does not take place any longer. Targets alreadybeing acquired or activated will be tracked further on.Setting the Range of the Acquisition/Guard ZoneExample shown for Guard Zone 1: Click onthe arc that defines the acquisition/guardzone and use the small handle to drag thezone to the desired size.☞ The outer limit can be set to a rangevalue between 1.5 NM and 20 NM.Setting the Angle of the Acquisition/Guard ZoneClick on the angle line that defines the acqui-sition/guard zone and use the small handle todrag the zone to the desired angle.☞ The angle can be set to a value between 5° and 360°. The setting takes place relative to theheading direction, i.e. the acquisition/guard zone turns with the ship’s heading.Handles
ED 3100 G 110 / 02 (2011-10)Operating InstructionsA-7 Target HandlingA RADAR.fm / 10.11.11 A-65NACOS Platinum7.7 Target FusionAn ARPA target and an AIS symbol may represent the same object. In orderto determine if this is the fact, ARPA and AIS data for distance, speed andcourse are compared. If the difference in data are within pre-set limits, thetargets will be associated if this function is activated. In this case, only oneof the symbols is shown. Anyway, both targets will be continuously tracked.The blanked-out symbol will appear again automatically if the differences indata exceed the pre-set limits.The limits required for this function are set here.It is possible to define the priority for showing an object asARPA or AIS targets for the case that target fusion is active fora tracked target. This means that one of the symbols can besuppressed on the PPI. See chapter 3.5.1 on page III-59 fordetails. Additionally, it can be defined for a single selectedtarget on the PPI to show the suppressed symbol for a limitedperiod of time. For this purpose click on Reverse Fusion in theTarget context menu in the PPI.Fusion DistanceIf the distance is less than the set limit, the ARPA and AIS target are displayedas one target.Fusion CourseIf the course difference is less than the set limit, the ARPA and AIS target aredisplayed as one target.Fusion SpeedIf the speed difference is less than the set limit, the ARPA and AIS target aredisplayed as one target..
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 110 / 02 (2011-10)Operating InstructionsA-7 Target Handling A RADAR.fm / 10.11.11A-667.8 Deletion and Loss of TargetsLoss of TargetsAn ARPA target is tracked automatically until- it is deleted manually or- it leaves the target tracking range of 24 NM or- it is lost within the target tracking range of 24 NM.An ARPA target is lost if, during five revolutions of the antenna, no correlation of the video can be foundby the radar, or the detection probability falls below 50%.An AIS target is tracked automatically until- it is deleted manually or- it is lost.A tracked AIS target is lost if the AIS electronics unit does not receive any more signals from that targetwithin the specified time 1).Deletion of a TargetClick on the target with the MORE key, and then choose thetarget type from the context menu and click on the desiredaction with the DO key.☞ If an AIS target is deleted which is also tracked in thebackground as an ARPA target (See chapter 7.7 onpage A-65), the hidden ARPA symbol re-appears. If itis to be deleted also, the process must be repeated forthe ARPA target. ☞ This procedure also works vice-versa: If an ARPAtarget being tracked as AIS is deleted, the hidden AISsymbol re-appears.☞ For information about automatic target acquisition See chapter 7.4 on page A-611) The receive timeout is dependent on the navigation state and the speed of the AIS target.
ED 3100 G 110 / 02 (2011-10)Operating InstructionsA-7 Target HandlingA RADAR.fm / 10.11.11 A-67NACOS Platinum7.9 Critical TargetThis group shows the most important data of the NextCritical target in the vicinity. It can be selected whichcriterion determines the most critical target. The dataare updated every second.TypeIn this list, the criterion for automatic ranking of the most critical target is selected. The mostdangerous target is always the one that has the closest distance to the own ship or theshortest time until a dangerous situation could take place. See below for the meaning of theabbreviations.NameDisplays the Name of the target, if available in the received data.CPAThe designation Closest Point of Approach means the minimum distance between the own ship and thetarget at the closest point of approach.TCPAThe Time to Closest Point of Approach means the time until the CPA is reached.BCRThe Bow Crossing Range means the distance between the own ship and the target when the targetcrosses the heading line of the own ship.BCTThe Bow Crossing Time means the time that will pass until the target crosses the heading line of theown ship.
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 110 / 02 (2011-10)Operating InstructionsA-7 Target Handling A RADAR.fm / 10.11.11A-687.10 Target ListFig. A / 13 The Target ListAdditionally to the next critical (i.e. most dangerous target), a list of all targets available in the system 1)can be displayed. The columns of the displayed table are self-explanatory, they can be sorted ascendingor descending by clicking on the appropriate title of the column. Sorting takes place in the instant of theclick, afterwards the sequence of the entries remains static, even if the values of the sort criterionchange.If the pointer is moved on the depiction Capacity, an infor-mation is displayed showing the percentage of memory usagefor targets. If 95% of the maximum capacity is reached, anindication is given. If the maximum capacity is exceeded, analarm is given.Maximum number of targets:Table A / 13 Maximum Number of Targets1) The list includes all tracked ARPA targets and all AIS targets selected for continuous display. See chapter 3.5.2on page III-60. The most important target data can also be assessed directly in the PPI by holding the cursor onthe target symbol. See chapter 7.2 on page A-59 for details.Type of Target Maximum NumberARPA 40AIS Activated 40AIS Sleeping > 200
ED 3100 G 110 / 02 (2011-10)Operating InstructionsA-7 Target HandlingA RADAR.fm / 10.11.11 A-69NACOS PlatinumIf, in the PPI a target is selected whose data is to be displayed in the list, the target´s data are accen-tuated with blue color, possibly the list must be scrolled in order to find the marked line.:Fig. A / 14 Marked TargetShow detailsIn order to display detailed data of the target (especially AIS targets), activate the Show Detailscontrol. The small windows underneath the marked data row will display more target data as availablein the received data set.Fig. A / 15 Target Details
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 110 / 02 (2011-10)Operating InstructionsA-7 Target Handling A RADAR.fm / 10.11.11A-707.11 Target DisplayThe Target Display tabshows information howthe symbols aredisplayed on the radarand allows to set thesystem´s behaviour interms of displaying thesymbols.The Display tab is divided into 2 groups:- Target Presentation- Own Ship PresentationTarget PresentationFor the targets, the AIS electronicsunit and the ARPA electronics of theradar are two independent sensorswhose display functions and operatingprocedures take place on one and thesame radar indicator.Labels:- ARPAThe target data received by the ARPA electronics of the radar can bedisplayed with labels consisting of the transceiver number selected forthe MFD and the and target number.- AISThe target data received by the AIS electronics unit can be displayedwith labels as selected under AIS Type.- AIS Type- MMSI Number: Maritime Mobile Service Identity, definiteidentification of the AIS system (and hence of the target).- Call Sign: The call sign of the target.- Ship Name: Name of the target ship.Outline:- AIS True Scaled OutlineIn case that the AIS target delivers its ship dimensions, it is possible toshow/hide the true scaled outlines together with the AIS symbol. This is only possible if the selectedtarget reports the heading information and the beam of the target symbol in the PPI exceeds 7.5mm.Transceiver Number Target Number
ED 3100 G 110 / 02 (2011-10)Operating InstructionsA-7 Target HandlingA RADAR.fm / 10.11.11 A-71NACOS PlatinumSymbols: Standard / Largeit can be selected to show Standard or Large AIS and ARPA target symbols.Show Aids to NavigationAids-to-Navigation are virtual navigation marks which are reported by the AIS system. For theirdisplay, the same symbols are used as for the electronic chart of type ENC. In addition, they aremarked by means of a blue circle having its centre at the position of the Aid-to-Navigation.Own Ship PresentationMinimized SymbolThe minimized own ship symbol consists of the Heading line and the Beam linesurrounded by two concentric circles.True Scaled OutlineIn the smaller ranges 1) it is also possible to show the own ship trueto scale with length and beam size parameters as stored in the shipconfiguration data. The True Scaled Outline cannot be displayed inlarger ranges.- Hide if Beam Size < 3 / 6 mmHides the True Scaled Outline of the own ship on the PPI ifthe beam size is displayed smaller than 3 / 6 mm.Select 3mm if you want to see the true scaled ship in the largerranges also.Stern LineThis extension of the heading line in the backward direction isdisplayed as far as the edge of the PPI and can be switched on ifnecessary.Vector, Plots and PredictionDepending on the settings in the permanent area the own speed vector, a path prediction and the pastposition plot can additionally be displayed together with the own ship symbol. See chapter 3.3 on pageIII-49 for details. Settings for vectors, trails and plots made there are also valid for the presentation oftargets.1) Normally (depending on the size of the ship) 1.5 or 0.75 NM and below, if 3mm is selected.Minimized symbolBeam sizeShip symbol with true scaled outlineStern line
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 110 / 02 (2011-10)Operating InstructionsA-7 Target Handling A RADAR.fm / 10.11.11A-727.12 Trial ManoeuvreTrial manoeuvres are needed mainly for collision avoidance. In this process, a planned manoeuvre of theown ship is simulated and the effect of this manoeuvre on the targets being tracked or plotted can bechecked in the PPI or in the chart area. Before starting the manoeuvre simulation the present values for heading, course and speed as well asthe complete currently valid target scenario is taken as a start point 1).The trial manoeuvre can be specified in an associated dialog by- simulation of a course change, including the radius to be usedby the ship during the manoeuvre,- the period of time up until the beginning of the simulatedmanoeuvre (the Delay) and by- simulation of a speed change at the instant of the manoeuvre.The simulation itself is started when the Time bar at the bottomof the dialog is operated.There are two vector modes available, the Relative and the TrueTrial Manoeuvre:- The manoeuvre can be observed with relative or true vectors. As during normal operation, thevector mode is to be set in the Vector & Trails group. This setting will also have an effect on thetrails and the past position plots before the manoeuvre function is started.- In both of the vector modes, the manoeuvre radius that can be set and the acceleration 2) for theset speed-changes are taken into account additionally to the planned course change.- At any time before or during the simulation, you can change between T and REL manoeuvre vectormode, without changing other simulation parameters.☞ The target tracking / plotting and the manual and automatic target acquisition are not interruptedduring the execution of a manoeuvre, but no new sleeping AIS targets can be activated manually.This means also that the target list under Tools > Targets > List at all times displays the currentlyvalid data of the target tracking process and not the trial manoeuvre data.☞ Contrary to targets already being tracked by the ARPA, radar targets which are in the state of"under evaluation" (i.e. being in "acquisition status) will not be taken into account for the trialmanoeuvre.☞ As long as the Trial Manoeuvre is active, the Dangerous Targets function (ARPA and AIS) is auto-matically On, independently of the settings under Settings > Targets > Dangerous Targetsand AUTO ACQ AIS Targets respectively.☞ It is recommended to use the trial manoeuvre function in relative vector mode in order to evaluatethe change of the relative target data first. If the true vectors are used, it is recommended to select a speed sensor with water stabilisation(Set the stabilisation ,REF to Water in the Vector & Trails group).1) Start values for own ship's heading, course and speed are taken from the values shown in the sensor displayson the permanent area. The course and speed data are depending on the selection of the CCRP.2) The min. and max. radius and the acceleration behaviour of the ship are entered at service level during setting-to-work.
ED 3100 G 110 / 02 (2011-10)Operating InstructionsA-7 Target HandlingA RADAR.fm / 10.11.11 A-73NACOS PlatinumSwitching On the Trial Manoeuvre Dialog in REL Vector Mode- Switch to REL in the Vector &Trails group on the permanentarea.- In the Targets group choose On for the Trial control. In the Non-permanent area, the Trial Manoeuvre dialog windowappears, with the following data:- Course: The currently existing course (the course is changedwhen the ship is turning) 1)- Speed: The currently existing speed (the value is constantand taken as start speed) 1)- Radius: The radius with which the manoeuvre is to be simu-lated. If the dialog has not been used before, the minimumradius is displayed, otherwise it shows the last used radius.- Delay: 0 minutes. Can be set for simulation of a delayed start of the manoeuvre.- Time: 0 minutes. Must be set for simulation of the time instances during the manoeuvre.The following changes occur in the PPI or chart area after activation of the trial manoeuvre function 2):- In the lower region of the application area a large symbol is shown to draw the operator's atten-tion to the fact that the trial manoeuvre display is switched on and that after starting the simulationby changing the time slider, consequently the symbols and vectors of the targets are no longerdisplayed in accordance with the real situation that actually exists at that time.- The vector display (of the targets) must be switched on during observation of the manoeuvre.- The vectors and the video trails (if any exist), are displayed relative and- the own ship is shown without vector but always with the correct present heading line.- Past position plots are not displayed during the trial manoeuvre, but (if Plot is in the switched onstate) they are continuously built up in the back-ground and are visible again as soon as the trialmanoeuvre is ended.☞ Because the currently existing values were taken over, no manoeuvre has been simulated yet. Aslong as the Time bar remains at zero position the display content is still corresponding to the realsituation.Setting the Trial Manoeuvre in REL Vector ModeIn case the vector display during the trial manoeuvre is a relative display, a collision course can be recog-nised from the fact that the vector of a target is pointing towards the own ship symbol (constantbearing). A manoeuvre of your own ship must be simulated which avoids this constant bearing while atthe same time fulfilling other conditions (e.g. keeping within the channel, avoiding shallow water andobstructions, avoiding other ships, etc.).1) The resultant value used for the display of the own ship speed vector during simulation2) The radar video and the true or relative target trails are updated as normal and are not influenced by themanoeuvre simulation.
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 110 / 02 (2011-10)Operating InstructionsA-7 Target Handling A RADAR.fm / 10.11.11A-74Depending on the used display range a suitable vector length should be set so that the results of thetrial manoeuvre are clearly visible.Fig. A / 16 Vector Display in Trial Manoeuvre Mode☞ The general screen-stabilisation and the alignment of the heading line may remain unchanged, orcan be set by the operator as required. With other words, the Trial Manoeuvre can be observed inTrue or Relative Motion and in Head Up, North Up or Course up orientation.Simulating a Course ManoeuvreUse the Course and Radius slider to set the desired amount ofcourse change and the radius with which the manoeuvre is to besimulated.☞ During adjustment, the simulated course change is displayed inform of a curved headline. A change of max. +/- 180° relativeto your present course can be simulated. The heading and thepresent course is updated automatically if your ship is turningduring the manoeuvre simulation.After course and radius have been set, use the Time slider to simu-late your ship sailing along the pre-planned course change. All displayed targets will move accordinglywith their current speed and course and the change of their relative vectors will show the further devel-opment of the scenario step by step. The time setting can be done continuously by moving the slider or (by clicking) stepwise in 10 sec incre-ments up to 30 min complete duration.☞ Because of the REL Vector Mode, the relative speed vectors are rotated and change their length bythe simulated course-change. If one of the targets will change its status from dangerous to notdangerous and vice versa, this will be shown by a change of their symbol's colour.Display before switch-on of the trial manoeuvre (with true vector display and past position plots)Display after switch-on of the (relative) trial manoeuvre (the target on the right is on a collision course)Trails are relativeTargets get relative vectorsIdentification marking of trial manoeuvre displayPast position plots are no longer displayed
ED 3100 G 110 / 02 (2011-10)Operating InstructionsA-7 Target HandlingA RADAR.fm / 10.11.11 A-75NACOS PlatinumAlso during the trial manoeuvre the collision calculations 1) take place, which would indicate a dangeroustarget symbol in red colour as soon as the anti-collision limits are infringed.Setting the Delay of the Simulated ManoeuvreUse the Delay slider to set the time that is to pass before the simulated manoeuvre begins.☞ The future situation at the point in time defined by the delay value is now displayed in form of amodified own ship track line ahead (along the present course direction) and the previously definedcourse change is shown at a distance ahead, calculated from the present speed and the delay time.The manoeuvre simulation itself must be controlled as described above with a movement of the Timeslider or clicking into the Time bar.Fig. A / 17 Delay in Trial ManoeuvreIf no suitable manoeuvre can be found by means of these two settings, a speed change must be simu-lated:Simulation of a Speed ChangeUse the Speed slider to set the speed at which the ship is to travel from the beginning of the simulatedmanoeuvre onwards.☞ Because of the REL Vector Mode, the simulated course-change causes a change in the directionsand lengths of the target´s speed vectors.Rules for the Avoidance of Collision Courses:1. There must be no speed vector of any of the targets pointing towards the own ship symbol of thetrial manoeuvre.2. All manoeuvres and parameter settings must take place in accordance with the collision avoidancerules and good seamanship.1) The collision calculations of the trial manoeuvre simulation implement the same alarm limits for CPA and TCPA asset for the normal target tracking in the Dangerous Targets group of the Settings > Targets menu.Relative display after setting of a trial manoeuvre which would prevent a collisionDistance up until the trial manoeuvre, as selected with DelayNo risk of collision (vector shows suffi-ciently large passing distance from the trial manoeuvre posi-tion) Trial manoeuvre start positionTrails are updated in relative modeHeading lines and orientation of AIS targets remain unchangedSymbols moved and vectors changed in the simulation of the course change manoeuvre.Radius that is set for the trial manoeuvreThe present own ship position
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 110 / 02 (2011-10)Operating InstructionsA-7 Target Handling A RADAR.fm / 10.11.11A-76Checking the Trial Manoeuvre in True Vector ModeIn True Vector Mode, the trial manoeuvre is displayed with true vectors for the targets and own ship.Both the radius planned for the course change manoeuvre and the acceleration behaviour for the speedchange that is set and the delay are taken into account. All settings made in REL vector Mode can stillbe changed in the True Vector Mode.Switch-On of the True Vector ModeThe switch-over between True and REL Vector Mode is performed in the Vector & Trails group byclicking on the REL or T selection button.☞ It is possible at any time to switch between the two vector modes without any loss of data or infor-mation. In both modes the same state of the manoeuvre is shown on the screen, if no other trialmanoeuvre setting is changed.☞ It is recommended to use the true trial manoeuvre together with a speed sensor giving speedthrough water. This can be selected as in normal operation mode of the system by selecting REFWater instead of REF Ground in the Vector & Trails group. ☞ Whenever it is not sure that the calculated data or the used sensor data are correct and stable, itis recommended to perform the Trial Manoeuvre in REL mode (see above).As a result of the switch-over into True Vector Mode, the following changes occur:- True vectors and true target trails are displayed. Past positions of targets remain invisible as longas the Trial Manoeuvre is running.- Own ship and all targets are shown at their currently existing positions with their true vectors aslong as the Time value is set to 0:00 min.- The trial manoeuvre line is displayed. It represents the track on which the ship would perform thesimulated manoeuvre. The Radius displayed in the manoeuvre dialog is taken into account forcalculation of the course change.The simulated manoeuvre-settings can now be changed in the same way as described above for the rela-tive manoeuvre mode:Use the Course, Speed, Radius or Delay slider to set the desired parameters with which themanoeuvre is to be simulated and move the Time slider to see the future development of the scenario.Checking the Trial ManoeuvreBy means of Time, the instant of time that is to be considered can be set: - Click on the Time bar slider and, with the trackball, vary the time instant that is to be displayed- or -- click before the slider to produce 10 sec time increments stepwise.By continuous variation, a synchronised display of the simulated own ship positions and target positionstakes place. If, for all time values, an adequate distance between own ship symbol and the target symbolis displayed, the trial manoeuvre will not show a dangerous approach.Also during the true trial manoeuvre the collision calculations 1) take place, which would indicate adangerous target symbol in red colour as soon as the anti-collision limits are infringed.If necessary, any of the trial manoeuvre settings can now be changed and the check can be repeated.1) The collision calculations of the trial manoeuvre simulation implement the same alarm limits for CPA and TCPA asset for the normal target tracking in the Dangerous Targets group of the Settings > Targets menu.
ED 3100 G 110 / 02 (2011-10)Operating InstructionsA-7 Target HandlingA RADAR.fm / 10.11.11 A-77NACOS PlatinumFig. A / 18 Checking the Trial ManoeuvreSwitching Off the Trial Manoeuvre DisplaySwitching off is performed by pressing the Close icon of theTrial Manoeuvre dialog window.The trial manoeuvre can also be switched off in the Targetsgroup on the permanent area by selecting Trial Off.Display after switch-over to True Vector ModeRadius that is set for the trial manoeuvreCheck by variation of the Time inputRadius that is set for the trial manoeuvreThe present own position (own ship symbol and true vector)Trial manoeuvre line defined by courseFuture positions after the time entered with the Time sliderDelay DelayTrails are updated in True mode
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 110 / 02 (2011-10)Operating InstructionsA-7 Target Handling A RADAR.fm / 10.11.11A-787.13 Reference Target TrackingIf at least one fixed ARPA target 1) is selected as a reference target, the radar can determine the ownship's speed vector with the aid of this target's relative motion. By means of this "reference targettracking", the radar also acts as a speed sensor, and can be called up as such under REF TGT Speedin the COG/SOG sensor selection menu. It is recommended to use more than one target for own courseand speed calculation in order to create as stable values as possible.The resultant course and speed is calculated by averaging the relative speed data evaluated from allselected reference targets.Selecting a reference target: Click on the fixed ARPA target with the MORE key, and then clickon REF Target On/Off (with the DO key) in the context menu.The first reference target is given an R1 as its target label. Ifthere is more than one reference target defined, all referencetargets are given an independent sequential number in additionto the letter R as prefix.Cancelling the selection: Click on the reference target withthe MORE key, and then click on REF Target On/Off (with theDO key) in the context menu.☞ Up to five reference targets can be selected.☞ The speed input "Reference Target Tracking" is treated asa ground stabilized speed sensor (speed over ground),displayed as COG/SOG data, but it is never used for calcu-lation of relative course and speed of AIS targets (accordingto the IMO rules) 2).☞ The loss of a tracked reference target triggers the LostTarget alarm. See chapter 7.8 on page A-66.If the last reference target is lost, a new speed sensor must be selected. See chapter 3.2.2 on page III-35.If no new speed sensor is selected in time, the Speed Invalid alarm is triggered for the selection ofanother speed sensor by the operator.1) A fixed target is a tracked radar echo of a fixed object like a buoy, a light house, a landmark etc. In the truevector mode, it shows no or a very short vector. If a moving target is selected by mistake, the own speed deter-mined will be incorrect. To ensure accurate determination of speed, several fixed targets should be selected asreferences. AIS targets cannot be selected as reference targets.2) As long as REF TGT Speed is selected as COG/SOG input, the display of relative target data for AIS-targets isomitted.During reference target tracking, it shall be checked repeatedly if the selected reference targets are still displayed as fixed targets. Loss of a tracked reference target may reduce the accuracy of the evaluated own speed and course, whereby the true data of other tracked targets may be deteriorated.
ED 3100 G 110 / 02 (2011-10)Operating InstructionsA-7 Target HandlingA RADAR.fm / 10.11.11 A-79NACOS Platinum7.14 ARPA TrainingBy means of the ARPA function test, the overall performance of the ARPA can be assessed. This shouldbe done periodically.The ARPA Training facility can be activated on the SuperHome page. Beforehand, it must be ensured that a trans-mitter is chosen for use and at least in Stand By mode.See chapter 5.1.1 on page A-38 for details on the trans-ceiver selection.As long as the ARPA Training facility is in use, the radar picture will not show echoes received by the appropriate transceiver.All displayed echoes are artificial. For safety, make sure to keep an eye on another acti-vated transceiver while using ARPA Training.
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 110 / 02 (2011-10)Operating InstructionsA-7 Target Handling A RADAR.fm / 10.11.11A-80The radar picture turns into a spoke-pattern with artificial radar echoes:Fig. A / 19 ARPA Training Display- These echoes can be acquired manually for ARPA tracking. - When the acquisition / guard zone is placed over one or more targets, automatic acquisition musttake place, together with the associated symbols and alarms. The targets must be tracked automat-ically. - All targets travel along with your own ship. Therefore, their true courses and true speeds must bethe same as your own ship's course and speed.It can be observed whether the tracking works correctly. Furthermore, the user can observe the targetgraphics and display of the ARPA data in the appropriate display windows and make himself familiar withthis function.To turn off the ARPA Training facility, navigate to the Super Home page again and click on ARPATraining again.The depiction indicates that this is a simulated picture.
ED 3100 G 110 / 02 (2011-10)Operating InstructionsA-7 Target HandlingA RADAR.fm / 10.11.11 A-81NACOS Platinum7.15 ARPA MalfunctionsThere are a couple of possible reasons for which the ARPA cannot compute the target data correctly. Possible alarm messages:1. Heading sensor fault: Heading Invalid or Heading Timeout2. Magnetron Fault3. No Headmarker4. No Trigger5. No Antenna Azimuth6. No RADAR VideoFor further information regarding the alarms please See chapter 2.2 on page V-11☞ In case that the compass system is faulty, the radar goes immediately into the Head-Up mode. Alldisplay objects and operating possibilities for which the heading information is required are nolonger shown or are inactive. All ARPA and AIS targets are deleted from the screen at once. If theheading sensor failure is not corrected within 30 seconds, all tracking of targets is stopped. Theadditional reasons for the malfunction of the ARPA calculation are listed below.
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 110 / 02 (2011-10)Operating InstructionsA-7 Target Handling A RADAR.fm / 10.11.11A-827.16 AIS MalfunctionsThere are a couple of possible reasons for which the RADAR or the AIS cannot compute or transmit thetarget data correctly: - In case that the compass system is faulty, the RADAR goes immediately into the Head-Up mode andall AIS and ARPA targets are deleted at once on the PPI. The target list for the AIS targets remainsavailable.- If the UHF-Transceiver within the AIS electronics unit does not work correctly, no messages can bereceived and/or transmitted. - In case that the internal GPS receiver within the AIS electronics unit does not work correctly, theposition data of an external position sensor will be used for computation, if an external sensor isconnected to the AIS electronics unit. Anyway, appropriate alarm messages, warnings, or indications will be raised.Possible alarm messages, warnings or indications 1):1. TX Malfunction2. Antenna VSWR exceeds Limit3. Rx Channel n malfunction4. General failure5. MKD connection lost6. External EPFS lost7. No Sensor Position in use8. No valid SOG Information9. No valid COG Information10. Heading lost/invalid11. No valid ROT InformationFor further information regarding these alarms please See chapter 2.2.3 on page V-19See chapter 1 on page F-3 for details on AIS in general.1) The availability of the above mentioned AIS alarms depends on the maker and type of AIS electronics which isconnected to the system.
ED 3100 G 110 / 02 (2011-10)Operating InstructionsA-8 User SymbolsA RADAR.fm / 10.11.11 A-83NACOS Platinum8User Symbols
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 110 / 02 (2011-10)Operating InstructionsA-8 User Symbols A RADAR.fm / 10.11.11A-848.1 SymbolsUser symbols are individual user made chart objects whichcan be inserted into the chart database in order to supple-ment the official electronic charts. The user made symbols of different kind are stored perma-nently in the common databases on all MFD with radar orECDIS functionality. Deletion of selected symbols is theonly method to remove User Symbols from the database.The common database of the User Symbols can be storedon external memory devices like USB-Memory sticks. Seechapter 2.9 on page H-13 for details.The User Symbols panel of the Display expander providesdifferent object categories:- Symbols (position fix, anchorage area, buoys and beacons, lights, landmarks, platforms, radiostations and wrecks etc)- Areas (highlighted danger areas and feature areas)- Lines (safety lines, feature lines and clearing lines)- Events and Text (for free text information and cautions)The following figure shows examples of user symbols:Fig. A / 20 User symbols on the electronic chartSwitching on and off the display of User Symbols: In Presentation > Display > User Sym, or by aMORE click into the PPI(Chart area under Layer > User Symbols)Danger highlight (red)Own safety line (orange; the hatching points towards the unsafe area)Feature area (ochre, brown)Feature line (orange)Text note, information Text note, cautionSymbols (examples)Names and notes are displayed if the display of the Text Labels is switched on
ED 3100 G 110 / 02 (2011-10)Operating InstructionsA-8 User SymbolsA RADAR.fm / 10.11.11 A-85NACOS PlatinumPlacing a symbol - graphic modeWith this method, the user symbol can be placed in the chart/PPI area be means of the trackball/mouse.The procedure is explained here by means of the user-symbol "beacon cardinal". It also works with allother user symbols.Open the User Symbols part of the Display expander and click on the + infront of the desired category.Symbols are so-called point objects which can have several differentattributes.A list of the symbols in the selectedcategory will be shown.Use the vertical scrollbar to see thecomplete list.Choose one symbol and select theappropriate checkbox if the symbolis to have a Topmark or an indica-tion for a Light.☞ Not every symbol can be set to have a topmark or a light.A name for the object and additional information text can be entered in the text boxes.Afterwards, click to highlight the desired symbol icon, move the pointer intothe chart area and click again to drop the symbol at the desired position.The object will be shown with an object abbreviation in front of its name.In the example, by means buoy. If the pointer is moved upon the object,additional information is displayed.Clicking the object with More will display the context menu. Clicking onObject Info will open a new tab that displays detailed informationabout the object which has been created by the operator.
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 110 / 02 (2011-10)Operating InstructionsA-8 User Symbols A RADAR.fm / 10.11.11A-86Placing a symbol - numeric modeWith this method, the user symbol can be placed in the PPI/chart area exactly at a desired position. Theprocedure is explained here by means of the user-symbol "beacon cardinal". It also works with all otheruser symbolsOpen the User Symbols part of the Display expander and click on the + infront of the desired category.After selection and dropping of an object in the PPI/chart area click More to open the context menu, inthe context menu, click on Set Coordinates andenter the desired position in the pop-up window.Click on Set to place the user symbol in the desiredposition.
ED 3100 G 110 / 02 (2011-10)Operating InstructionsA-8 User SymbolsA RADAR.fm / 10.11.11 A-87NACOS PlatinumModification of the Location of existing Symbosl - graphic modeEach stored graphic element (a point symbol, a vertex of a line or area, a text note) has a geographicposition which can easily be changed at any time.- Move the cursor to the symbol or vertex until the Hand cursor is shown, - click on it to select the point,- click and hold the Do key on the selected point - and move the cursor to the wanted position.- Release the Do key to fix and store the new position.Modification of the Location of existing Symbols - numeric mode- Move the cursor to the symbol or vertex until the Hand cursor is shown, - click on it to select the point,- click on it with More to open the context menu,- in the context menu, click on Set Coordinates and enter the desired position of the user symbol- Click on Set to place the user symbol in the desired position.Removing a symbolIn order to remove a User Symbol from the chart and even from the data-base, move the pointer above the symbol so that the pointer becomes asmall hand, then click on the symbol so that it is marked with a smallrectangle.Then right-click the symbol in order to open the context-menu and choose User Symbols and Delete <Symbol> 1)1) <Symbol> is the designation of the symbol selected in the PPI/Chart Area
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 110 / 02 (2011-10)Operating InstructionsA-8 User Symbols A RADAR.fm / 10.11.11A-888.2 AreasEditing of areas is following the same basic princi-ples as shown above for Symbols (graphical pointobjects).In the selection list under Display, User Sym openthe list of available areas by a click on the (+)symbol.Select if you want to create a Danger highlight ora User’s feature by a click on the entry in theselection list. Danger HighlightA Danger Highlight is a red coloured filled area which can be monitored by the ECDIS’ chart monitoringand the route monitoring functions.Click on the Danger highlight icon first, and then click with DO in the PPI/Chart Area to set the firstvertex of the area. The moving cursor is then followed by a connection line to the previously set graphicalpoint of the area. In this way an area with 3 vertex points as a minimum can be set. There is no upperlimitation for the number of points which can be created for one and the same area. To close the area after the last vertex is set, - click into the last connection line with MORE or- set the last point directly on the first oneto end the edit mode and to complete (close) the created area.
ED 3100 G 110 / 02 (2011-10)Operating InstructionsA-8 User SymbolsA RADAR.fm / 10.11.11 A-89NACOS PlatinumRemoving an area is done by graphical selection on the screen by aclick on one of the vertex points of an area. Thehandle shown at the vertex indicates selection of thisarea. A click with MORE on the handle or anywherein the selected area shows the context menu whereyou must select Delete after a click on User Symbols.You have the option to delete one point only tochange the shape (Delete Point) or to delete thecomplete area (Delete: Danger Highlight).Modification of an area is also done via the contextmenu by selecting Continue Area. This creates anew point or a sequence of new points until theModify mode is ended by a MORE click in the PPI/Chart Area. User’s FeatureEditing of Feature Areas is following the same prin-ciples as shown above for Danger Highlights.Several areas with different transparency (No Fill / 25 / 50 / 75 %) can be created and drawn onthe electronic chart. In contrast to the Danger Highlight a Feature Area cannot be monitored by theECDIS’ chart monitoring and route monitoring functions.I.e. a Feature Area is only a display option without connected alert function. Removing and modification of existing Feature Areas is done in the same way as for Danger Highlightsvia the context menu (Delete: User’s Feature / Delete Point / Continue Area).Handle
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 110 / 02 (2011-10)Operating InstructionsA-8 User Symbols A RADAR.fm / 10.11.11A-908.3 LinesEditing of Lines is following the same principles as shown above for Danger Highlight areas.In the selection list under Display, User Symopen the list of available lines by a click on the (+)symbol.Select if you want to create an Own Safety Line,a User’s Feature line or a Clearing Line by a clickon the entry in the selection list.An Own Safety Line is a line with orange colour and with short hachure lines pointing to the dangerousside. It can be monitored by the ECDIS’ chart monitoring and the route monitoring functions. You cancreate several safety lines at different locations each having a variable number of vertex points, but adefined start and a defined end. Click on the Own Safety Line icon first, and thenclick with DO in the PPI/Chart Area to set the firstvertex of the line. The moving cursor is thenfollowed by a connection line to the previously setgraphical point of the line. In this way a line with2 vertex points as a minimum can be set. There isno limitation for the number of points which can becreated. To end the line after the last vertex is set, clickinto the last connection line with MORE to end theedit mode and to complete the created line.The orientation of the own Safety Line (thedangerous / not dangerous side) can be changedby a click on Reverse Own Safety Line User’s Feature LineSeveral line styles with 4 different patterns (solid /dashed / dotted / dashed-dotted) and 1 or 2 pixelsline width can be created and drawn on the elec-tronic chart. In contrast to the Own Safety Line theUser’s Feature Line cannot be monitored by theECDIS’ chart monitoring and route monitoring func-tions.Removing and modification of existing Safety andFeature Lines is done in the same way as shownabove for Areas via selection of the line on thescreen and subsequent operation via the contextmenu by a MORE click on the selected line. You can choose to delete one single point or the completeline.
ED 3100 G 110 / 02 (2011-10)Operating InstructionsA-8 User SymbolsA RADAR.fm / 10.11.11 A-91NACOS PlatinumClearing LineCLearing lines (also called "Danger Bearing") shall indicate a limitation of the course to be steered incertain sea areas. For this purpose a - NMT Not More Than and a - NLT Not Less Than line can be set. Select NMT or NLT and set the line as required. The course value not to be exceeded iscalculated automatically and is indicated together with the line and a direction arrow. The clearing linescan only have two points (start and end point). To delete the line again, click on the start or end pointand then with MORE > User Symbols > Delete: Clearing Line the deletion can be executed.Fig. A / 21 Planned track with Clearing Line (Not More Than 025°)
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 110 / 02 (2011-10)Operating InstructionsA-8 User Symbols A RADAR.fm / 10.11.11A-928.4 Events and TextEditing of Events and Text Notes is another feature of the user object editor. You can drop Events whichhave the symbol and add text to it. Additionally you can drop either a text object as Informationor as Caution . The procedure is identical for both objects.The description for setting, modification and deletion is equivalent to the operation of point symbols, i.e.you must select the relevant entry under User Sym, Events and Text, click on the respective icon, adda text and then click into the PPI/chart area where the text note or the event marker shall be located. After selection and marking by the orange handle you can move the event marker or text note to anotherlocation or delete it from the screen and from the storage device.
ED 3100 G 110 / 02 (2011-10)Operating InstructionsA-9 CHARTRADAR (optional)A RADAR.fm / 10.11.11 A-93NACOS Platinum9 CHARTRADAR (optional)
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 110 / 02 (2011-10)Operating InstructionsA-9 CHARTRADAR (optional) A RADAR.fm / 10.11.11A-949.1 OverviewThe RADARPILOT Platinum can be upgraded withthe CHARTRADAR option. If this option is installed,the drop-down menu in the Charts group of thepermanent area is selectable.Select ENC in order to switch on the ECDIS chart in the background of the radar PPI. Select Off if youwant to switch off the chart presentation permanently.Fig. A / 22 Overview of the CHARTRADAR screenThe above screenshot shows a typical scenario with the own vessel sailing through the English Channel,course 235 deg at 25 kn. The operating of all the radar functions in the permanent area remains as itused to be in RADAR Mode. Also the tabs in the non-permanent area remain as they used to be.Under the tab Presentation the new tab ENC is displayed and can be opened with the Display menufor setting of the chart objects (see chapter A - 9.3 on page A-97) and the Depth menu for setting ofthe depth safety lines in the chart (see chapter A - 9.4 on page A-102). Under the tab Alarms the newmenu ECDIS Alerts is displayed and can beopened for activating i.e. safety contour alarm etc. (seechapter A - 9.8 on page A-107).If the CHARTRADAR option is installed, the SOLAS category of the radar system is extended with thesuffix C as follows:With 22” TFT monitor: CAT 2 CWith 26” TFT monitor: CAT 1 C
ED 3100 G 110 / 02 (2011-10)Operating InstructionsA-9 CHARTRADAR (optional)A RADAR.fm / 10.11.11 A-95NACOS Platinum9.2 Basic Adjustments9.2.1 Temporary Hiding the Chart BackgroundIf ENC is set and the chartpresentation shall be hiddenjust for a few seconds in orderto identify details of the radarimage, just press HideOverlay in the RADAR Videogroup.The result is an empty screenexcept for the radar video.9.2.2 Selection of ChartsThe drop-down menu in the Charts group of thepermanent area provides access to the differentcharts that are installed on your CHARTRADARsystem. Only vector charts are permitted for a char-tradar and only these are selectable. Raster charts(RNC) can not be used. 9.2.3 Matching the Chart with the RADAR PresentationIf the chart underlay is not matching the radar PPI, the user may adjust the position data of the positionfixing device. This function is available from the permanent area in the Position WGS84 group. Fordetails please see chapter III - 3.2.3 on page III-42.9.2.4 References UsedThe CHARTRADAR uses the same reference system for own ship’s position, speed, heading, time, etc.as the RADARPILOT. The common reference point is called Consistent Common Reference Point(CCRP). It can be selected from the drop down menu CCRP in the Display group of the permanentarea (select Conning which is the default, or radar, or tracking). For details please see chapter III - 2.1on page III-16 ff and see chapter III - 3.1.4 on page III-28.For Route Monitoring against ECDIS objects and user objects the CHARTRADAR uses the track controlreference point which is typically at the bow of the vessel. This point is also called the system position.The guard sector (also called look-ahead sector) starts from there. For details please see chapter III -2.1 on page III-16.
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 110 / 02 (2011-10)Operating InstructionsA-9 CHARTRADAR (optional) A RADAR.fm / 10.11.11A-969.2.5 Range Scale and ModesThe CHARTRADAR provides the same range scale as the RADAR from 250 m to 96 nm. The larger scalesof an ECDIS with up to 800 nm are not available. It provides also the same orientation as the RADAR with North Up, Head Up, and Course Up.Further-on it provides also the same screen stabilisation as the RADAR with True and REL Motion. TheBrowse mode which can be found in ECDIS for planning tasks is not available.
ED 3100 G 110 / 02 (2011-10)Operating InstructionsA-9 CHARTRADAR (optional)A RADAR.fm / 10.11.11 A-97NACOS Platinum9.3 Selecting the Objects to be Displayed in the Vector Chart9.3.1 OverviewSymbols, areas, lines and labellings (collectively called objects in the following) are individually storedelectronically in a seperate data base and are displayed in the vector chart. Object classes (completesets of similar objects) are grouped into display groups; for example, the object class RestrictedAreas together with the object class Military Practice Areas and other similar object classes form thedisplay group Cautionary Areas. An appropriate and, at the same time, uncluttered display can beachieved by selecting only those display groups which are required for the actual nautical task. Further-more, for a number of objects (e.g. buoys), there is a choice between two symbol presentations. Irre-spective of this, the number of text labels displayed can be influenced.9.3.2 Categories of Display GroupsIMO has defined three categories for the selection of display groups that are to be shown:- Display Base: Consists of the display groups which, as a minimum requirement, definitely have tobe displayed. They can not be influenced by the user and they are shown all the time. They arenormally not sufficient for safe navigation (only coast lines and obstacles).- Display Standard: Contains the display groups which are normally necessary for voyage planningand voyage monitoring (all standard display groups as shown below)- Display All: Contains above two categories and all other display groups which are available in theelectronic chart For the CHARTRADAR one further category is defined in the IEC 62388 test standard:- Display Primary: The Primary Chart Information Set covers the display base plus fixed andfloating aids to navigation (buoys and beacons, details on following page).SAM Electronics finally has added a category named Customized. In this category, all settings can bemade individually. See chapter A - 9.3.4 on page A-98 for details.
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 110 / 02 (2011-10)Operating InstructionsA-9 CHARTRADAR (optional) A RADAR.fm / 10.11.11A-98The allocation of display groups into the three categories is basicallydescribed in IMO Res. MSC.232 (82) which has replaced the olderrecommendation A.817 (19) in the year 2008. Following this paperthe Base category in Platinum contains display groups as follows:- coastlines (high water)- own ship's safety contour- isolated underwater dangers of depths less than safety contour- isolated dangers within safe water (i.e. overhead wires)Further-on scale, range and north arrow, units of depth and height,and display mode are shown all the time.The allocation for Standard and All in above resolution does notreflect the real existing object classes in the S-52 standard. So forthe final definition of these groups the S-52 group names have beenused. The selection list is shown in the screenshot on the right. 9.3.3 Select a CategoryFor the selection of one of the display categoriesopen the tab:Presentation->ENC->Displayand select the required category: Base, Primary, Standard, All, or Customized. If the latter is selected, the Adjust button is avail-able and can be used to open the Adjust Cate-gory Custom menu as shown in the right handscreenshot. Now the display groups can beadjusted individually.9.3.4 Select the Primary Chart Information Set (PCIS) The PCIS includes coastlines, own ship’s safety contour, and dangers to navigation as listed in IMO Res.MSC.232(82) for the Base category plus fixed and floating aids to navigation (buoys and beacons). Forthe display of this PCIS just select the Primary category.When vector charts are being used, it must be ensured at regular intervals (e.g. after a change of watch) that all of the necessary display groups are being displayed. Not even the Display Standard setting guarantees the completeness of the display.
ED 3100 G 110 / 02 (2011-10)Operating InstructionsA-9 CHARTRADAR (optional)A RADAR.fm / 10.11.11 A-99NACOS Platinum9.3.5 Indication of Category in the Status LineThe selected category (Base, Standard, All, Customized) isindicated in the top status line of the application area. A plus sign (‘+’) after the category is shown, if additionalgroups have been selected. A minus sign (‘-‘) after the category is shown, if additionalgroups have been deselected. Moving the cursor on top of the Category field opens a smallinformation window with details about the selected or dese-lected groups.
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 110 / 02 (2011-10)Operating InstructionsA-9 CHARTRADAR (optional) A RADAR.fm / 10.11.11A-1009.3.6 Defining the Symbol PresentationFor symbols and areas, it is possible to definewhether they should be displayed in the same wayas on the paper charts or whether a simplified set ofsymbols optimised for display on the screen shouldbe used. These settings are made in the menu Pres-entation > ENC > Display.9.3.7 Setting the Display of Text LabelsThe number of text labels displayed can be specified by means of the Text dropdown menu:- None: No text- Few: Only the most important text labels are displayed.- Normal: The text labels that are normally adequate for navigation appear.- All: All text labels contained in the chart appear.9.3.8 Switch on Additional InformationCheck corresponding controls or select the appropriate dropdown-menus if required: - Light Descriptions: Light descriptions are displayed - Extra Info Symbol: Objects for which additional text information exists are marked.- Full lenght light sectors: Light sectors are displayed true to scale- Indicate Data Quality: Quality of chart data is indicated - Highlight Updates: No, the last or all updates are highlighted, depending on the choice
ED 3100 G 110 / 02 (2011-10)Operating InstructionsA-9 CHARTRADAR (optional)A RADAR.fm / 10.11.11 A-101NACOS Platinum9.3.9 Switch on Conditionally Displayed FeaturesThe conditions for Conditionally Displayed Featurescan be set depending on different aspects:- Date dependent: For objects which are notpresent continuously, e.g. buoys which aredeployed seasonally, it is possible to define whetherthe display is to take place only at the time enteredfor it in the electronic chart. Select the corre-sponding entry if needed.• Within Effective Dates: Objects are displayed only during the time periods entered in theelectronic chart.• Always Visible: Objects are displayed independently of the time periods entered.- Scale dependent: For objects which are not present in all scales, it is possible to define in whichof the scales they are to be displayed. Select the corresponding entry if needed.• Within Effective Scale: Objects are displayed only in the scale for which they have beendefined.• Always Visible: Objects are displayed independently of the effective scale.
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 110 / 02 (2011-10)Operating InstructionsA-9 CHARTRADAR (optional) A RADAR.fm / 10.11.11A-1029.4 CHARTRADAR Application AreaThe screenshot below shows the CHARTRADAR in Head-up mode.Fig. A / 23 CHARTRADAR Application Area with superimposed elementsEBL1/VRM1, centered Parallel index linesScale SliderPlotHeading line andlook-ahead sectorVectorEBL2/VRM2, decenteredAcquisition/Guard Zone 1 and 2AIS/RADAR target with video emphasis and trail
ED 3100 G 110 / 02 (2011-10)Operating InstructionsA-9 CHARTRADAR (optional)A RADAR.fm / 10.11.11 A-103NACOS Platinum9.5 Application Area Context MenuA click with the More key in the application area opens the appropriate contextmenu.In difference to the context menu in RADAR, additional entries are present andactive.- Set Chart Center. Right-Click a position in the PPI, in the openedcontext-menu click Set Chart Center. The center of the display will then bemoved to the position that had been right-clicked before. Exception: If the own-ship´s position would be moved out of the PPI oreven too far to the circular rim of the PPI, the center is only moved as faras possible. See chapter A - 4.1 on page A-34 for details.- Select Layer to set the brightness and visibility of the various layersforming the complete display (see screenshot beside). For the CHAR-TRADAR especially the brightness of the Chart information is importantand can be set.- Chart Information. In this window, information about different criteriaof the chart database and the chart cells can be displayed. See chapter III- 2.3 on page III-21 for details.
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 110 / 02 (2011-10)Operating InstructionsA-9 CHARTRADAR (optional) A RADAR.fm / 10.11.11A-1049.6 Setting the Depths Lines to be Displayed in the Vector ChartIn the display of the vector charts, it is possible to use colour to clearly distinguish the navigable areasfrom the non-navigable ones, depending on the draught of the ship. Navigable areas are displayed inblack or darkgrey, non-navigable areas darkblue or blue. The boundary between navigable and non-navi-gable areas is the Safety Contour. The Safety Contour is particularly important because it is also a basis for the ECDIS Monitoring and forthe checking of the pre-planned route.It is also possible to distinguish between two areas with different depth ranges, inside the navigable areaas well as inside the non-navigable area :- Within the navigable area, the Deep Contour differentiates between the adequately deep areasdisplayed in darkgrey and the deeper areas displayed in black.- Within the non-navigable area, the Shallow Contour differentiates between the areas displayed indarkblue which are adjacent to the navigable area, and the even shallower areas displayed in blue.Fig. A / 24 Diagram of the depth contour systemSpot soundings from individual measurements are displayed more prominently if they project beyond aparticular depth. This depth is set as the Safety Depth. This situation is shown graphically in the figureabove.The respective colour settings for the Shallow and Deep Contour as well as the Safety Depth andthe Safety Contour are adjusted on the Depth panel of the ENC expander:Wrong or inadequate setting of especially the Safety-Depth and/or Safety Contour can give a wrong impression of navigable/non-navigable areas displayed on your chart. Both values shall be selected with sufficient safety depending on the draft of your ship.Chart zeroShallow contourSafety contourDeep contourSafety depthDraftBrown Green Blue Darkblue Darkgrey BlackNon-navigable area Navigable area
ED 3100 G 110 / 02 (2011-10)Operating InstructionsA-9 CHARTRADAR (optional)A RADAR.fm / 10.11.11 A-105NACOS PlatinumFig. A / 25 The Depth PanelOn the electronic chart the colours indicate the depth as adjusted in the dialogue, from brown (land) toblue (shallow), grey (navigable) and black (deep).Note:The colours defined in this chapter are based on the ECDIS colour schemes "Dusk" and "Night" so thatthe radar video and the target graphics are not obscured. After a restart of the system all depth contourvalues are set in the same way they have been set before.Shallow Water settingsNon-navigable areas of vector charts can be marked by means of a pattern, particular dangers withinnon-navigable areas can be accentuated.PatternNon-navigable areas (shallow water) can be displayed crisscrossed ifthis option is checked.DangerThe display of the isolated danger symbols which are situated in shallowwater can be switched on and off here. Those symbols are onlydisplayed if the display category is set to Standard at least.The four different depth settings can be adjusted by dragging the horizontal sliders on the vertical bar.Shallow contourThe Set Draft of own vessel is shown as a dashed horizontal line.Set the safety depth (transparent glider, triggers the alert) to Set Draft plus reserve of about 2m.Safety Contour (value greater than safety depth).Deep Contour.
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 110 / 02 (2011-10)Operating InstructionsA-9 CHARTRADAR (optional) A RADAR.fm / 10.11.11A-1069.7 Setting the Own Ship’s DraftOpen the own ship’s draft menu in the tab:-> Settings -> Draft and set Fore and Aft draft ofyour vessel. The larger of the two values will bedisplayed in the menu for setting the depth lines. The set own ship’s draft will only limit the adjustmentof the safety contour in the depth line menu to thelower side. The safety contour slider can only be set tolarger values. The ENC depth monitoring alarm is notaffected by the own ship’s depth, it is only affected bythe set safety contour.
ED 3100 G 110 / 02 (2011-10)Operating InstructionsA-9 CHARTRADAR (optional)A RADAR.fm / 10.11.11 A-107NACOS Platinum9.8 Activating the Chart MonitoringOpen the ECDIS Alerts menu in the tab:-> Alarms -> ECDIS Alerts and check the required controls. At least the safetycontour alarm should be set if an alarm shall be raisedas soon as the vessel is sailing into shallow water.Further alarms or warnings can be set for approachingspecial areas, obstructions, wrecks, rocks etc. For detailssee chapter C - 2.2 on page C-38.
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 110 / 02 (2011-10)Operating InstructionsA-9 CHARTRADAR (optional) A RADAR.fm / 10.11.11A-1089.9 Setting the Look-Ahead SectorIf one or more ECDIS alerts are set as described before,the chart monitoring is performed with the own ship’scontour as a guard sector. This guard sector is extendedby a look-ahead sector thus achieving an appropriatepre-warning time. Open the Own Ship tab in the Alarms expander andset the Distance in terms of nautical miles (NM) as wellas time (min) of the look-ahead sector (the first condi-tion which applies, travel distance or time to dangerousobject, will activate the alert). These two parameters forthe distance (NM and min) will cover the speed of ownship as well as the following example shows:Own ship is sailing 15 kn per hour.The time is set to 6 min as shown in the screenshot above.The alarm would be activated at a distance of 6 min/ 60 min * 15 kn =1.5 NMSo this speed dependent alarm would already be raised at a distance of 1.5 NM and not at 1 NM as setas a minimum.Define the Width of the look-ahead sector as well. Check the Show on Chart control if the look-aheadsector shall be visible in front of the own ship symbol or contour. The minimum settings are 0.5 NM, 1min, and 10 m width meaning that the look-ahead sector is active at any time with a minimum size.Suppressing of alerts is only possible from the above ECDIS Alerts menu. Once set, the appropriate ECDIS Alerts are raised every time the look-ahead sector touches a safetycontour or obstacle. This chart monitoring process is independent wether the look-ahead sector is visibleor not and even independent wether the chart visualization is switched on or not. But of course the optional CHARTRADAR function with the corresponding ENC charts for the actualpassage is required. For more details about the look-ahead sector see chapter C - 2.2 on page C-38.
ED 3100 G 110 / 02 (2011-10)Operating InstructionsA-9 CHARTRADAR (optional)A RADAR.fm / 10.11.11 A-109NACOS Platinum9.10 Chart MaintenanceFor the maintenance of charts the separate application Chart Maintenance is accessable from theSuper Home page.First leave the CHARTRADAR or RADAR application by selectingthe Super Home page. From here open the Maintenance ->Nautical Charts application. Follow the instructions given in thechapter H-Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts.Each new chart or update of an existing chart is completelychecked during the loading process for corrupted data. If the datastructure is not matching, the process is stopped, if single data fora cell are out of value range, a message is given and the operatorcan decide how to proceed. Finally the chart data are stored in an internal machine code on theCHARTRADAR. As this code has been thorougly checked during loading, it can not cause any interruptionor breakdown during the use of the CHARTRADAR.☞ As long as the loading process with new chart data is running the system must not be used fornavigation purposes.Fig. A / 26 Overview of the Chart Maintenance Screen
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 110 / 02 (2011-10)Operating InstructionsA-9 CHARTRADAR (optional) A RADAR.fm / 10.11.11A-1109.11 Main Differences between CHARTRADAR and Full ECDISPILOTThe ECDIS application, which is used for the CHARTRADAR is a subset of the software package used forthe full ECDIS. The main differences can be summarized as follows:Table A / 14 Differences between CHARTRADAR and ECDISPILOTFunction ECDISPILOT CHARTRADAROverview(the two screenshots show exactly the same posi-tion of own vessel and the same bright-ness settings)The chart is presented in a full rectangle The chart is presented in the radar PPIPlanning With the Browse function any position in the worldwide chart can be shown in the centre No Browse function selectable, the own ship remains always visible within the PPI, no planningPresentation of radar video and chartThe ECDIS colour set according to IHO S-52 presentation library appendix 2 is used with colour sets for day, dusk, and night. The radar video is in the background and superseded by any ECDIS symbolsThe radar video is always in the foreground, the ECDIS is presented as an underlay providing a dark background for radar video (colours are closely aligned to ECDIS dusk and night colour tables)Presentation of no-chart data areasOperating of radar No operating of radar TX functions possible, corresponding side bar in permanent area is suppressedOperating of navigation toolsLOP, EBL, &VRM and PI lines are available from ->Tools ->NAV tab EBL, VRM and PI lines are available from the radar function side bar in the permanent area, LOPs are not availableDisplay object groups Can be displayed per category: Base, Standard, All and Customized. The last one provides individual selection of groups.Same as ECDIS plus Primary category; Select Primary to set the Primary Chart Info Set (IEC 62388)Display ECDIS Symbol Library Chart1ECDIS Chart1 is a tab that can be opened in the application area, shows a legend of symbols usedNo comparable function available, the symbol legend would cover the radar presentation, not permittedAn area with no-chart data of any kind is marked with the “no data” symbology defined in the IHO S-52 presentation library appendix 2/3.2.3(14)According to IEC 62388 Ch. 11.1.8.2 the no-data area is shown as the radar background, here in blackOperating of radar TX func-tions possible, corresponding side bar is available
ED 3100 G 110 / 02 (2011-10)Operating InstructionsA-9 CHARTRADAR (optional)A RADAR.fm / 10.11.11 A-111NACOS Platinum
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 110 / 02 (2011-10)Operating InstructionsA-9 CHARTRADAR (optional) A RADAR.fm / 10.11.11A-112
VOYAGE PLANNING AND MONITORING
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsC-1 Voyage PlanningC VOYAGE PLANNING & MONITORING.fm C-3NACOS Platinum1 Voyage PlanningVoyage planning and voyage monitoring (see chapter 2 on page C-35) are common functions for theintegrated system.The part of the (long-term and medium-term) voyage planning that can be performed on the systemconsists of- generating and, if necessary, modifying the pre-planned route. See chapter 2 on page C-35- procuring and updating the electronic chart for the voyage area. See chapter 1 on page H-3 fordetails.- if necessary, generating User Symbols, i.e. additional user made symbols, lines and areas to bedisplayed on the chart area and to be used for monitoring purposes. - performing the check and verification of the planned route against the electronic chart and/oragainst the user made chart objects.- and -optionally- establishing a speed and time schedule by input of speed limitations, the time ofdeparture and time of arrival, or by setting the of a planned speed for the entire route.Fig. C / 1 Planned RouteAny route established during voyage planning can be activated as System Route for use on allMFDs configured for navigation. During voyage execution the route can be monitored automaticallyand can be used for automatic steering if a track control system (TRACKPILOT) is part of the systemconfiguration.
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsC-1 Voyage Planning C VOYAGE PLANNING & MONITORING.fmC-41.1 Generation of RoutesThe work on the pre-planned tracks by the so called Route Editor can be performed on any Multi Func-tion Display in RADAR or in ECDIS mode, whichever is selected. These items of equipment will exchangethe entered data with one another, so that (for example) a route that is generated on the ECDISPILOTcan also be altered on any RADARPILOT. The same is valid for the RADAR and ECDIS modes on a MFD.☞ It is generally recommended to perform route editing on the ECDISPILOT or in ECDIS mode, wherethe established route is displayed on the electronic chart. In many installations the workstation forplanning is equipped with an alphanumeric keyboard which supports easy input of the numerousnumeric and textual data required for route editing.
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsC-1 Voyage PlanningC VOYAGE PLANNING & MONITORING.fm C-5NACOS Platinum1.1.1 General Information about Pre-planned TracksPre-planned tracks 1) are routes which are generated on the basis of waypoint sequences for a plannedvoyage and which are stored 2) in the form of files sorted in folders containing route catalogs. Routes can be used by the components of the system as follows:- Routes can be displayed in the chart area on the ECDISPILOT and in ECDIS mode on a MULTIPILOT.In the planning mode the screen can be centered on any part of the route (Browse Mode)- On any RADARPILOT and in RADAR mode on a MULTIPILOT, one or more routes can be selectedand overlaid to the radar picture. The presently visible part of the pre-planned track is thendisplayed automatically on the PPI area.- One of the displayed routes can be defined as the System Route, which is then effective for theentire system. With the aid of the TRACKPILOT, the ship can be piloted automatically along the pre-planned track contained in the route dataset. But even during manual control of course and speed,the diverse displays at the system components that refer to the System Route can be most helpful.- If the Planned Track Speed is input at the beginning of the voyage, the system calculates a timeschedule based on the speed settings contained in the planned route. Its purpose is to calculate theresulting estimated time of arrival. The estimated time elapsed (ETE) will also be displayed togetherwith the planned speed value.- If the planned time of arrival (ETA) is input at the beginning of the voyage, the system contin-uously performs a speed calculation while the ship is sailing along the route; this calculation is basedon the Departure and Arrival Time set for the planned route, and its purpose is to achieve therequired time of arrival at the end of the route by an appropriate speed setting.- In both cases, the result, the Calculated Speed, is displayed in the Route List, and can be usedby the operator as the current speed setting during manual speed control. The calculated speedvalues are in any case limited to the MAX SPD values defined for each leg of the route.- In systems with integrated CONNING display (CONNING mode or CONNINGPILOT), the specialActive System Route display can be used to monitor the time schedule along the route and forthe selected Arrival Point.- If the system is equipped with a SPEEDPILOT, the speed can also be controlled automatically whilethe ship is sailing along the System Route, in such a way that the calculated speed is achieved andthe time schedule planning is thus fulfilled.Geographical Position and Shape of a RouteA route is divided by waypoints into segments which are commonly named legs or track segments.The waypoints are the main construction elements of the route. Their positions are defined by geograph-ical coordinates in the WGS84 system. See chapter C - 1.1.2 on page C-7 for details.If it is planned that the ship will change course at a waypoint, the radius of the turn must be specified.In this case, at the beginning of the manoeuvre computed on the basis of the specified radius, the trackcurve leaves the track line 3) at the wheel over point (WOP), and after completion of the manoeuvreit goes over to the next track line. The track curves shown are calculated based on the manoeuvringparameters defined for your ship on service level during the sea trials.The geographical coordinates of the waypoints, together with the radii assigned to the waypoints, thusdefine the geographical position and shape of the pre-planned track including the track curves at thewaypoints.1) In this document, pre-planned tracks are also simply called routes if there is no danger of confusion.2) Any change of the route data, made on any MFD, is saved on all MFDs automatically.3) Track line is a line joining two consecutive waypoints, also called leg in this operating instructions
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsC-1 Voyage Planning C VOYAGE PLANNING & MONITORING.fmC-6Routes each have a first waypoint and a last one. During editing, all waypoints are automaticallynumbered consecutively, beginning at 1 for the first waypoint. All route functions refer to this sequence.Thus, a route can only be sailed in the direction for which it has been generated.However, the direction of a route that has already been generated can be reversed by means of a simpleoperating step during editing and then processed further - see figure below.Fig. C / 2 Shape of the pre-planned track in the case of course changesThere is practically no limit to the number of waypoints that a route can consist of, or to the length ofa route. Thus, the entire route between two ports can be defined as one pre-planned track. It can oftenbe appropriate to divide the entire distance up into individual routes. For example, if a port is approached from various directions along various routes, it might be appropriateto perform separation into the port-related segment that is identical for all routes and the part that isspecific for the route concerned. In this way, the data relating to the port need to be input once only,and the maintenance of these data only has to take place in one dataset. Last waypoint(From WPT)Actual waypoint(To WPT)RadiusTracklineWOPSailing directionNext waypointTrackcurve
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsC-1 Voyage PlanningC VOYAGE PLANNING & MONITORING.fm C-7NACOS Platinum1.1.2 Generation, Handling and Administration of the RoutesDuring the generation of the pre-planned tracks, you can transfer the waypoint positions graphically,(in Graphic mode) from the electronic chart displayed on the chart area. You can also edit the waypoint positions by alphanumeric input (in Text mode); all other data, like- administrative data,- notes to the waypoints,- additional route parameters, and- parameters for the track and speed control functionsmust be edited in text mode anyway.Editing in Text mode means data input in the Waypoint List and the Route List displayed as twolinked tables shown in the lower part of the application area.In Text mode, the following functions too are possible:- During the generation of a route, waypoints - including all data assigned to a waypoint - can betaken over (copied with Copy and Paste) from routes that already exist.-By means of the Reverse function, the direction of the route can be reversed, i.e. the first waypointbecomes the last one, and so on.At any time you can change between graphical editing and text mode as long as the PPI/Chart areashows the relevant part of the pre-planned track being edited.Once the route has been generated, it should definitely be checked with the special checking functionavailable in the header of the Waypoint List.The route that is checked must be stored in the form of a separate file 1) on the hard disk of the MFDand assigned to a catalog. During the editing process, you have to give the route a route name, bymeans of which the system - in conjunction with the catalog name - can clearly identify any route. Sothat you too can identify the parts of the route later, you should also give some important waypoints anappropriate waypoint name before you start the storing process.If a route is to be displayed or modified on the system, you first have to load it. In this process, a routestored on the hard disk is copied into the main memory of the MFD. Each time you load or reload aroute the results of the route check get lost, i.e. the check route function must be executed once more.For modifying a route, you have all of the input possibilities that are also available to you for the initialgeneration process. After the modification, the route must be stored again. If this is done under the oldroute name, the old data set of the modified route is lost. If, during the storing process, you input anew route name, the modified route is stored additionally as a new route; in this case the originalroute continues to exist in unchanged form.Although it is improbable, hard disk drives can get damaged or the data stored on them can be erasedor be unreadable. So that, in such cases, the stored data are not irretrievably lost, it is absolutely essen-tial to make a backup copy 2) at regular intervals, i.e. before such an event can occur. After a hard diskfault or after the hard disk has been exchanged, the files can then be copied back2) to the hard diskdrive. This mechanism can also be used to exchange files between the systems on differentships.If your system includes more than one MFD with navigation functionality, all routes generated on oneMFD are also copied automatically to all other MFDs.1) In the following, no distinction is drawn between the route and the route file.2) On/from a removable device
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsC-1 Voyage Planning C VOYAGE PLANNING & MONITORING.fmC-8USEFUL INFORMATION Browse Mode on ECDISIf you want to edit the route graphically on the electronic chart, it is advisable to switch into the Browsemode 1) in order to be able to show any part of the sea where the route shall be located. In the otherdisplay modes you are only able to plan a route with about 96 nautical miles distance to your own actualposition.Alternatively all inputs for route planning can also be made in Text mode, i.e. directly by alphanumericinputs into the columns of the waypoint list (See chapter C - 1.1.3 on page C-9 for details).General Note about Editing in the Waypoint List and the Route ListIt is generally recommended to connect an alphanumerical keyboard (also called ASCII keyboard) to theMFD computer installed at the planning workstation or any MFD frequently used for editing and chartmaintenance purposes.In this case the system supports such well-known functions like copy and paste within the route editor;Copy by Crtl+C and Paste by Ctrl+V. This can be applied on a whole line as well as on a data cell ofa table or parts of it. Coordinate System for Position Input (WGS84)The position data that are input on the system have to refer to a particular coordinate system. It is notpossible to choose between various coordinate systems or different geodetic datum.Generally, the ECDIS programs (and also all connected RADAR / NACOS components) work internallywith the chart datum WGS 84. Before position data referring to a different chart datum are input on thesystem, a conversion to WGS 84 must take place before input 2).A necessary prerequisite for correct conversion is that the chart datum used on the source of the positiondata (a paper chart, a waypoint list, etc.) is known to the operator!Name of the WaypointAt the left end of the header of the route window under “Find” you can enter any search text which iscontained in the waypoint names. This search text is compared to the start of the text entries containedin the Name fields of the waypoints. With this function it is possible to have a fast access to the locationof a known waypoint (with given name) in long lists. If you then double click on the found waypoint lineor if you use the Go to Waypoint function, the chart center will jump to that position.1) Browse mode is only available in ECDIS mode, i.e. in RADAR mode graphical route planning is limited to thedisplay range selected for the PPI.2) The World Geodetic System 1984 is the actually used geodetic reference system for positioning. It is used world-wide as a common base for position data, specifically in the GPS satellite system and in GPS receivers. Also the position sensors connected to the system must send out their data based on the WGS 84 position datum.A position receiver not sending WGS 84 based data to the NACOS is automatically treated as invalid and the alarm"No WGS84 Position Datum in Use" will be given if you select it as position input.
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsC-1 Voyage PlanningC VOYAGE PLANNING & MONITORING.fm C-9NACOS Platinum1.1.3 Route Display SettingsBefore route editing is started, the settings for displaying the route in the Application Area should be set.The display options for the route can be set under Settings > Route.Fig. C / 3 Route SettingsRefer to the following picture to identify the items that can be superimposed as additional informationto the route.Fig. C / 4 Settings for the route displaySafety corridor, its width is adjustable.Waypoint numberBearing of the leg from waypoint 20 to waypoint 21.Wheel over point/wheel over line.
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsC-1 Voyage Planning C VOYAGE PLANNING & MONITORING.fmC-101.1.4 Route Editing - GraphicalRoute functions are started by selecting Tools > Routes > Explorer in the Non-Permanent Area.The Explorer tab opens the controls for route planning, editing and handling.This window is also called Route Explorer in this documentation.Fig. C / 5 Route EditingFrom the Folder list, an existing folder can be clicked to be opened, its content is then displayed in theright part of the window. The names of the routes contained in the folder may be sorted ascending ordescending by clicking the Name control.It is also possible to create new folders or to erase or rename existing ones. Right-click in the Folder list to open up the context menu.☞ The entries Delete and Rename are only possible when a catalog is selected.To create new routes, click on New Route or open the context menu by right-clicking in the name list. To delete or to rename existing routes, right click in the Namelist window to open up the context menu.☞ The entries Open Route, Delete Route and Rename Route are only possiblewhen a route is selected.☞ A folder must be opened to be able to edit a new route.
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsC-1 Voyage PlanningC VOYAGE PLANNING & MONITORING.fm C-11NACOS PlatinumOpen an existing routeMark a route name by clicking on it and then click Open Route, or click on the name in the list andthen open the context menu and click on Open Route.A route loaded on the MFD can display its waypoints and additional data as a list. For this purpose clickwith MORE on the route name and select Waypoint List from the context menu.If you switch on the waypoint list on the radar, the PPI area will partly be covered by the list. Be awarethat hereby the radar is displayed in a non-approved operating mode. It is therefore recommended toperform the route plannuing on the ECDIS or on the radar.Its data is then displayed in the lower part of the application area in form of a waypoint list. The routeis displayed graphically in the application area if the the route is part of the displayed chart area.Fig. C / 6 Display of Route DataWhen you close the Route Tab (i.e. the waypoint list) by a click on the symbol also its display onthe PPI/Chart area will be deleted.If you want to use the existing route without modification, you must check the route with the existingsystem settings before it can be activated as the System Route (See Check Route / System Route.)Create a new routeIn the Name list window right-click in a free space to open thecontext menu and click on New Route.You are then prompted to enter a route name; afterwards the firstwaypoint named Initial waypoint appears in the center of thescreen or on the current ship´s position if the ship is centered.At the same time, you can select Waypoint List from the contextmenu so that the Route List window appears in the lower part of theapplication area.Route listWaypoint list
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsC-1 Voyage Planning C VOYAGE PLANNING & MONITORING.fmC-12Click on the waypoint symbol to mark it. The marked waypoint is displayedwith a "handle" and can now be moved to the desired start point of theroute.Continue RouteTo insert additional waypoints, click on the waypoint symbol tomark it. Then right-click on it to open the context menu.In the context-menu, click on Continue Route to set the nextwaypoint.From now on the cursor is displayed with a dashed connectionline to the previously set waypoint and each click with DO addsa new waypoint symbol on the screen. Its position is added atthe end of the waypoint list.The function Continue Route is also available via the contextmenu if you select the first or last waypoint of the route. In this way more waypoints can be addedbefore the first or after the last waypoint.Insert a waypointTo insert a waypoint before or after a specific point of the route, by a click with DO select the waypointadjacent to the leg to be modified. Then click on the waypoint select marker with MORE, select Routein the context menu and click on- Insert After to create a new waypoint on the leg after the selected point- or -- Insert Before to create a new waypoint on the leg before the selected point.Direct Insertion of a Waypoint on a LegClick on the leg to select it; a marker is shown in the middle of this leg. Via the context menu you thenhave access to the function Insert Waypoint here.In any case the new inserted waypoint will be set in the middle of the leg which then must be movedmanually to the wanted position on the screen / in the chart. Alternatively, the wanted position can alsobe set or modified directly in the LAT and LON columns of the waypoint list. (See chapter 1.1.5 on pageC-16)Move a WaypointClick with DO on the waypoint symbol to select it. When the selection mark is shown, click on it andhold the DO key and then move the waypoint symbol to the intended position on the screen.
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsC-1 Voyage PlanningC VOYAGE PLANNING & MONITORING.fm C-13NACOS PlatinumAdd WaypointsClick with DO on the first or last waypoint symbol of the route. With a MORE click on the selectionmarker the context menu is opened. Select Route and click on Insert Waypoint.Adding a waypoint at the first or last waypoint will create a prolongation of the first / last leg with thesame track course but with 50% of the length of the previous leg; move the added waypoint to theintended position on the screen to create the correct course and length of the new leg.Delete a WaypointClick with DO on the waypoint symbol to select it. With a MORE click on the selection marker thecontext menu is opened. Select Route and click on Delete Waypoint.Set and Move a Parameter PointSelect the leg of the route displayed on the screen and by a click with MORE open the Route contextmenu in the application area. A click on Insert a Waypoint Here first inserts a normal waypoint in themiddle of the leg.Select the new inserted waypoint in the list (check the waypoint number) and activate the PP (ParameterPoint) checkbox. This waypoint will now be displayed with a small square symbol. With the graphical cursor on this symbol and pressing down the DO key you can now move the param-eter point along the preplanned track line. Releasing the DO key will fix the Parameter Point's positionon the leg.☞ Do not shift the parameter point into the curved part of the displayed route.Repeat the above procedure in order to add more parameter points on a leg.☞ Do not shift a new parameter point across already available parameter points.Note:The insertion of parameter points on a leg does not create any course change at these points. With other words, a parameter point is not part of the course change alarm management (No WaypointApproach and no Wheel Over Point alarms).But by use of parameter points you can easily add changes of route parameters like- Off Course Limit (CRS LIM) and Off Track Limit (XTD LIM)- Sailing Mode (Sail Mode)- Rudder Economy (ECON)- Planned Speed (MAX SPD)on different parts of a leg.Changing the planned speed on a leg is done by changing the MAX SPD value, which then also changesthe Calc.SPD value in the Route List.Save and Save AsIn contrast to editing User Symbols (See chapter A - 8 on page A-83), routes and the additional routeparameters shown in the waypoint list are not automatically stored to the file system on the MFD-computer. Be sure to Save all your changes at the latest after completion of route editing. During longediting sessions intermediate saving of data is recommended 1).1) See chapter "Backup/Restore of Map Data" on page H-13 for details on storing data on USB devices.
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsC-1 Voyage Planning C VOYAGE PLANNING & MONITORING.fmC-14If you want do discard your changes made to the selected route, use Save As to store the version withthe changed dataset under a new filename.Check RouteThe route to be used during the voyage must be checked by the program before distribution to thesystem. A not successfully checked route cannot be activated as System Route.If the selected route shown in Waypoint List in the lower part of the application area shall be used asSystem Route and "Not Checked" is indicated behind the check button click on the Check Route buttonbefore activation of the route.☞ If the route has been reloaded anew, the check results are lost and the check route must beexecuted once more. In this way it is ensured that the check is repeated with the actually valid draftdependent depth contour settings of the most up-to-date electronic chart.Clicking on the button starts the verification of the pre-planned route as follows:- check against the Safety Contour- check against the chart objects with a depth less than the Safety Contour Value- check against own Safety Lines and Danger Highlight areas.The results of the route verification are shown in the Waypoint List by small icons in front of the waypointnumbers. Pointing on it with the cursor, gives additional information on the check-results as a tool-tip.Clicking on these alarm icons opens another info dialog on the screen, where all detected hazards, limi-tations, etc. on the leg or at the waypoint are shown and described more detailed. For a step-by-stepguide for route checking See chapter 1.1.7 on page C-25.System RouteAfter you have checked it, you can activate the route as pre-planned track by a click on the Activatebutton.In this way the activated route will change its colour from orange to red and will from now on be distrib-uted to all applications on all MFDs for system-wide use, for example for a connected autopilot or trackcontrol system.The activated route is from now on handled as System Route until it is deselected again or until anotherone is activated. The System Route has the following properties:- it cannot be deleted from the screen,- it cannot be modified or reloaded,- it is used for chart and track monitoring as set by the operator under > Settings > Route- it is used for calculation of all data shown in the Route Data window,- it is sent cyclically to the TRACKPILOT and the (optional) SPEEDPILOT, which use the data of theSystem Route for their own calculations and control purposes (see also the relevant chapters ofthese operating instructions).
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsC-1 Voyage PlanningC VOYAGE PLANNING & MONITORING.fm C-15NACOS PlatinumAlternative RoutesEven if you have selected the System Route, it is possible to load other routes from your catalogs andto display them as well as to edit, modify and save them without interfering with the activated SystemRoute.All loaded routes can be displayed with their Waypoint Lists in the lower part of the application area.Each route has an own tab showing the route name. Clicking on the respective tab of a route brings theselected Waypoint List into the foreground.If another route shall be used as activated route, it must be loaded and checked beforehand.It is sufficient to click on the Activate button on the tab of this route to change the activated route.In some specific situations in the integrated system it might not be possible to deactivate or change thecurrently used System Route. This can be caused by the fact that one of the sub-systems is using thisroute for an automatic control function. Examples: Trackpilot in Track mode or Speedpilot in "Arrivalmode".Previously used routes can be switched off from being loaded and displayed on screen by clicking on thesmall cross in the Route Name tab of the waypoint list.Copy a RouteIf you want to create a copy of a loaded route, use Save As... in order to store it under another nameto the same catalogue.
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsC-1 Voyage Planning C VOYAGE PLANNING & MONITORING.fmC-161.1.5 Route Editing - Text ModeAll inputs for route planning can also be made in text mode, i.e. directly by alphanumeric inputs into thelines and columns of the Waypoint List and the Route List. 1)As in the graphic edit mode only the waypoint positions are put into the dataset, in any case all otheradditions to the route data must be made in text mode.Direct entry of data into the waypoint list enables to create a route off-screen, for example in order totake over a route documented as a list of waypoint positions (LAT / LON data) on a sheet of paper. ☞ If you want to see the loaded or to be edited route on the screen you must switch to ECDIS inBrowse mode and select the respective chart area where the route is located.Under > Tools > Route create a new route or open an existing route to see the text window of theroute to be worked on in the lower part of the application area.For this purpose click with MORE on the route name in the Route Explorer and select Waypoint Listin the context menu.Operating functions in the Waypoint List (Overview)Selection of a waypoint can be done with a DO click in the waypoint list line by line. In this case theselected line is shaded blue and in the context menu (click with MORE on the line) the following entriesare provided:Fig. C / 7 Route Editing - Context MenuDouble clicking on a line in the waypoint list is equivalent to Go to Waypoint in the context menuand centers the screen in ECDIS / Browse mode to the position of the selected waypoint.In this way you can jump from waypoint location to waypoint location (i.e. step along the pre-plannedtrack).1) Working in the lists is comparable to many commonly used spreadsheet programs; a click into a selected datacell allows to enter numeric (radius and other parameters) or alphanumeric data (names and notes) within certainlimits. These limits (for example min. and max. radius) are partly depending on configuration data made onservice level.Go to Waypoint Ctrl + G Corresponds to a double click in the line, see below.Insert BeforeAs described in the chapters beforeInsert AfterDelete WaypointReverse Order Can reverse the sequence of waypoints (i.e. the sailing direction) 1)1) The reversed route should be saved under a different name or even a different catalog. Be sure to checkif the waypoint locations can be used unchanged in order to avoid wrong traffic separation zones or sailingagainst the recommended sailing direction, etc.!Copy Waypoint Ctrl + C Copies all data of the selected waypoint to a temporary bufferPaste Waypoint Ctrl + V Copies the data in the buffer before the selected waypoint.The selected waypoint is shifted one line down.
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsC-1 Voyage PlanningC VOYAGE PLANNING & MONITORING.fm C-17NACOS PlatinumBasic and Additional Parameters of the RouteReferring to the Waypoint and Route List displayed on the screen whenever a route is opened, this over-view describes in a condensed form the complete parameters stored in the route data-set.Fig. C / 8 The Waypoint and Route List windowThe basic parameters of each route are displayed in the left part of the window, which is also calledWaypoint List.The additional parameters (calculated or set by the operator during route planning) of each leg of theroute are displayed in the right part of the window, also called Route List 1)1No. the waypoint sequence number in the route2Name the name of the waypoint (optional)3LAT the latitude (N / S value) of the waypoint position4LON the longitude (E / W value) of the waypoint position5RAD the radius in NM of the planned turn at the waypoint position6ETA/ETD the Estimated Time of Arrival or the Estimated Time of Departure at the waypoint position7ET Mode the calculation method or mode for the ETA (see chapter XYZ)8PP the selection / indication of Parameter Points 1)1) Parameter Points are points on a leg of the route without course change but with optional changes of oneor more of the parameters valid for this leg after passing the parameter point. See chapter on page C-13for details.9Notes is a field where notes (hints, cautions, warnings or additional info to a waypoint) can be given in text form10 From - To the waypoint numbers of the leg11 DIST the distance between two waypoints (i.e. the length of the leg)12 BRG the bearing between two waypoints (i.e. the track course of the leg)13 calc. SPD the calculated speed of advance on the leg (see also chapter "speed calc.")14 MAX SPD the maximum speed on the leg (set by the operator during route planning)15 CRS LIM the course limit valid on this leg 1) 1) These parameters are also used by the TRACKPILOT (if installed in your system) in case AUTO Fill isswitched on in the Next Data field on the TRACKPILOT expander. See also chapter TRACKPILOT fordetails.16 XTD LIM the track limit valid on this leg17 Sail the sailing mode (RL or GC) on this leg (set by operator during route planning)18 ECON the rudder economy on this leg set for the TRACKPILOT12 3 4 5 6 789 101112131415161718
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsC-1 Voyage Planning C VOYAGE PLANNING & MONITORING.fmC-18Operating Functions and Settings of the Route Editor in Text ModeThe start-point of route planning in text mode is the same as in graphic mode.Click on Tools, Routes, Explorer in the non-permanent expander, select a folder (i.e. a catalog) and selectNew Route or select Open Route if you want to modify an existing route.The following description defines the steps necessary to create a new route in text mode starting fromscratch. The operation steps relevant for modifying a previously created route are identical.New RouteYou are prompted to enter a name for the new route before you can continue.The command New Route opens an empty waypoint list where the so called Initial Waypoint is auto-matically set to the center of the visible screen automatically. The created LAT/LON value should bemoved or set to the intended start position.Waypoint ListClick on Waypoint List in the context menu of a route name to open the waypoint list in the applicationarea.Edit the first WaypointClick with DO on the initial waypoint line to select it. By a click in the LAT and / or LON field open theposition input and key in the intended value of the start position.Enter a default or specific RadiusClick with DO on the initial waypoint line to select it. By a click in the RAD field open the radius inputand key in the intended radius value in nautical miles. The radius can be set between the minimum andmaximum radius specified for the system on service level.Please refer also the chapter Predefined Radius under Useful Information on page C-20.With the radius set to another value than 0.00 NM the next following waypoints in the list will automat-ically inherit the same value until another value is set in one of the following Radius columns of awaypoint.Add a Waypoint / Insert AfterClick with DO on a waypoint line to select it. By a MORE click open the context menu. There click onInsert After; this will create a new waypoint with a distance to the previous one whereby the samecourse of the leg will be used. Then click the LAT and LON fields to correct the position. If required also key in a new radius value inthe RAD field after clicking it.Add a Waypoint / Insert BeforeClick with DO on a waypoint line to select it. By a MORE click open the context menu. There click onInsert Before; this will create a new waypoint in the middle of the leg with the same radius than setfor the previous waypoint. Then click the LAT and LON fields to correct the position. If required also key in a new radius value inthe RAD field after clicking it.1) The offset of ½ line between Waypoint and Route List indicates the validity of the data on the leg between thetwo adjacent waypoints.
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsC-1 Voyage PlanningC VOYAGE PLANNING & MONITORING.fm C-19NACOS PlatinumMove a Waypoint by LAT/LON inputClick with DO on the waypoint line to select it. By a click in the LAT and / or LON field open the positioninput and key in the intended modified position. You may also move the waypoint graphically in the PPI/Chart area.Delete a WaypointClick with DO on the waypoint line to be deleted. After another click into the line with MORE the contextmenu opens where you can select Delete Waypoint.Copy and PasteSelecting a line and with a MORE click and selection of Copy Waypoint in the context menu, all dataof the selected waypoint are copied to a buffer. With Paste Waypoint a new waypoint will be createdbefore this or another selected line.Taking over from another RouteSelect another route from any available catalog and copy the required waypoint. Then change back tothe route to be modified and use the Paste Waypoint function of the context menu in order to insertthe copied waypoint before any selected line.Taking over of a complete RouteLoad a route from any available catalog and save it to the same or another folder.In another folder you may use the same name of the route; in the same folder you must use anothername before saving it in order not to overwrite the original data.The function Save As... is supporting this task.☞ For the general functions Save and Reload, Check Route, System Route and AlternativeRoutes as well as Reverse Route please refer to the respective chapters under graphical routeediting.Useful InformationECDIS and Browse Mode- During route editing it is often advisable to use the Browse mode of the ECDIS. In this way you canat the same time observe the geometric constraints (for example: too large radius, too short leg,etc.) and the numerical parameters of the route when you establish the waypoint sequence.- In Browse mode, by a double-click on the line of a waypoint dataset, the display screen of the appli-cation area (PPI or chart) is automatically centered on the selected waypoint. I.e. by clicking line byline you can "jump" along the route from waypoint to waypoint.- In Browse mode you can also use the Zoom and Pan control or the other tools in the permanentarea (like Range) and the application area (like Set Chart Center, etc.) to control the scale and thecenter position of the electronic chart.General Note about EditingAll alphanumerical input fields are opened in the overwrite mode, i.e. you can directly type in the wantedvalue. If you only want to change a part of the value, click before the character or number to be changedand make your entry. The Enter key or button, or a click somewhere else takes over the input you have made.
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsC-1 Voyage Planning C VOYAGE PLANNING & MONITORING.fmC-20If the data input verification results in an error state, you will be asked by the system to change yourdata entry.Some of the columns do not have alphanumeric entries but - a selection menu (ETA/ETD: Arrival, Departure) or - a check box or- a selection bar (ECON).Predefined Radius- Already during editing the route, it is advisable to enter a radius for the first waypoint. This radiuswill be copied to all other added waypoints until you set another radius. In this way it can be verified"on-line" during editing if geometric constraints (matching of length of the legs, radius, and amountof course change) are violated.- It is recommended first to use a sort of "default" radius for sailing with nominal speed which couldlater be adjusted for your needs and depending on the results of the verification of the route on thechart display. The default radius should create a rate of turn far below the maximum rate of turnyou would normally accept for your ship under the planned loading conditions.- The predicted steady state turn-rate at a waypoint caused by the planned radius can easily be esti-mated by the calculationROT [°/min] ~ sailing speed [kn] / radius [NM]Table C / 1 Route Editing - Predefined RadiusSpeed Radius ROT [estimated]25 kn 1.00 NM ~ 25 °/min25 kn 0.50 NM ~ 50 °/min12 kn 1.00 NM ~ 12 °/min10 kn 0.10 NM ~ 100 °/minBe sure not to plan too small Radius values at high speed which would cause too high and possibly dangerous turn-rates on your ship. 1)1) The maximum ROT and the minimum allowed radius at nominal speed should have beendefined during the sea trials. Both values are parameters of the system configuration on servicelevel. The radius input during route planning is limited by the parameters min. and max. radius.
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsC-1 Voyage PlanningC VOYAGE PLANNING & MONITORING.fm C-21NACOS PlatinumCheck Route Corridor- with Safety Corridor The pre-planned route can roughly be checked during editing already if an appropriate Safety Corridoris selected under Settings > Route. The displayed corridor around the route helps to support the oper-ator during creation of the route when the display area covers the sea area of the route or of parts of it. At any time during editing the width of the safety corridor can be adjusted for the visible part of theroute. In any case it is then valid for the complete route.If you use a new route for the first time it could be sufficient to define a general minimum passingdistance (for instance 250 m or another safe value) in order to be on the safe side when the programchecks the route for the first time. Details, like adapting the radius, the track limit and other values could be adjusted following themessages about violations after the route checking function has been executed.- with Track Limit The pre-planned route contains a track limit (XTD LIM) which can be set differently for each leg of theroute. By parameter points it can even be changed one or more times on the same leg.By adapting the different track limit entries in the route to the sea area to be passed, you can supportthe built in route monitoring function as much as possible. In this way it is ensured that respective ECDISalerts are given, when the cross-track alarm is activated under the Alarms > ECDIS Alerts expander.When the route is used for sailing with TRACKPILOT in Track Mode, deviations from the pre-plannedtrack are activating respective alarms depending on the sea area and traffic separation zones.Imported RoutesImported route data taken over from the so called map/track data files of previous RADAR- or NACOSsystem generations can also be used again in the Platinum system.The track number of those tracks will be used as a part of the route name.For instance the track number 1330 and the track name STO_HEL will be combined to the route name"1330 STO_HEL" in the new system. For details how to import/export your own user made symbols, see chapter 1.1.9 on page C-34. For details how to import/export your maps/tracks, see chapter 2.9 on page H-13.
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsC-1 Voyage Planning C VOYAGE PLANNING & MONITORING.fmC-221.1.6 Details of the Waypoint DataThis section gives an overview about the meaning and use of all parameters and data being part of theroute data-set. The shortcuts in parenthesis [ ] are those used in the headlines of the Waypoint andRoute List on the screen.Waypoint Number [No.]Meaning: Serial number of a waypoint within the route; it is automatically allocated consecutively by theprogram, beginning at 1. It clearly identifies the waypoint within the route. It appears as a referencemarker in all lists, in the chart area (if switched on), and in all other displays of the system which referto the individual waypoint.Name of the Waypoint [Name]Meaning: Helps to identify the waypoint during the subsequent processing and during use while sailingalong the route. It can be displayed or printed out in all lists, and can be shown in most displays of thesystem which refer to the individual waypoint.Waypoint Position [LAT] [LON]Meaning: Geographical WGS84 position of the waypointEditing: In the [LAT] and [LON] column.Special features during editing: The hemispheres are input with N, S and E, W.Radius [RAD]Meaning: Radius in nautical miles with which the planned course change manoeuvre at a waypoint is tobe performed. It can be set between the minimum and maximum radius value defined for the systemon service level.Estimated Time of Arrival / of Departure [ETA/ETD]Meaning: Indication of the manual set or automatically calculated estimated time of arrival or departuretime depending on the ET Mode set in the following column. Estimated Time Mode [ET Mode]Meaning: Defines the method how the ETA/ETD data are calculated by the system.Editing: Under ET Mode in the Waypoint List; can be set to Departure / Arrival / Calculated. If it is set to Calculated, no input can be made into the ETA/ETD column. If you do not want to use thePlanned Track Speed function, the point of departure should be set to Departure, any point of arrivalshould be set to Arrival. Parameter Point Attribute [PP]Meaning: With the aid of a waypoint for which the Parameter Point attribute is set, new values for theroute parameters Maximum Speed, Course Limit, Off Track Limit and Rudder Economy can be set differ-ently within a straight track segment (the leg of a route).
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsC-1 Voyage PlanningC VOYAGE PLANNING & MONITORING.fm C-23NACOS PlatinumWaypoint Notes [Notes]Meaning:Here, you can input information and instructions for the nautical personnel, which can be displayed onthe MFD while the ship is sailing on the leg to this waypoint. The consecutive waypoint notes shown on the screen can be used as an automatic notebook or can alsobe printed on in different list formats 1).These waypoint notes, on operator request, also appear in the Chart Information Window on thechart (together with other waypoint related data). Note:If you use an alphanumeric keyboard during editing, in the Notes window you can "cut and paste" thetext or parts of it for use in the same route for another waypoint (cut = Ctrl+C; paste = Ctrl+V).From and To Waypoint [From - To]Meaning: This column indicates the numbers of the From and To Waypoints, i.e. the leg designationbetween waypoint N and N+1. The columns following in the same line in the Route List are valid for thisleg.Waypoint Distance [DIST]Meaning: This column indicates the distance in nautical miles between two consecutive waypoints, i.e.the length of the track segment between the From-waypoint and the To-waypoint. The calculationincludes the curved track line defined by the radius and the course change at the waypoint.Waypoint Bearing [BRG]Meaning: This column indicates the bearing of the track line between two consecutive waypoints, i.e. thecourse over ground to be steered on the straight part of a track segment.Calculated Speed [calc. SPD]Meaning: This is the speed that is calculated for the track segment between two consecutive waypoints;it is calculated once for the Planned Speed mode or continuously in ETA Mode. - In ETA mode (i.e. an arrival time has been set): While the ship is sailing along the track, this speed is continuously computed and limited on the basis ofthe Max. Speed values. - In Planned Speed mode (i.e. the Planned Track Speed has been set): After the planned speed value has been Set by the operator, this speed is computed once for each leg,whereby the calculated values are limited by the Max. Speed values.In any case the Calculated Speed is the speed with which the ship will have to sail in order to reachthe destination at the planned estimated time of arrival and which can be used as the speed setting bythe optional SPEEDPILOT in Arrival Mode.Because the Calculated Speed is continuously shown in the Route List display window, it can also beadopted as a set point for the manual speed setting via the propulsion lever by the officer of the watch.1) Printing functions and Waypoint Notes displays are not yet available in the system.
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsC-1 Voyage Planning C VOYAGE PLANNING & MONITORING.fmC-24Maximum Speed [MAX SPD]Meaning: The Maximum Speed defined for a leg is used by the system as the speed limitation for theCalculated Speed between each From waypoint and To waypoint (i.e. each leg). This limitation by the MAX SPD values takes place leg by leg with manual setting of the Planned TrackSpeed as well as during the frequent recalculation in ETA mode.Course Limit [CRS LIM]This route parameter is only relevant in systems equipped with a TRACKPILOT.Meaning: Alarm limit of the TRACKPILOT for the difference between set course and actual course (thecourse deviation). It also influences the possibility of switching the TRACKPILOT over to Track mode andthe corrective actions performed by the TRACKPILOT if the ship deviates from the track, see chapter "G- TRACKPILOT" on page G-1.Track Limit [XTD LIM]Meaning: Alarm limit of the system for the deviation from the route (the off-track distance to the trackline is indicated as XTD in meters). The track limit also influences- the ECDIS monitoring, see Section 4.4- the checking of deviations from the System Route.- the possibility of switching the TRACKPILOT over to Track mode,- the control precision of the TRACKPILOT in Track mode, - the filtering and monitoring of the external position-data by the TRACKPILOT in Track Mode.Sailing Mode [Sail]Meaning: This setting specifies whether the track segment between two waypoints is to be computedand used as the basis for steering with the TRACKPILOT and displayed on the chart as a Great Circleor as a Rhumb Line. The default setting defined by the program is the Great Circle mode (a new route starts with GC modeon each leg). In contrast to a Rhumb Line, which is steered with constant course, on a Great Circle trackthe entire distance is shorter and small course changes are about to happen when the ship is followingthe pre-planned GC track. Rudder Economy [Eco]Meaning: Optimization of the TRACKPILOT between precision of control and frequency of rudder move-ment, depending on the prevailing conditions like the sea state and the wind. Low values for Eco meanshigh rudder gains and vice versa (see chapter "G - TRACKPILOT" on page G-1).To simplify manual adjustments during use of the TRACKPILOT, this value should only be entered forthe first waypoint and at the boundary between a protected area (harbour, river, canal) or other confinedwaters and an unprotected area (open sea).
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsC-1 Voyage PlanningC VOYAGE PLANNING & MONITORING.fm C-25NACOS Platinum1.1.7 Checking of Routes This chapter contains the detailed back-ground knowledge and a step-by-step instruction about thechecking of routes during their creation with the Route Planning tool and before using them as theSystem Route. A necessary prerequisite for achieving the required safety in the use of the pre-planned track is that,before being used, the route is carefully checked. This check should take place immediately after theroute has been created or changed, i.e. before storage, and it must be repeated each time after a routehas been reloaded from the memory. ☞ A route which has not been checked by the program cannot be activated as the System Route.During this check, the track lines and the radius based track curves must be subjected to a geometricalcheck and a check against the electronic chart and the User Symbols (i.e. the user made chartobjects). These checks must take place one after another under program control. The geometrical checkis already done during editing, while the verification against the electronic chart and the user made chartobjects is done with the actual safety settings each time the check function is called by the operator.The check against the electronic chart is started by clicking the Check button in the route- andwaypoint list (also called route window in this chapter). Before the start of the check against the elec-tronic chart it is necessary to create the conditions for the execution of the check against the electronicchart and the User Symbols; see chapter 1.1.7.2 on page C-29.
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsC-1 Voyage Planning C VOYAGE PLANNING & MONITORING.fmC-261.1.7.1 Geometrical CheckThis check takes place already during route editing and it is independent of the used electronic chart orthe availability of user made chart objects. It only verifies if the geometric construction of the straighttrack lines and the track curves calculated from the different planned radius values are fitting together. Possible construction errors are: - A radius is too short, i.e. shorter than the lower limit value that was set for it at service level.If no radius was input at the first waypoint, the program uses a default value 1) as the input valuefor all radii, which must be changed to the required value by the operator.- A radius is too long, i.e. longer than the upper limit value that was set for it at service level.- A radius is too long, so that the distance to the next waypoint is too small that the curve plannedin this way does not fit and can probably not be executed with this radius at this waypoint.- There is a parameter point situated in the curve area of the track. To make certain that the changesmade by means of the parameter point are indeed effective in the desired track section, parameterpoints should generally be located outside the curve area.Fig. C / 9 Radius at waypoint 5 does not fit1) For the time being the default radius is the average between min and max radius, which have been set on servicelevel.
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsC-1 Voyage PlanningC VOYAGE PLANNING & MONITORING.fm C-27NACOS PlatinumHow the geometrical errors are made visible during editing:- If the Safety Corridor is not switched on during route editing, the only visible fault indication isthe unexpected shape of the track line and the fact that the track curve is not shown at the rightplace. In any case the curved path will be calculated and shown on the screen with the correctradius as set in the waypoint list. Curves not fitting correctly are shown with a red stripe- If you perform the Check Route function during editing, the results of the route check are madevisible by displaying alarm or warning icons in the route list for segments which are erroneous. - Additionally, in case of not corrected errors, clicking on the Activate button opens a detailed faultdescription including the relevant waypoint numbers and the erroneously checked route will not beaccepted as System Route.Fig. C / 10 Modification of waypoint 5 and 6, both radius values reducedCorrecting the RouteIf a part of the pre-planned track is not displayed correctly or if it is marked with a red coloured stripe,a fault message is given or an alarm icon is shown in the route window, the following can be performedto correct the faults:- In the waypoint list, the concerned line to which the fault message refers can be double-clicked inorder to show it in the center of the display area.- For the purpose of error free editing, you can modify the relevant section of the route directly onthe screen or you can correct its numerical data in the route window. If appropriate, modify the relevant waypoint or parameter point positions and / or the radius and verifythe route again.
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsC-1 Voyage Planning C VOYAGE PLANNING & MONITORING.fmC-28As soon as - a waypoint has been added or deleted,- one of the waypoints or parameter points has been moved or modified, or- a radius value has been changed the route is automatically being marked unchecked in the status field adjacent to the Check Routebutton. Thereafter the route must be checked again.Continuing / Ending the CheckIf none of the graphical fault indications or messages mentioned appears any more, the check againstthe electronic chart and the user made chart objects (User Symbols) can be started now.If the check against the electronic chart and the User Symbols was prepared beforehand and donealready in parallel to the geometrical check of the editing process, the route should be stored; it can nowbe used by the system without reloading it.☞ In any case, before later reuse of a previously planned route, the check against the eventuallyupdated chart and the possibly modified User Symbols must be repeated after the relevant settingsfor the Safety Contour and Own Safety Lines or Danger Highlights have been verified or adapted tothe prevailing conditions (see also the following chapter).Fig. C / 11 Modified route, activated as System Route, displayed with Safety CoridorAs long as the route under construction shows any fault and is not readily corrected, it should not be stored in the catalogs normally used for voyage execu-tion in order to prevent any unintended use by other users of the system.
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsC-1 Voyage PlanningC VOYAGE PLANNING & MONITORING.fm C-29NACOS Platinum1.1.7.2 Check against the Electronic Chart and the User made Chart ObjectsThis chapter contains details and a step by step instruction how to perform the check of the geometricallycorrect route against the electronic chart, the optional raster charts or paper charts.This verification of the planned route against charted objects must be performed before it can be madethe System Route. After each reload or any change of a route the checking must be repeated after therelevant safety settings (Safety Contour) have been adapted to the prevailing conditions. Preparation1. In the menu Presentation > ENC > Depth, set the Safety Contour correctly2. Set the type of the electronic chart against which the check is to be performed, preferable to ENC.3. Switch on the display of the user made symbols, lines and areas in the context menu of the PPI/Chart area under Layer > User Symbols. 4. Adjust the Range setting so that cells of the electronic vector chart or raster charts 1) which containthe nautically relevant information for the planned route are displayed.5. If a vector chart is used, check whether chart cells having the appropriate navigational purpose arepresent for the entire track, at least over the width corresponding to the Safety Corridor settingor to the Track Limit contained in the route data-set:• Correctly set the display of the chart objects in the ENC that are to be displayed• With the Set Chart Center or the Pan and Zoom Control function, step along the route tobe checked.For those chart areas of the planned route which are not covered by suitable data cells, all nauticallyrelevant objects along the route must be marked by means of Own Safety Lines or Danger High-lights.To verify this, also the raster charts can be used if installed on your system - see step 6. If there is no suitable raster chart available, the check must be performed manually against thepaper chart. For this purpose, the pre-planned track, including the track limits, must be entered inthe paper chart and checked on that chart visually.6. If raster charts are used, then 2) all nautically relevant objects along the route must be marked bymeans of own Safety Lines or Danger Highlights for the entire track, at least over the width corre-sponding to the track limit. For this purpose, virtually sail along the route to be checked using the Set Chart Center or the Panand Zoom Control functions.1) Raster charts are not yet available in the PLATINUM system.2) This is prescribed for ships with DNV approval and using raster charts.The checks mentioned in steps 5 and 6, and the editing of the own chart objects, especially of the own safety lines and danger highlights, must be performed with care so that the necessary level of safety can be achieved.
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsC-1 Voyage Planning C VOYAGE PLANNING & MONITORING.fmC-30Performing the CheckThe check against the electronic chart must be started manually after the geometrical check wassuccessful. In this check, after a click on the Check Route button, the geographical shape of the track 1)is compared with the data of the vector chart and with the user chart objects Own Safety Line andDanger Highlight.For the execution of the check, the display settings mentioned above under Preparation are not important.What is important is the selection of the type of electronic chart and the setting of the SafetyContour 2), see also above under Preparation.For the verification of the route, the chart cells with the highest precision available on the system areused as the basis. They might therefore differ from the cells used for the display. Because of this,messages might occur which initially contradict the presentation of the pre-planned track in the vectorchart 3).The results of the verification process are made visible - in form of red rings shown along the route- by small alarm icons in front of the lines in the waypoint and route lists.Pointing on the colour markings in the chart or on the alarm icons in the list opens the respective tooltips describing the detected violation between the route and the electronic chart (if vector charts areused) and the user made chart objects.Correcting the TrackSelect ECDIS and Browse mode to be able to verify the complete route on screen.If a waypoint is double clicked or it is selected and then in the context menu Go to Waypoint is clicked,the respective waypoint to which the message refers is shown at the centre of the chart area.Verify the causes for the violation and decide about the changes to be made to avoid it.If appropriate, modify the relevant segment of the route and start the check again.When the entire pre-planned track is shown without red ring symbols along the route and no alarm iconsare shown any more in route window, the check program did not find any violations.☞ It may happen that errors or warnings remain displayed but in reality there is no serious problemgoing along that route. The quality of the check-results is mainly depending on the contents of theelectronic charts.1) The track considered during checking also includes the area corresponding to the actually set SafetyCorridor.2) The Safety Contour information of the ENC or other vector charts is not available in raster charts and musttherefore fully be replaced by manually generated Own Safety Lines and Danger Highlights.3) To clarify supposed contradictions of this kind, it is helpful to switch to a different range setting and to usethe Chart Info box where required.Vector charts which have not been approved for navigational use or were not updated by the user might contain errors. Successful checking of the route on the basis of such vector charts does not guar-antee that the ship can sail safely along the route.It is under the responsibility of the operator to use a planned route for navigation, irrespective if it was checked by the system successfully or with errors.
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsC-1 Voyage PlanningC VOYAGE PLANNING & MONITORING.fm C-31NACOS Platinum1.1.7.3 Computation of Sailing TimesThe system computes the sailing times that will occur if the track is sailed at a Planned Speed or at avariable speed, depending on the Departure Time and the Arrival Time (planned time of arrival).In both cases it also calculates the effect of a speed limitation set by the route parameter MAX SPDavailable for each leg of the pre-planned track. This computation is done each time when you enter aroute parameter which is changing the route distances, the relevant speed values or the ETA/ETD values.- If you set the Planned Speed for the complete voyage, the system calculates a time schedulebased on the speed settings contained in the planned route. It results in the displayed estimatedtime of arrival (ETA) for each waypoint in the route and the entire sailing time under ETE. - If the planned time of arrival (ETA) is input at the beginning of the voyage, the system performsa speed calculation for the complete route. This calculation is based on the Departure and ArrivalTime set for the planned route, and its purpose is to display the required speed for each leg inorder to achieve the required time of arrival at the end of the route.- In both cases, the result, the calculated speed for each leg, is displayed under calc. SPD in theRoute List, and can be used by the operator as the current speed setting during manual speedcontrol. The calculated speed values are in any case limited to the MAX SPD values which may bedefined differently for each single leg of the entire route.- Additional to the time and speed data in the waypoint and route list, and independent of the calcu-lation method the estimated time elapsed (ETE), i.e. the entire sailing time will be displayed to theright of the Planned Speed controls. - In a system equipped with SPEEDPILOT, the calculated speed values of the route can also becontrolled automatically while the ship is sailing along the pre-planned track. In this case each calcu-lated speed value of a leg will be used as the set-point for the speed controller and the plannedtime schedule is thus fulfilled, if nothing unforeseen happens in between.Initial Time Schedule If you load or reload a route, or a new one has been created, the program will set all calc. SPD valuesto maximum speed (i.e. to the MAX SPD values contained in the route). At the same time a time schedulewill be calculated based on these speed values and the first and last waypoint will contain the implicitlyresulting departure and arrival time.Time Schedule with ETAIn order to adapt the initial time schedule of the route to your demands perform the following steps: 1. Select the departure point from the waypoint list and in its ET Mode field set the mode to Depar-ture.2. Enter time and date of departure in the ETA/ETD field; this will result in an adapted time schedule,using the speeds shown in the calc. SPD column.3. Select the arrival point from the waypoint list and in its ET Mode field set the mode to Arrival.4. Enter time and date of arrival in the ETA/ETD field.This will result in an adapted time schedule by changing the speeds shown in the calc. SPD column butkeeping the departure time.As long as the MAX SPD values of the planned route are not achieved, the adapted time schedule willfollow your settings for the ETD and ETA (refer also to the Notes below).
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsC-1 Voyage Planning C VOYAGE PLANNING & MONITORING.fmC-32Time Schedule with Planned SpeedIn order to adapt the initial time schedule of the route to a constant speed for the entire route or to aspecified speed profile, perform the following steps: 1. Select the arrival point and in its ET Mode field set the mode to Calculated.2. Verify or change the maximum speed values in the MAX SPD fields according to your needs.3. In the Planned Speed field enter the required speed value and click on Set.This will result in a new calculation of the time schedule for the entire route based on the set departuretime and the planned speed value, but taking into account those legs which have a speed limitation setby the MAX SPD values.If the route contains an arrival point in the ET column and the Planned Speed is entered, you will get awarning that this will be changed to Calculated and the arrival time is lost.With [Clear] you can make the Planned Speed invalid, so that the time schedule can be recalulatedbased on the set arrival and departure times.Notes: If the maximum speed is achieved in all calc. SPD columns, the arrival time cannot be made shorter.In this case an earlier arrival time will also lead to an earlier departure time. In the same way a laterdeparture will create a later arrival time.If you must achieve an earlier arrival time and an earlier departure is not possible, the MAX SPD valuescould be increased until an upper limit is reached, which is specific for your ship under the prevailingconditions.
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsC-1 Voyage PlanningC VOYAGE PLANNING & MONITORING.fm C-33NACOS Platinum1.1.8 Completing the Generation of the RouteThe new or modified route must be stored in the file system of the MFD so that the data that were inputduring or after checking of the route will not be lost as soon as the route is switched off or the systemis shut-down.Ending the Generation of a New or Modified RouteThe route window must be switched on and visible.1. You can enter additional notes to each single waypoint in the Note input fields of the waypoint list.2. In the header of the waypoint list or in the context menu of the Route Expander click on [Save]and the new or modified route data-set will be stored with all data which have been entered untilthen under the indicated Route Name.☞ If you have modified a route and want to keep the original route unchanged you must enter anotherroute name for the original route before you save the modified one. This is done by a MORE clickinto the catalog field of the Route Explorer where Save As... must be clicked. When specifyingthe route name, pay attention to the following:- Each route is assigned to a catalog. Within the catalog, the route is clearly identified bymeans of the route name, i.e. within a catalog the same route name can only be assignedonce.
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsC-1 Voyage Planning C VOYAGE PLANNING & MONITORING.fmC-341.1.9 Import / Export Routes
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsC-2 Chart and Route MonitoringC VOYAGE PLANNING & MONITORING.fm C-35NACOS Platinum2 Chart and Route MonitoringDuring the voyage, the ECDIS subsystem of each MFD integrated in the navigation system performs anumber of nautical checks at short intervals of time. This process is running on all indicators with RADAR-PILOT 1) and ECDISPILOT functionality as well as on the MULTIPILOT.If defined criteria, based on the ECDIS performance standards, are infringed, an appropriate alarm isgiven when the respective monitoring function is in the switched on state under the relevant alarmsettings.The entire implemented monitoring functionality can be divided into route monitoring and chart moni-toring.Route monitoring- is performing the monitoring of deviations of your own ship from the System Route, displayed inthe PPI/chart and - is watching the approach to critical points on the System Route. Additionally the results of the Check Route function in combination with the monitoring strip defined bythe Safety Corridor remain available to the operator for the System Route also during voyage execu-tion.Chart monitoringis including the checks of own ship's position (defined by the ship's outline 2)), its movement ahead incourse direction (defined by the Look Ahead Sector) relative to - the chart objects contained in the vector chart and - the user chart objects Own Safety Line, Danger Highlight and many of the symbols 3) which areavailable in the User Symbols database. Alarms and Warnings for activation of the different monitoring functions are selected in the Alarmsexpander via the ECDIS Alerts selection menu. The alarms can be activated independently by selectionof- Safety Contour Alarm- Special Area (Indication or alarm)- Obstruction ahead indication- Critical point on route alarm- Cross-track alarmin the Alerts menu.1) On RADARPILOT Chart Monitoring is only possible if it is configured as a Chartradar on service level.2) The parameters for the ship´s outline have been defined on service level.3) Only those user-made symbols which are classified as obstructions (like buoys, beacons, lighthouses, landmarks,etc.) generate an alarm in the monitoring process.
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsC-2 Chart and Route Monitoring C VOYAGE PLANNING & MONITORING.fmC-36An alarm given in the Alarm Line and in the Alarm List and referencing chart objects ahead or at theown ship's position can be caused by several different violations of chart objects being touched orcrossed:- Each basic alarm reason (i.e. each type of object related alarms) creates a circular symbol showingthe location of the violation by the own ship contour or the look ahead sector.- Holding the cursor on the circular symbol, opens the chart alarm list with detailed descriptions forthis location. The additional alarm text information is taken from the chart database (i.e. is part ofthe official electronic charts) or from the user made own chart objects.Preconditions So that this Chart Monitoring can serve its purpose, namely increasing the nautical safety, the followingprerequisites must be fulfilled:- The best possible sensors for position and speed over ground must be selected.- By means of a comparison between the available position sensors, a check must be performed toensure that the selected position sensor is supplying correct and accurate position data.- If a vector chart is used, it must be available for the entire navigated area. Otherwise, own safetylines and danger highlights must be made available in the User Symbols data base for the missingareas.- If a raster chart is used, own safety lines and danger highlights for all potentially dangerous areasand objects must exist for the entire navigated area. - The safety contour value must have been set correctly. See chapter 5.7 on page B-57 for details.- The used route must have been successfully checked and reasonable settings for the track limit (i.e.the monitoring strip for the deviation from route alarm) must have been made for each leg.- The latest relevant nautical warning information received by radio must be taken into account,possibly by the editing of own safety lines or danger highlights or by manual ENC update (seechapter Chart Maintenance). - The check of the used planned route should, if necessary, be repeated after incorporation of thereceived warning information.- The alarm criteria must be correctly set - see the following sections.- In the case of doubt and once per year, the monitor performance must be checked. See chapter B- 3.3 on page B-14 for details.
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsC-2 Chart and Route MonitoringC VOYAGE PLANNING & MONITORING.fm C-37NACOS Platinum2.1 Route Monitoring: Own Ship against the System RouteMonitoring of the Cross Track DistanceIf the deviation of the own ship's position from the pre-planned track is greater than the Cross-trackalarm limit set in the System Route under XTD LIM for the current leg, the alarm message Deviationfrom Route appears. The activation of the relevant alarm function takes place under Alarms > ECDIS Alerts > Cross-trackalarm. The off-track limit value currently valid for the actual leg is displayed in the XTD LIM column ofthe route list. The currently measured off track distance (i.e. the transverse deviation from the track line)is indicated numerically on the Route Data Expander and graphically on the Conning Display 1) .Alarm on Approaching the present WaypointWhen the probable travelling time needed to reach the wheel over point (WOP) of the next plannedcourse manoeuvre at the To-Waypoint defined by the System Route becomes less than the value ofthe look ahead distance or the time displayed under Alarms > Own Ship, the alarm messageApproach to Waypoint appears. In addition, by switching off the function Critical point on route alarm, the output of this alarm canbe suppressed for this MFD, even if the other route related alarms are not suppressed.USEFUL INFORMATIONThe Connection with the TRACKPILOT 2)The monitoring of the own ship against the System Route is performed independently of the ECDIS sub-system by the TRACKPILOT as well (if the TRACKPILOT is switched on). During this process, bothprograms operate with independent limit-values. The TRACKPILOT always checks with its own user set limits against the track which is valid for its oper-ating mode, i.e. depending on its steering mode (Heading, Course or Track mode). The equivalent routerelated alerts of the TRACKPILOT are only activated if the ship is steered automatically in Track mode(i.e. along the System Route). For the case that the AUTO Fill function is activated, the TRACKPILOT will also use the XTD Limit takenfrom the System Route, i.e. the same value as used for route monitoring by the ECDIS sub-system.In case of course or position deviations from the pre-planned track and depending on the situation, thealarms TP Course Limit Exceeded and TP Track Limit Exceeded are given, and the approach to theWOP is announced by the TP Waypoint Approaching alarm.Additionally, 30 seconds before starting a course change in Track mode, the TP WOP Execution alarmwill be given by the TRACKPILOT.☞ The order to reduce the number of alarms during sailing in Track Mode, it is advisable to switch offthe Cross-track alarm and the Approach to Waypoint alarm of the ECDIS.1) The Conning Display is an optional system component or an optional display mode on the MFD.2) This information is not relevant for systems without TRACKPILOT.
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsC-2 Chart and Route Monitoring C VOYAGE PLANNING & MONITORING.fmC-382.2 Chart Monitoring: Own Ship against Vector - / User Chart ObjectsLook-Ahead Sector/AlertsTwo different expanders provide a collection of settingsusable for chart and route monitoring during voyageexecution. The route related alerts are only activated if aSystem Route has been activated for the system.Look-Ahead SectorShow on Chart activates a virtual sector infront of the ship, formerly known as "guardsector".For this ECDIS Monitoring function and inde-pendent of the visibility of the sector, theprogram constructs a monitoring sector (lookahead sector) with an adjustable sector widthand a length which can be defined here.In the example shown here, the sector has alength of one mile and a width of 250m at itsend 1).The guard sector opens out from own positionin the direction of the ship's movement (i.e. theCOG/SOG vector) and is carried along with theship.The monitoring is performed both with theguard sector and with own position (i.e. theown ship contour).It takes place for several objects which are entered in the electronic chart or are stored as User Symbols.The monitoring is therefore independent of whether the display of these objects is switched on or off.Which chart objects or which user symbols are to be monitored is specified in the relevant performancestandards. Whenever a monitored object is within the defined range of the sector or it touches or overlaps theship´s contour, the corresponding alarm is raised. See below under Alerts.☞ Even when the function Show on Chart is switched off, in any case the defined guard sector moni-tors against the objects under Alerts in the frame below.It might be an advantage to suppress the guard sector monitoring if the speed is very low or the shipis stationary.1) The Look-Ahead Sector length can be defined by a time or a distance setting, whereby the value resulting inthe longer distance ahead will be used. With the time setting, the length of the guard sector is dependent on theown ship´s speed.
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsC-2 Chart and Route MonitoringC VOYAGE PLANNING & MONITORING.fm C-39NACOS PlatinumAlertsDifferent alerts can be switched on andadjusted for the purpose of own ship and routemonitoring.- If selected, Safety Contour Alarmraises the Crossing Safety Contouralarm. For the setting of the SafetyContour see See chapter 5.7 on page B-57.- If selected, Special Area raises the Areawith Special Conditions alarm.☞ It can be chosen wether this notification will be raised as an alarm with buzzer or as an indi-cation only.- If selected, Obstruction ahead indication raises the Crossing a Danger indication.- If selected, Critical point on route alarm raises the Approach to Waypoint alarm.If in the switched on state, this alarm will be announced automatically before your ship is passingthe next waypoint on the activated route. The pre-warning distance or time can be set under Alarms> Own Ship > Look-Ahead Sector. See chapter C - 2.2 on page C-38 for details. The waypointNotes field in the opened waypoint list can be used to transfer information concerning this pointon the route to the operator.- If selected, Cross-track alarm raises the Deviation from Route alarm if the maximum allowedcross-track distance between pre-planned track and current position is exceeded. The monitoringlimit can be set during route editing in the XTD LIM column of the waypoint list. See chapter C -1.1.6 on page C-22 for details)Switching the Alarms onClick on Alarms, ECDIS Alerts to switch the different monitoring functions on or off. These selectionscan be done independently of each other.
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsC-2 Chart and Route Monitoring C VOYAGE PLANNING & MONITORING.fmC-402.2.1 Monitoring on the Basis of a Vector ChartWarning against Sailing into an Area of Insufficient DepthWhen a Safety Contour (See chapter 5.7 on page B-57) or another area with insufficient depth (lessthan the set safety contour value) is touched by the guard sector, e.g. an object belonging to the objectclass Land Area, the Crossing Safety Contour alarm appears in the alarm list. As soon as the own shipcontour is situated on the safety contour or on one of the other above-mentioned areas, the alarm like-wise appears.The safety contour is formed from all objects of the object classes Land Area and Intertidal Area andfrom the objects of the object classes Depth Area or Dredged Area whose depths are equal to or thenext size greater than the value entered in the menu Presentation > ENC > Depth under SafetyContour.For this monitoring, the cells with the highest precision available in the chart database are used. Theymight be different from the cells being used for display. It is therefore helpful to use another displayrange for an additional visual check and to use the Info Box.The setting of the guard sector for this monitoring process is performed in the same way as describedabove in the menu Alarms > Own Ship. The output of the safety contour alarm can be generallysuppressed by means of the Safety Contour Alarm checkbox under Alarms > ECDIS Alerts .Fig. C / 12 Generating the Chart Alarm with the Guard Sector (example: Safety Contour alarm)Guard sector moves alongwith the ship and its directionis always the same as theship's direction of movement(the guard sectorcan bedisplayed on the screen)Ahead Sector Length as set in Alarms > Own Ship under DistanceSafety contourShip's position when the Crossing Safety Contour alarm occursAhead Sector width, set in the Alarms > Own Ship menu
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsC-2 Chart and Route MonitoringC VOYAGE PLANNING & MONITORING.fm C-41NACOS PlatinumWarning about Running over a Potentially Dangerous ObjectIf the guard sector touches an object from a series of object classes specified in the program based onthe ECDIS Performance Standards, such as Restricted Area, Caution Area, Traffic Separation Zone orBuoys, Beacons, etc., the alarm Area with Special Conditions or Crossing a Danger appears in theAlarm List. These alarms also appear if objects are touched which belong to particular object classes andare provided with depth information (e.g. Underwater Rocks, Wrecks) and whose depth is less than thevalue entered under Safety Contour in the menu Presentation > ENC > Depth.The setting of the guard sector for this monitoring process is performed in the same way as describedabove in the menu Alarms > Own Ship. There, the output of the above mentioned alarms can begenerally suppressed by means of the checkboxes Special Area and Obstruction ahead indication.For the Special Area alert monitoring, the priority in the alarm list can be set to alarm or to indicationlevel. Indications are announced without activation of the buzzer.
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsC-2 Chart and Route Monitoring C VOYAGE PLANNING & MONITORING.fmC-422.2.2 Monitoring against User SymbolsIf an Own Safety Line is touched or crossed by the guard sector, the Obstruction Ahead alarmappears in the Alarm List. The alarm appears only if the own safety line is touched from within the safearea. The non safe side of the area behind the safety line is indicated by small hachure lines.The same alarm is issued if one of the user-made Symbols (e.g. buoys, beacons, wrecks or other under-water hazards) is touched by the look-ahead sector. If an area belonging to the object class Danger Highlight is touched by the guard sector, the alarmArea with Special Conditions appears.Activation of the guard sector for this monitoring of the user-made chart objects is performed in themenu Alarms > ECDIS Alerts where also the other alarms can be activated or suppressed.User Chart Objects on Raster Charts☞ Because the user-made own safety lines, danger highlights and symbols are available independentlyof the chart type, this part of the chart monitoring process can also be performed if raster chartsare used 1). It is urgently recommended 2) that, if raster charts are used, the dangerous areas and objects and(for example) traffic separation zones should be marked by means of own safety lines or dangerhighlights in order to support the navigator with a basic automatic chart monitoring function.USEFUL INFORMATIONDetails of the Chart Monitoring Alarms and IndicationsSupplementing information about the chart monitoring results is shown in combination with a circularsymbol in the chart or by opening the Info window at this location after clicking with MORE into thechart. If you hold the cursor on a circular symbol, a tool-tip window is shown, containing the chart alarmlist with all violations found in the chart at this position. Repetition of the AlarmsIf, for example, the ship is sailing along a line of buoys and is too close to them, the alarm Crossing aDanger appears only for the first buoy, but it can be acknowledged and remains in the alarm list untilthis type of violation is no longer found within the guard sector. Thereafter a new violation can activatethe same alarm again.1) Raster Charts are not yet available in the Platinum ECDIS2) On ships with DNV approval this is a compulsory requirement.An alarm is only repeated if an object belonging to a different object class is touched or if the same object class is touched within a smaller distance or time.
CONNING
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsD-1 Operating the Conning D CONNING.fm / 10.11.11D-31 Operating the Conning
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsD-1 Operating the Conning D CONNING.fm / 10.11.11D-41.1 GeneralThe functionality of Conningpilot is available in the system in different implementations- On the second monitor connected to a main MFD. In this case operation is executed by the samekeyboard and trackball which is connected to the main MFD, by moving the cursor to the screenarea of the second monitor.- As one of the additionally available operating modes on a MFD.In general, different conning display functions can be configured for different conning monitors, but theoperation of each display function is identical on all screens.Depending on the system configuration the conning display can present and operate functions for navi-gation, automation, machinery, maintenance and service.For a description of conning functions of Automation/Machinery please refer to ....
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsD-1 Operating the ConningD CONNING.fm / 10.11.11 D-5NACOS Platinum1.2 An Overview of the ScreenSimilar to each other screen layout, the conning display window is devided into different screen areaswhich can be combined in different ways.Fig. D / 1 Overview of the Conning screenAs a minimum, three different views of the Conning screen are available: - Conning Home. It shows the most important conning data for open sea navigation according tothe settings of the operator. It is divided into a Navigation part and an Automation part.Display area for navigational data. Display area for automation data. This area can be configured relating to the set-up of the ship.Sidebar with permanent and non-permanent areaTabs for the quick access to the appropriate windows, available after the window has been displayed at least one time.Links for the quick access to the appropriate windows
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsD-1 Operating the Conning D CONNING.fm / 10.11.11D-6- Conning Display Waypoint List provides a combination of the most important conning data andthe actual waypoints of the present system route. It is divided into two parts as well.- Docking Display. In this display, the movement of the ship is visualised with detailed data forheading, rate of turn and speed.Other Display selections may be available depending on the ent system configuration and the availablesensors and interfaces.
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsD-1 Operating the ConningD CONNING.fm / 10.11.11 D-7NACOS Platinum1.3 Conning Display - NavigationFig. D / 2 Conning DisplayThe Conning Display - Navigation is displayed together with the automation data in the Conning Homewindow. The window is opend per default when Conningpilot is started, it is also accessible by the appro-priate tab or link. For the automation part of this display see chapter D - 1.6 on page D-10.Rate of turn numerical value and graphic indicationHeading indication with the Set, Actual and Next values used by the Trackpilot in Heading mode.Indication of the direction of the speed vector. The vector starts at the System Position. See chapter 2.1 on page III-16 for details.Trackpilot operating modeOff Course/Off Track-numerical value and trend indicatorWind direction and speed indicationDrift angle value and direction indicator calculated by the Trackpilot.Indication of the maximum value representing the length of the speed vector. The speed vector over ground is true to scale until 5 kn. Above 5 kn the length is limited and repre-senting a direction only.Links for the quick access to the appropriate windows
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsD-1 Operating the Conning D CONNING.fm / 10.11.11D-81.4 Docking DisplayFig. D / 3 Docking DisplayThe Docking Display is shown in the entire Application Area. In the example above, bow is moving transversal in starbord direction, stern is moving to port. The direc-tion is indicated by the green and red triangles respectively at the appropiate side of the display as wellas by the light-grey arrows, which are moving into the appropriate direction.Rate of turn* numerical value and graphic indication. Green and red for STBD/PORT turning direction. Actual gyro headingBow and stern transversal speed indica-tors, numer-ical value and graphic indica-tion. Green and red for STBD/PORT turning direc-tion.Longitudinal speed indica-tion, numer-ical value graphic indica-tion. Links for the quick access to the appropriate window.* : The indicated ROT value (numerical and graphics) is calculated by the system from the gyro-heading received from the selected heading sensor.
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsD-1 Operating the ConningD CONNING.fm / 10.11.11 D-9NACOS Platinum1.5 Conning Home Waypoint List☞ Subjcect to changes, ot yet described Fig. D / 4 Conning Home Waypoint ListThe upper part of the Conning Home Waypoint List is similar to the main conning display, but theoutline of the ship and the ship´s speed vector and wind indication are replaced with a table that displaysthe data of the Active System Route.The waypoint list shows the courses, leg distances and calculated speed data for the actual next legs ofthe route. The ETA-column indicates the arrival times at the waypoints calculated by the system. Addi-tionally, the planned and actual ETA at the specified Arrival point is shown together with the calculatedDelay or Spare time of the time schedule.Active System Route data
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsD-1 Operating the Conning D CONNING.fm / 10.11.11D-101.6 Conning Display - MachineryFig. D / 5 Conning application area for automation dataThe Conning Display - Machinery is displayed together with the navigation data in the Conningwindow. The window is accessible by the appropriate tab or link. For the automation part of this displaysee chapter D - 1.6 on page D-10.☞ The figure above is only an example. It may vary significantly from the display on your system!Rudder angle from the rudder angle sensor.* The thin red lines indicate the rudder limit set by the operator with the configuration manager tool.The orange line indicates the set value of the active Trackpilot.Shaft power and revolution speed of the port main engineShaft power and revolution speed of the starbord main engineStern thruster power and thrust direction in %Bow thruster power and thrust direction in %Electrical power delivered by the generatorsTotal electrical power deliv-ered by the generators* : In systems withTrackpilot. Values delivered by the Trackpilot Interface.
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsD-1 Operating the ConningD CONNING.fm / 10.11.11 D-11NACOS Platinum1.6.1 The Rate of Turn IndicationFig. D / 6 The Rate of Turn IndicationThe Rate of Turn value is computed from the change in the gyro heading values supplied by thecompass system. Displayed as numerical value and graphical indication.Red bar to the left: Ship is turning to port.Green bar to the right: Ship is turning to starboard.
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsD-1 Operating the Conning D CONNING.fm / 10.11.11D-121.7 Conning Sidebar - Permanent AreaThe permanent area consists of only one group, the Ship Attitude.Fig. D / 7 Conning Sidebar in the Permanent Area- HeelThe transversal inclination of a vessel due to the action of the wind, a greater weight upon one side,etc., usually transitory. Positive values indicate a heeling to STBD.- TrimThe longitudinal inclination of a vessel due to greater weight at the bow or stern, etc., usually tran-sitory. Positive values are present if the bow is "up".The Ship Attitude window may, depending on sensor availability, also contain the Draft forward (atbow) and the Draft aft (at stern).
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsD-1 Operating the ConningD CONNING.fm / 10.11.11 D-13NACOS Platinum1.8 Conning Sidebar - Non-permanent AreaFig. D / 8 Conning Sidebar in the Non-Permanent Area- The Alarms expander shows the oldest not acknowledged alarm and provides alarm management,including an Alarm List, which opens in the application area.- The Trackpilot expander contains the same information as described in the appropriate chapters,see chapter G - 1 on page G-3 for details.- The Wind & Current expander displays an overview of the actual wind and current data- The Depth expander shows the run of the measured waterdepth within the last time period (default10 minutes)- The Autopilot Performance expander provides control graphics for the autopilot in form of arudder recorder.Klick to open the alarm list.
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsD-1 Operating the Conning D CONNING.fm / 10.11.11D-141.9 The Alarm List on ConningFig. D / 9 The Alarm List of ConningThe alarm list shows detailed information about the present alarms. Contents and operation of the alarmlist is the same as on the non-permanent area. See chapter V - 1 on page V-3 for details on the alarmlist.☞ In contrast to the other display modes on the MFD, on the Conning Display the alarm list covers theentire application area; the list can not be opened in the non-permanent area in Conning mode.
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsD-1 Operating the ConningD CONNING.fm / 10.11.11 D-15NACOS Platinum1.9.1 Wind and CurrentThis expander contains three groups as aminimum. 1)- WindDisplays the direction and speed of theactual measured wind, delivered by ananemometer. The wind direction can be set as relative or true, the unit for the wind speed can beset as knots or m/s.- CurrentDisplays the direction and speed of the actual measured current. Those values are always true andin kn. Current data can only be calculated if SOG and STW data are available and valid.- Depth below tannsducerShows the value of the actual measured depth below transducer delivered by the depth sensor. 2)The depth history is shown in the Depth expander.1) If available and connected to the system, other environmental data like water and air temperature can be indi-cated.2) Depending on the depth sounder connected, also the Depth below Keel can be indicated.
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsD-1 Operating the Conning D CONNING.fm / 10.11.11D-161.9.2 DepthThe Depth expander shows the run of themeasured waterdepth within the last timeperiod.(to be continued)
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsD-1 Operating the ConningD CONNING.fm / 10.11.11 D-17NACOS Platinum1.9.3 Autopilot PerformanceThe Autopilot Performance expanderprovides control graphics for the autopilot. Theparameters like time period and scale can beset by the operator.(to be continued)
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsD-1 Operating the Conning D CONNING.fm / 10.11.11D-18
SENSORS
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsF-1 AISF SENSORS.fm / 10.11.11 F-3NACOS Platinum1AIS
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsF-1 AIS F SENSORS.fm / 10.11.11F-41.1 AIS Summarized BrieflyIn addition to the ARPA electronics, the Universal Shipborne Automatic Identification System (AIS) auto-matically provides the ship's nautical officers with important information about nearby vessels or otherrelevant objects within VHF range.The AIS system transmits own ship data cyclically via two defined VHF channels and receives the samedata of the other ships and objects that are equipped with AIS systems.
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsF-1 AISF SENSORS.fm / 10.11.11 F-5NACOS Platinum1.2 Overview of Functions and Operating ProceduresTargets and Other AIS ObjectsWith regard to the objects that can be detected by the AIS system and transferred to the radar indicator,a distinction is drawn between the following:- AIS targets: ships that are equipped with an AIS system- SAR aircraft: search-and-rescue aeroplanes or helicopters- Aids-to-Navigation: navigation marks, e.g. beacons and buoys- Base stations: Equipment for controlling the AIS system, e.g. as a component of a traffic controlcentres.The AIS targets and SAR aircrafts can be activated and tracked, as well as the radar/ARPA targets. Seechapter 7.1 on page A-56 for details about ARPA and AIS target handling. All AIS objects can be displayed on the PPI, and in ECDIS mode they can be displayed throughout theentire chart area. The data of the individual monitored targets can be displayed in detail.Safety MessagesVia AIS systems, safety messages 1) can be communicated if necessary, which are then passed on by allreceiving AIS systems as a message or an alarm to their display units. The procedures for dealing withthe safety messages received are described in section 3.3.Monitoring/Setting of the Own Ship Data TransmittedMost of the information transmitted from your own AIS system is generated automatically by the system.However, some items of information (e.g. ship's draught, hazardous cargo, destination, ETA) have to bedefined by the operator by inputs to the AIS operating unit. ☞ Because these data are voyage dependent, their input to the AIS unit should be assured by includingthem in the nautical check list. Setting of the communication technique (channel selection, bandwidth, transmission power etc.) usuallytakes place fully automatically. In very rare cases, however, manual setting procedures too might benecessary for the channel management.The Type of your own AIS SystemThe interface between an AIS transponder electronics unit and the display/operating unit (here, RADAR-PILOT or ECDOSPILOT) is standardised. Any type approved class A transponder can be connected to thePlatinum system. All the display related functions as described in the subsequent chapters can becontrolled from the RADARPILOT/ECDISPILOT user interface.Installation settings like MMSI, GPS antenna location etc. are not standardised, they are set with thecorresponding MKD (minimum keyboard display) which comes along with an AIS transponder system. Forthe Platinum AIS transponder system 3410 there is no MKD required. The initial configuration can becarried out with the Platinum Integration Manager SW Tool.1) Also called safety related messages in the relevant regulations.
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsF-1 AIS F SENSORS.fm / 10.11.11F-61.3 Setting the Voyage DataMost of the data that are sent by the own AIS system for the purpose of target data display on otherships (own AIS data) are generated automatically by the system (e.g. identification data, position etc.).However, some items of information (e.g. ship's draught, cargo, destination, ETA) have to be defined bythe operator. Select Settings > AIS > Voyage Data to enter the tab.Check and adjust the displayed information as requiredfor your voyage.DESTDestination of this voyageETAEstimated time of arrival at the specified destinationPersons on BoardThe number of persons on board.STATENavigational state as specified in the rules. For example "Under Way unsing Engine", "At Anchor" etc.CARGOPrescribed information about the cargo as specified in the rules. For example "None", "Hazardous GoodsClass A" etc. The available choice depends on the type of ship set in the basic configuration of the Plat-inum system. In case the present ship is a passenger vessel, this group would be named Passengerinstead of Cargo.☞ In the fields State and Cargo it is only possible to choose between specified entries. This is donein the list which appears after clicking on the field concerned. As long as the cursor is situated onthe field State or Cargo, a small window appears below this field, containing information about theentry.The following data must be entered at the beginning of every voyage, and must (if necessary) be updated during the voyage to ensure correct and up-to-date information to be sent to other ships.
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsF-1 AISF SENSORS.fm / 10.11.11 F-7NACOS PlatinumSOLAS Chapter VII - Carriage of dangerous goods requires among other things the declaration of hazardous substances contained in the cargo.MAPOL Annex II - Regulations for the Control of Pollution by Noxious Liquid Substances in Bulk defines the following categories for hazardous liquid substances:Category A - Noxious liquid substances which if discharged into the sea from tank cleaning ordeballasting operations would present a major hazard to either marine resources or human healthor cause serious harm to amenities or other legitimate uses of the sea and therefore justify the appli-cation if stringent anti-pollution measures. Examples are acetone cyanohydrin, carbon disulphide,cresols, naphtalene and tetraethyl lead.Category B - Noxious liquid substances which if discharged into the sea from tank cleaning ordeballasting operations would present a hazard to either marine resources or human health or causeharm to amenities or other legitimate uses of the sea and therefore justify the application if specialanti-pollution measures. Examples are acrylonitrile, carbon tetrachloride, ethylene dichloride andphenol.Category C - Noxious liquid substances which if discharged into the sea from tank cleaning ordeballasting operations would present a minor hazard to either marine resources or human healthor cause minor harm to amenities or other legitimate uses of the sea and therefore require specialoperational conditions. Examples are benzene, styrene, toluene and xylene.Category D - Noxious liquid substances which if discharged into the sea from tank cleaning ordeballasting operations would present a recognizable hazard to either marine resources or humanhealth or cause minimal harm to amenities or other legitimate uses of the sea and therefore requiresome attention in operational conditions. Examples are acetone, phosporic acid and tallow.
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsF-1 AIS F SENSORS.fm / 10.11.11F-81.4 Setting the transmitter / Transmitter StatusIn this tab, the status of the AIS transponder and addi-tional information are shown.It is possible to prevent the AIS from transmittingcompletely.The Long-Range Interrogation Mode can be sethere.TransmitterSelect On or Off.☞ The status Transmitter On/Off is stored with date and time and can also be called up after anaccident at sea.Long-Range Interrogation ModeThe AIS system can also be interrogated about own ship data (e.g. own AIS data) by another system,e.g. a SatCom system. Because this interrogation can take place over longer distances than the VHFrange, it is called "long-range interrogation".The interrogating station specifies which data are requested. The reaction of the AIS electronics unit canbe set by means of the Long-Range Interrogation Mode.- ON: The interrogation(s) are replied as specified- OFF: No alarm appears, no reply is sent- MANUAL: In the case of an interrogation, the AIS Interrogation alarm appears. By acknowledge-ment, the AIS Interrogation dialog appears. The reply is sent with the Reply button or is insteadprevented with the Close button.- AUTO: In the case of an interrogation, the reply is sent automatically. For the purpose of informa-tion, the AIS Interrogation alarm appears; it should be acknowledged in the usual way.The transmitter should not be switched off except in justified exceptional cases, because when it is switched off, own ship can no longer be detected as a target by other ships and cannot participate in the communication between ships, equipped with AIS.
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsF-1 AISF SENSORS.fm / 10.11.11 F-9NACOS PlatinumStatus InformationThe fields UTC to DIM D contain status information about own navigational sensors whose data aretransmitted as own AIS data and the reference point of the position reported. UTCThe status of the internal clock of the transmitter. (Clock Ok or Clock Lost)POSNDepending on the connected systems, several different indications are possible. - External GNSS.... means that the GPS receiver connected externally to the AIS electronics unit isbeing used for this purpose. DGNSS is also possible, if differential mode is used by the positionfixing device.- Internal.... means that the internal GPS receiver in the AIS electronics unit is being used for thispurpose.SOG/COGInformation about the source of the transmitted SOG/COG data. (External or Internal)HDGStatus of the heading data (Valid or Invalid)ROTIndicated as Valid or Invalid, - Other source means that an approved ROT sensor is not being used, and so only the direction butnot the rate of the heading change is transmitted. In this case, only the direction of turn (port/star-board manoeuvre) can be displayed on the receiving system.The fields DIM A to DIM D show the distance of the reference point to bow, stern, port and starboardside in meters. The reported position is referenced against this point. Further on the size of the own shipcan be derived from this information.
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsF-1 AIS F SENSORS.fm / 10.11.11F-101.5 Channel ManagementThe AIS system cannot function unless all AIS systems communicate on the same VHF channels andunless the communication bandwidth and the transmission level are correctly set. The settings neededfor this are normally made automatically as described in the following.VHF channels 2087 (161.975 MHz) and 2088 (162.025 MHz) are used worldwide for the two AIS chan-nels.As default values, AIS channel A uses the VHF channel 2087, the AIS channel B uses the VHF channel2088, and for both channels, the bandwidth setting is Auto, and transmission is performed with powerlevel High. Every mobile AIS station operates on these two channels. A mobile AIS station is thuscapable of receiving two messages, from two different stations concurrently, provided that it does nottransmit at the same time.In particular geographical regions or situations, i.e. due to local RF interference, it is necessary to deviatefrom these settings. The necessary values are received via the AIS channels from a local VTS centre,harbour administration etc.These data also contain the information about the region in which these settings are to be used,including the transition zone surrounding that region. The switch-over is performed automatically when the ship islocated in the transition zone. This is done in the following steps:- As soon as the ship reaches the boundaries of the transitionzone, one AIS channel is set to the different VHF settings(with the other AIS channel remaining unchanged) and thealarm Channel management changed is shown. As a result,the targets situated inside and on either side of the transitionzone are now seen and the ship is also seen by these targets;see the diagram.- On leaving the transition zone, the second AIS channel is alsoswitched over to the different VHF settings.The general effect is that a ship which is not located in the transi-tion zone does not see any targets located behind the transitionzone.The transponder is capable of managing 8 different zones auto-matically. Each zone is described by the South-West and North-East corner of a rectangle.Each zone may have different channel management settings. Administrations may set your AIS by specialmessages automatically to a certain locally required setting. You can check these settings, which arestored in your AIS, by opening the tabs for channel and zone. You can toggle from one to the nextsettings by using the Next button. Although manual setting is also available, it is strongly recommendednot to use the manual function. This should only be done on special advice of a local administration i.e.by radio or other means if the automatic function is not available from coastside. There is a severe risk,It is also possible to make a setting manually, but this should only be done in exceptional cases and following the advice of a local administration received by radio, publications, etc. and only after having informed the ship's command personnel accordingly. For manual setting, see chapter "Displaying the Channel Data Set" on page F-11.CAEDBFTransitionzoneRegion withdifferent VHFsettingsSees SeesB, C, DA, B, D, E, FSees C, D, FArea withdefault VHFsettings
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsF-1 AISF SENSORS.fm / 10.11.11 F-11NACOS Platinumthat due to manual setting the own ship is no longer visible to other ships as an AIS target and that youwill not see any other AIS targets on your system. Normally, the default setting should be on channels2087 and 2088 and should have no position entered. Bandwidth is on Auto, Power is on High.Displaying the Channel Data Set- Used: The data currently being used by the AISelectronics unit- Not Used: Data are currently not being used bythe AIS electronics unit.- Edited: The displayed data have been alteredmanually but have not yet been stored.By clicking on Next, the next data set (channels,bandwidth, mode, power, geographical region andtransition zone) can be displayed.Channel A and Channel BSwitch on the transmitter (TX) and/or the receiver (RX) as required by checking the box accordingly. Forspecial purposes and by advice of an administration select the radio channel and bandwidth.BW - BandwidthThe Bandwidth can be set to Auto or 12,5 kHz. PowerCan be set to High or Low. During the loading and unloading of tankers, the transmission power of theAIS transmitter must be reduced for safety reasons. At anchor and during mooring it might be necessaryas well.Finally klick on the Store button to store the set data.Changes on the settings of the VHF channels, bandwidth or geographical data in use (by entering a data set) shall be done by authorised and well skilled personnel only. Each change may have a serious influence on the VHF communi-cation between AIS systems.
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsF-1 AIS F SENSORS.fm / 10.11.11F-12Displaying the Zone DataThe Zone Tab shows the zone related information ofthe eight data sets for channel and zone which arestored in the AIS transponder. Select Settings > AIS > Zone to enter the tab. Thefirst two groups for Northeast and Southwest show thediagonal corner points of the zone. The next groupshows the transition zone as described in the introduc-tion to this chapter. The default values for the cornerposition are empty fields. Any entries should only bemade on advice of an administration as explainedbefore. Any values might also have been set automat-ically by received AIS command messages from a local VTS centre. They will become active if the ownvessel reaches the defined zone.
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsF-1 AISF SENSORS.fm / 10.11.11 F-13NACOS Platinum1.6 Receiving AIS MessagesThe AIS unit can receive safety related messages from other ships. These messages are transmitted tothe system and stored in the MFD until up to a maximum number of 50 for a certain time period. If the maximum number of messages is reached, the oldest messages will be deleted automatically. New messages generate a warning in the alarm system in order to alert the operator of viewing themessage text in the target related message list.New Safety MessageWhen the AIS electronics unit receives a safety message, this is sent to the connected interface and theNew AIS Safety Message warning appears in the alarm list of the MFD. By acknowledgement thewarning disappears from the list.The operator must open the safety message list via Tools > Target > Message in order to have accessto all received and temporarily stored messages.Fig. F / 1 AIS Message List after receiving a new safety message☞ The list is sorted according to the receive time of the messages; the latest (newest) entry is shownat the top of the list. The sorting sequence of the list cannot be changed.☞ Any message from the same source with the same text as already received will not be stored again,but its time marking in the list will be updated. In this way it will show up in the first line again.☞ The receive time, the identification data of the transmitting AIS object and the start of the text areshown above the message. The complete text is enclosed in the frame below the list of messages.☞ By a click into a line of the list you can select the message to be shown in the text window.☞ In the first column of the list a yellow alarm icon is shown if the related message alarm is not yetacknowledged. Additionally all new (unread) messages have a marker in the second column untilthe message has been selected and shown in the text window.Message not yet acknowledgedMessage not yet read
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsF-1 AIS F SENSORS.fm / 10.11.11F-14Operating in the ListThe width of the columns in the list can be modified if required, but none of the columns can be madecompletely invisible. If the lines get longer than the width of the window, a horizontal slider will be shownwhich can be used to move to invisible parts of the window.A vertical slider is shown if the number of list entries does not fit into the window. Scroll to the top ofthe list to see the newest (last received) message.
OPTIONAL APPLICATIONS
MAINTENANCE
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsH-1 Performance MonitorH MAINTENANCE.fm / 10.11.11 H-3NACOS Platinum1 Performance MonitorNote:The Performance Monitor is only present in systems with Radar Platinum.BackgroundThe performance monitor provides the operator with a simple go/no-go tool to check the transmitterperformance as well as the receiver sensitivity in one step. It comprises a small test oscillator and amicrowave diode with amplifier. Both modules are installed under a hole in the gearbox. The hole ishermetically sealed with a transparent plastic cover. The diode receives the radar pulse which is transmitted by the magnetron via waveguide and scannerinto the air. The received signal is amplified and gives an indication about the function of the completetransmitter path.The test oscillator transmits a pulse at about 1 msec after the main pulse. This pulse lies outside thedisplay space and is not visible in the radar image. It simulates a target being far away. This signal ispicked up by the scanner and gives an indication of the proper function of the complete receiving path.TestThe selected transceiver´s performance can only betested by the MFD which is selected as Master for it. IfMaster is not selected, the Adjust control will be insen-sitive. Click the Transceiver Adjust control, the corre-sponding submenu will open. Check the control forPerformance Monitor. Wait for a minute, the resultwill be shown as follows:- If the sum of both indications from TX and RX pathtogether is ok, the test is shown with an Ok in theTransceiver Adjust box.- If the sum of both indications from TX and RX pathis degraded, the test is shown with a Critical result.- If the sum of both indications from TX and RX pathis degraded by more than 10 dB, the test is shownwith a Most Critical result.Switch off the performance monitor by closing the Transmitter Adjust box.During the test, the radar is fixed to 12 nm and cannot be switched to another range. Do not start the performance test with a cold transceiver, wait 30 min after switching-on. The test result could be disturbed by heavy snowfall or rain, shading the hole in the gearbox. The test result could also be disturbed by other transceivers on-board. They should be switched off.If "Most Critical" is shown as the result, this means that the performance quality of the radar system is no longer adequate for safe radar operation. Request service!
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsH-1 Performance Monitor H MAINTENANCE.fm / 10.11.11H-4☞ Not only the magnetron that is being checked with this test but also the toothed belts of theantenna gearing are expendable parts. Therefore, if the test shows that the magnetron has reachedthe end of its useful life, the toothed belts shall be checked and must be exchanged as well duringthe necessary service work.
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsH-2 Data Maintenance of the Electronic ChartsH MAINTENANCE.fm / 10.11.11 H-5NACOS Platinum2 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts2.1 GeneralThe electronic charts for your NACOS Platinum System are stored separately on each MFD (workstation).They have to be updated in regular intervals. After initial installation from the base media the charts are updated typically in a weekly schedule fromthe update media. During the update process the already installed charts are checked and it might benecessary to insert the base media again if requested by the update application during the updateprocessThe update can be carried out for each MFD separately by using update media like CD ROM, USB-Stick,or portable USB drive. The procedures will take some time, because the chart cells are processed on theMFD, in case of ENC charts they are also decrypted and converted into an internal file format. Thisimproves the chart presentation speed during later ECDIS operation.For practical reasons it is recommended to perform the time-consuming update from media on the ECDISplanning system. Once this MFD has been updated, the other MFD’s in a network can be updated by asimple and faster network action.☞ The initial installation can take several hours. Even an update may require a considerable length oftime. Therefore, perform this task in good time before the start of the voyage.☞ The chart maintenance work must be carried out so that the databases of all MFD’s always havethe same status. This is ensured if the notes given here are observed and the sequences describedare followed.- An easily determined indication of unequal states of the databases of the MFD’s is when thenumbers of cells/ charts displayed for one MFD is different from the others.- An update of a chart cell can only be performed if the base information for this cell has beeninstalled before. Also the update sequence must not be interrupted. If one update has been missedin the past it is not possible to add a new update. In that case carry out the base update again.
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsH-2 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts H MAINTENANCE.fm / 10.11.11H-62.2 Starting Chart MaintenanceNavigate to the Super Home menu and click on Maintenance > Nautical Charts.As a result, the world chart together with a main selection sidebar, a protocol window, and an actionarea appears.If the chart maintenance is started for the first time after power-on of the electronics unit, the databasewill be checked automatically. Any errors will be displayed in the protocol window underneath the worldmap.Background operationTo use the MFD for other purposes while prolonged maintenance sequences are running automatically,just navigate to the main menu and choose the appropriate application.☞ As soon as the Chart Maintenance program running in the background needs an operator action, amessage is shown.Main SelectionProtocol WindowAction area
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsH-2 Data Maintenance of the Electronic ChartsH MAINTENANCE.fm / 10.11.11 H-7NACOS Platinum2.3 Chart Maintenance Application AreaThis screen shows an overview of the installed charts and their states. Depending on the settings of theMode in Main Selection, the cells appear with a coloured border. See section 2.8 for details.The Pan and Zoom control can be used in the same way as described in see chapter A - 4.1 on pageA-34.The Actual List of Cells (or permits) shows detailed information about the kind of cells or permitsselected in the Display expander. It can be chosen how the data are to be sorted (ascending/descending) according to the details. Click the column header of the appropriate detail to sort accordingto it.If Mode is set to Maintenance and Function is set to Delete Cell(s)/Permit(s), the list of cells /permits to be deleted is opened in the top right corner.Pan and Zoom ControlInformation area:Protocol and/or actual list of cells/permitsAction area:List of cells/permits to be deleted
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsH-2 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts H MAINTENANCE.fm / 10.11.11H-82.4 Update of Charts from MediaInsert your latest update media, either CD ROM or USB stick or portable USB drive. It may be either abase update (all chart cells) or a weekly update (a few chart cells only).Open the Functions menu from the side bar.Check Chart database, set to ENC or ARCS dependingon the charts which you want to update.Select Mode, the default setting is Display, set toUpdate. Once the mode has been set to Update theFunctions menu is modified with subgroups for Sourceand Destination as shown in the next screenshot.Select the Functions, the default setting is ChooseFunction, set to Update ENC Database or to UpdateARCS Database.Select the Source for the update. It could be either a CDROM, a removable USB Stick, or USB drive. In theexample here a CD ROM has been selected. If the mediahas a label, it is shown, here it is V01X01 (another work-station (MFD) may be selected as well, but only, if onthat workstation the update has already beenperformed).Check the Selected Path. Platinum will display anychart data laying on top of the directory automatically. Ifnothing is found, open Browse to search manually forthe subdirectory with the chart data.The Destinations entry is set per default to the presentworkstation (this one), where the update is carried out.No other selection is possible and required.Press Start to activate the update if it is not startedautomatically.A protocol of the update is shown in the bottom of themain application area. Message windows as described onthe next page will appear in the overview chart to informabout the progress and any obstacles. During the update you will be asked to insert one after the other the base media (i.e. ARCS RC 1 to RC11), and after that the update media again. Just follow the instructions given on the screen.Some of the above steps like selecting the Update Mode will be started automatically if an appropriateupdate CD is inserted. Just follow the instructions on the screen.
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsH-2 Data Maintenance of the Electronic ChartsH MAINTENANCE.fm / 10.11.11 H-9NACOS Platinum2.5 Messages during Chart UpdateENC or ARCS Data Exchange Set foundIf an update has been performed before and the media is insertedagain, it is not started automatically but the Chart Update Wizardappears. It informs the user that chart data are available on themedia. Select either Show Contents or Update and the procedureis continued as before.Base Media are NeededIf the weekly update comprises informationfor cells, which have not been installedbefore on your MFD, the base media forthose countries, which are listed in thebottom of the protocol window have to beinserted. In case of ARCS you are asked toinsert one of the base media CDs (RC1 toRC11).Insert Next Base MediaDuring the update process for the basemedia this message will appear if anotherbase media (CD or other) with theremaining base cells has to be inserted . Update Cells can not be InstalledIf an update media is inserted andbase cells are still missing or havenot been updated to the previousupdate, a warning is given. Loadthe corresponding base cells. Update another MFD in the NetworkEnter the maintenance menu on that MFD (workstation), whichshall be updated. Follow the instructions as given before.Select as a source the workstation, which has been updatedalready from an update media. Start the procedure by clickingStart.
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsH-2 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts H MAINTENANCE.fm / 10.11.11H-102.6 Display Charts which are on a Media or a MFD (workstation) Insert your media, either CD ROM or USB stick or portable USB drive as shown under Update of Chartsfrom Media. If your charts to be examined are already stored on the internal drive of your MFD oranother MFD, just skip this step and continue. Open the Functions menu from the side bar.Verify that Chart database is set to the correct chart type, ENC orARCS.Verify that Mode is set to its default setting (Display), just leave itto Display. Select Functions, the default setting is Choose Function, set toone of the shown options.Select Apply on to choose the drive (this MFD, anotherconnected MFD, CD drive, USB stick, etc.) where your chart datato be examined are stored.Check the Selected Path. Platinum will display any chart data laying on top of the directory automati-cally. If nothing is found, open Browse to search manually for the subdirectory with the chart data.Click on Start to confirm the settings and list up the cells or permits in a new tab of the protocol window.At the same time the corresponding cells are marked with green squares in the world chart. Dependingon your selection the installed cells or the installed permits will be shown in the list.
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsH-2 Data Maintenance of the Electronic ChartsH MAINTENANCE.fm / 10.11.11 H-11NACOS Platinum2.7 Maintenance of Charts on your MFD (workstation)Open the Functions menu from the side bar.Verify that Chart Database is set to the correct chart type, ENC orARCS.Set Mode, to Maintenance. Select Functions, the default setting is Choose Function, set toone of the shown options.Destination is set per default to the harddisc of your MFD. It cannot be changed. Maintenance can only be performed for this MFD.Click Start to activate the maintenance proce-dure. Depending on your selection the cells,permits, or certificates are listed on the righttop side of the screen and can be deleted indi-vidually. It is recommended to delete all thosecells, permits, and certificates which havebeen expired or are no longer valid.Further-on the installed cells can be verified.The result is displayed in the protocol window.
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsH-2 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts H MAINTENANCE.fm / 10.11.11H-122.8 Display ExpanderThe display expander is used to set up thedisplay of the cells and for information aboutthe number of installed cells.If an alarm indicator, a small triangle, isdisplayed in front of one of the chart types,an eror has occurred when the appropriatedata have been checked.It is a good idea to do this for each kind ofnavigational purpose charts one by one inorder to decrease the amount of cells to bechecked.Colouring byThe cells displayed in the overview are shown with a coloured frame. Depending onthe settings in Colouring by, the cell status or the licensing status are concernedfor the choice of the colour.Cell StatusSource of LicensingRed An error has occurred while the data have been checkedGreen Chart is okayYellow The license of the chart has been checked unsuccesfullyGreen Chart is okayAlarm indications
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsH-2 Data Maintenance of the Electronic ChartsH MAINTENANCE.fm / 10.11.11 H-13NACOS Platinum2.9 Backup/Restore of Map DataThe user-defined Routes and also the User Symbols can be saved to devices like CD-ROM or USBmemory sticks. This makes it possible to transfer those data to other systems or replacement modules.In order to backup routes or user definedsymbols, follow these instructions:1. In the tabs of the expander, chosewhether to backup Routes or UserSym2. In the Function group, select whetherthe data are to be backed up orrestored. (The following example refersto the backup-function. The restore-function works similar, but the Archivegroup is then inactive.3. Under Backup to: choose the devicewhich is to be used as backup/restoremedia.4. Select the path and, if an existing file isto be used, choose the file in which thedata are to be stored. Click Browse toopen a window in which the backup fileand/or path can be selected-or-5. If a new archive file is to be added,check New Archive and enter thedesired name.6. Click on Start: Backup <data>.(<data> represents the chosen type ofdata, Routes or User Sym)Browser window which works similar to the WINDOWS Explorer
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsH-2 Data Maintenance of the Electronic Charts H MAINTENANCE.fm / 10.11.11H-147. Confirm the security advice clicking Start.8. If the backup file already exists, the replace-ment of this file must be confirmed.9. A message window is shown after the backuphas been finished.10. If it is desired, the backup progress can bestopped by clicking on Abort in the tabwindow. The abortion must be confirmed.
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsH-3 Manual ENC Update EditorH MAINTENANCE.fm / 10.11.11 H-15NACOS Platinum3 Manual ENC Update EditorIt is possible to edit the ENC charts and only these by means of a chart editor. The edited elements ofthe chart are stored as a separate file. The ENC chart file itself is not modified. If the manually updatedchart is opened, the corresponding chart is displayed and in addition to the ENC Manual Update.Opening the Chart EditorIn Super Home click on Nautical Charts.The Overview of the installed charts is opened. This may take some time, because the database ischecked before the charts are displayed.If no installed charts are displayed (no rectangles appear on the screen), open the Functions expanderand set Apply On to MFDn (this one).Fig. H / 1 Nautical Charts Editor - OverviewUse the Pan and Zoom control and/or the Set Chart Center-function in order to navigate to the cellthat is to be updated. As already known, the chart can be shifted using the drag-and-drop functionalityby means of the More button.
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsH-3 Manual ENC Update Editor H MAINTENANCE.fm / 10.11.11H-16As soon as the desired cell is displayed, click it with More and choose Manual ENC Update Editor >Select ENC Cell > and click the cell that is to be updated.Fig. H / 2 Selecting a cellThe cell is displayed then. If it is not already opened, open the Updates expander.The cell and its chart data can be updated now.
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsH-3 Manual ENC Update EditorH MAINTENANCE.fm / 10.11.11 H-17NACOS PlatinumClick on Session Setup in the Update expander andenter the Manual ENC Update Session Data. Then,click on Set. A click on Clear will erase all entered data,Cancel will close the window without any further action.In the editor window the entries for the categories ofobjects which can be edited are now active.A click on View Cell will display the chosen cell withmaximum size, so that editing is as easy as possible.Whenever the display of the cell has been resized orshifted, a click on View Cell will display the cell againwith maximum size.A new object can be placed now or existing objects canbe modified. This works in the same way as the usage ofUser Symbols. See chapter A - 8 on page A-83 fordetails. The update session can be ended clicking onQuit.All actions are stored in the session log, as long as thesession has not been ended by a click on Save and Exit. Once an update action has been carried out,the control Quit changes its name to Undo and Abort. Using this control will lead to abortion of theupdate process without changes.If the operatior activates another application like RADAR or ECDIS while the manual ENC update is done,the performed actions of the manual update do not get lost, in fact, all alterations will still be presentwhen the operator returns to the manual update editor.To view the session log, click on Show Session Log.
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsH-4 Hardware Maintenance H MAINTENANCE.fm / 10.11.11H-184 Hardware MaintenanceIf these operating instructions require you to remove safety systems for maintenance work or repair, besure to reinstall them after finishing work. Only remove safety devices if this is necessary for the main-tenance work or repair. This particularly applies to covers and ground cables.4.1 Periodical Checks4.1.1 Limited-Lifetime DevicesWithin the radar system there are some devices or parts of units which have a limited lifetime. Thedevices and their presumed lifetime are listed below. It must be considered that these devices shall bechecked periodically and exchanged if neccessary.☞ For more information about the change of components like magnetron or toothed belts please referto the technical documentation Table H / 1 Limited-Lifetime Devices4.2 Check of the Colour ReproductionThe colour reproduction produced by the monitors must be correct. In the case of doubt and once peryear, the monitor performance must be checked based on the Chart1 presentation. See chapter 3.3 onpage B-14 for details.HIGH VOLTAGE!DANGER OF FATAL INJURIESNEVER assume that a circuit is dead – Always check it for safety’s sake! Contact with live parts can cause serious or fatal burns and inner injuries by electrocution. This particularly applies to the Outstation cabinets which may contain components to which 230 VAC or 400 VAC are applied.Capacitors and tubes can store dangerous voltages for several hours, even when they have been disconnected from the supply voltage.Device Approx Lifetime ProcedureMagnetron X-Band ~6000 - 8000hS-Band ~9000 - 16000h Monthly carry out the check of the performance monitor as described. See chapter H - 1 on page H-3 for detais.Toothed belts 12 monthsEvery 12 months or when the magnetron is exchanged, change the toothed belt as described in the technical documen-tation.Every time the gear box is opened.Check for mechanical damages as fissures or fractures on the surface and for visible parts of the weft, especially at the edges. If such damages are visible, the belts must be exchanged.
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsH-5 SW Version and UpdatesH MAINTENANCE.fm / 10.11.11 H-19NACOS Platinum5 SW Version and Updates5.1 SW VersionThe SW version can be accessed from the Super Home page by opening the Menu on bottom left sideand clicking on About.The About Information Window shows data as follows:- Designation of the equipment with NACOS Platinum series- Machine name of the display electronics, i.e. MFD 01- SW version number and built number of the application SW package for the display electronics- SW version number and if applicable built number of the connected data processing unit DPU 2010or DCU 20105.2 SW UpdatesSoftware updates can only be carried out by authorized service personell. For more information withregards to software updates of ECDIS Systems or complete NACOS Systems please contact:NACOS_update@sam-electronics.de.
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsH-5 SW Version and Updates H MAINTENANCE.fm / 10.11.11H-20
ALARMS
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsV-1 General InformationV Alarms.fm / 10.11.11 V-3NACOS Platinum1 General InformationIn NACOS Platinum all alarms will generally be indicated in the same way in all cases. Both alarms fromthe automation system and alarms from the navigation system are shown in the same place and in thesame way but their availability on the different MFDs is depending on their specific configuration.It has been chosen to indicate the different states of an alarm by different symbols in dedicated colors.Furthermore, the alarms have different audible indications emitted by the buzzer which is installed inevery MFD.The symbols will be used in the following manner:- Placed in front of the alarm line in Alarm Lists- Placed in front of the label in the permanent area ofRADAR and ECDIS as status indicators on other places ofthe HMI.If the automation system is configured for the MFD, symbols will also be used as follows:- As a separate symbol in Mimic Diagrams for binary alarms. (e.g. used for a level switch in a tank).- As a symbol placed behind the Unit of an analogue value displayed on a Mimic Diagram (e.g. usedfor display of a temperature with a limit).- As a symbol placed beside a Function Block symbol (indicating the state of machinery components,e.g. pumps, valves, generators etc.Alarms and Warnings can be accompanied by a sound signal. The possible sounds emitted by the buzzerare as follows:For warnings with priority 3 the sound can be deactivated by the operator (see xyz).Sequence Meaning DescriptionAlarm (Priority 1) Permanent toneWarning (Priority 2) tone (1 sec), pause (1 sec), tone (1 sec), pause (7 sec)as warning(s) but suppressableWarning (Priority 3)......
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsV-1 General Information V Alarms.fm / 10.11.11V-41.1 Colour code for the alarm indications:Examples for alarm indications:Fig. V / 1 Alarm IndicationsGreen Indication of an exceeded limit that shall not raise an alarm (Alarm priority 4).Yellow Input from the process is disconnected in the software, and the value is entered manually by the operatorYellow Incidents and (pre)warnings, usually alarm priority 3. For alarms of this prority, the acoustic alarm can be switched offOrange Warnings and alarms that require immediate action, usually alarm priority 2Red A serious event that has not been solved yet, usually alarm priority 1Yellow & red A value that had been entered manually by the operator has caused an alarm priority 1
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsV-1 General InformationV Alarms.fm / 10.11.11 V-5NACOS PlatinumA flashing symbol for any alarm means that this alarm has not been acknowledged yet. A steady symbolindicates an acknowledged status of an alarm, but that the cause for the alarm is still present.An alarm can be of the following types:State Symbol Explanation/RemarksNormal - No errors in hardware/software and no limits exceededDevice fail Error in the Control and Supervision system, the indication is invalidSensor fail The value received from the sensor is outside the legal limitsManual Cut Out Alarm function is switched off by the operator. Alarm will never occur even if limits are exceeded. Manual Cut Out is normally not used for Function BlocksEvent Indication of an exceeded limit that shall not raise an alarm (Alarm priority 4). This case is normally not indicated in the Mimic Diagram. In some cases an indication for a binary input is displayed (e.g. Heater switched on)Alarm priority 3 Alarm with lowest priority. The alarm is indicated by a triangle (like a traffic sign) in yellow. Inside the triangle the alarm priority is indicated by the number 3, to improve readability for people with color blindness (since prio 1 and 2 are also triangles)Alarm priority 2 Alarm with middle priority. The alarm is indicated by a triangle (like a traffic sign) in orange. Inside the triangle the alarm priority is indicated by the number 2, to improve readability for people with color blindness (since prio 1 and 3 are also triangles)Alarm priority 1Alarm with highest priority. The alarm is indicated by a triangle (like a traffic sign) in red. (red is mandatory for highest priority alarm). Inside the triangle the alarm priority is indicated by the number 1, to improve readability for people with color blindness (since prio 2 and 3 are also triangles)Manual Set Input from the process is disconnected in the software, and the value is entered manually by the operator. In this case a blue circle is added behind the actual alarm symbol, and for analogue values the font is exchanged by a script font. For Function Blocks it is possible to make "Manual Set" for both the alarm and the process feedback, so you may have a blue circle behind the alarm icon and/or behind the state symbolManual Set Alarm priority 3 This is the same as the Manual Set described above. For this value an alarm with priority 3 has occurred and is now indicated.Manual SetAlarm priority 2 This is the same as the Manual Set described above. For this value an alarm with priority 2 has occurred and is now indicated.Manual SetAlarm priority 1 This is the same as the Manual Set described above. For this value an alarm with priority 1 has occurred and is now indicated.
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsV-1 General Information V Alarms.fm / 10.11.11V-61.2 Overview of the alarm window☞ If the alarm list is opened by the Alarm List icon (see above) or by a click on the Alarms Tab, italways shows the complete list of alarms, warnings and indications, independent of the previouslymade selections of filters or priorities in the list. The list then shows the newest alarm entry at thebottom of the alarm window.Alarm List.To open, click on this icon.Alarm list in opened state.Oldest un- acknowledged alarm with priority indica-tionVisual indication for the hornButtons for reactions to alarms displayed in the listAlarm list, the first alarm has been selected by the operator.Number of alarms, alarms eight to eleven are visible in the list.Newest Alarm. See 1.2.1 on page V-7 for details.Alarm list scrollbarAlarm Line: (The alarm with highest priority is indicated here)Alarms List:Buttons for operator reac-tions to the indicated alarmVisual indication for the horn Selection and indication of listed alarm criteriaList Criteria:By means of the list criteria, the clearness of the list can be improved. Only the chosen criteria/subcriteria of alarms will be displayedUnit and application that have origi-nated the alarm, alarm number and statusTo show the alarm-source and state, click on the line
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsV-1 General InformationV Alarms.fm / 10.11.11 V-7NACOS Platinum1.2.1 Example of an alarmAdditionally to the alarm designation, supplemental information are displayed for each active alarm in thelist. In this example, MFD M01 has originated the alarm: The alarm number is M01AI061, where AI ist the indication for the AIS unit, 061 is the internal faultnumber. See list of alarms for further information.The status is Alarm, which means that the alarm is still active (in alarm state).Status indications can be for example:- Normal- Alarm- Sens Fail (Sensor Failure)- Dev. Fail (Device Failure)- Comm. Error (Communication Error)- Ch. Error (Channel Error)- SW. Error (Software Error)Date and time of first occurence of the alarmDesignation of the alarmMFD-Id, Application Id and Alarm number Status
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsV-1 General Information V Alarms.fm / 10.11.11V-8
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsV-2 Alarm ManagementV Alarms.fm / 10.11.11 V-9NACOS Platinum2 Alarm Management
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsV-2 Alarm Management V Alarms.fm / 10.11.11V-102.1 Behaviour when an Alarm comes upWhenever an alarm is raised, the processing is a two-step action:1. Switch off the acoustic alarm, if there is one. Use the Stop Horn button in the GUI or press the button on the keyboard, if it is available.☞ Some alarms do not trigger the acoustic alarm. This depends on the settings made in the configu-ration database of the Integration Manager.☞ Some alarms can only be switched off at the MFD that has originated the alarm. For example, aTrackpilot alarm can only be acknowledged at the MFD that is set as Trackpilot Master.2. Immediately obtain information about the causes of the alarm or warning, about the system stateand about possible system reactions, and - if necessary - immediately perform all necessary actionsfor the avoidance of possible danger.3. Remove the cause of the alarm or warning: If an alarm has occurred due to a cause that can beremoved, that cause must be removed as quickly as possible; see also section V - 2.2: "List ofAlarms". Alarms with priority 4 disappear when the cause disappears. Acknowledgement is thenunnecessary. Alarms with priority 1, 2 and 3 must be acknowledged in any case.4. The alarms with priority 1 and many alarms of priority 2 and 3 must be acknowledged if the situa-tion allows or requires such acknowledgement. There are two possibilities to acknowledge alarms:- Click on Acknowledge in the alarm line - Click on Acknowledge All in the heading of the Alarm listIf alarms or warnings are also distributed to other items of equipment within the system, or if the systemdeviates from the behaviour described above, e.g.- if the alarm cannot be acknowledged at all or throughout the entire system, or- if acknowledgement causes something to be initiated or enabled, or- if an acknowledged alarm is repeated for as long as the cause of the alarm continues to exist.These situations are mentioned in section V - 2.2: "List of Alarms". Removing acknowledged alarms from the list is done automatically by the system, in case the alarmreason is no longer valid, or the application or operating mode has been switched off.StopBuzzer
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsV-2 Alarm ManagementV Alarms.fm / 10.11.11 V-11NACOS Platinum2.2 List of AlarmsThis chapter lists and describes all available pre-defined alarms, warnings and indications of the naviga-tion system, i.e. Radar, ECDIS and the optional Trackpilot, as well as the AIS and the optional VDR. Legend:In front of each entry in the alarm list the priority is shown with the respective symbol ... . Indications (events) are marked by the symbol on the screen, but not in the list on the next pages.
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsV-2 Alarm Management V Alarms.fm / 10.11.11V-122.2.1 Navigation Sensor AlarmsThis chapter describes the navigation sensor alarms available in the system. The main navigation sensorsused for the heading, speed and position instruments are monitored depending on the “sensor selectionmode”. Those sensors which are available twice or more in the installation can be supported by an auto-matic selection mode.- If the selection mode is AUTO the switching over to another sensor of the same type is donewithout any alarm or warning. In AUTO mode the switch over to a manual sensor (Manual Speed or Manual Position) is onlyaccompanied by an alarm if the manual data have not been set before.- If the Manual selection is chosen the switching over to the backup sensor must be done manuallyafter the respective alarm or warning has been given.In the meantime (until a new sensor has been selected) the system is using the last valid values ofthe disturbed or faulty sensor which produced the alarm.It is required to perform the switch over to the new sensor a soon as possible, but not before itsdata have been checked for plausibility and correctness.Note:- Depending on the status of the navigation sensors it may be possible that selected display or oper-ation modes of the system are no longer available or may not be allowed by the approval authori-ties.- Details are given below as required in the explanations to the different sensor alarms.The automatic selection mode is the default setting after start or restart of the system.In any case (in manual or automatic selection mode) the set data for the sensors running in manual mode must be checked regularly and a real sensor must be selected as soon as possible.
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsV-2 Alarm ManagementV Alarms.fm / 10.11.11 V-13NACOS PlatinumGround Speed InvalidThe selected COG/SOG speed sensor is sending invalid data. Another speed sensor will have to beselected by the operator. At present, the speed that was last sent as the valid speed is being used.Dashes are shown in the speed display field.Special features: The alarm is distributed over the entire system. Acknowledgement is possible onany MFD.Ground Speed TimeoutData are no longer being received from the selected COG/SOG speed sensor. Another speed sensorwill have to be selected by the operator. At present, the speed that was last sent as the valid speedis being used,-or-The DCU connected to the system has failed. Acknowledgement is possible on anyindicator.Special features: The alarm is distributed over the entire system. Acknowledgement is possible onany indicator.Ground Speed ValidThe speed sensor which had given the Ground Speed Invalid or Ground Speed Timeout alarmis again sending valid data.Special features: The warning is distributed over the entire system. Acknowledgement is possibleon any MFD.Heading Invalid 1) The heading sensor system has failed, or is reporting incorrect data,-or-The DCU connected to the system has failed.Special feature: The alarm is distributed over the entire system. Acknowledgement is possible onany MFD.Remedy: Check the compass system, the signal transmission and the DCU.When the TRACKPILOT is in an active steering mode, this alarm is repeated as TP Heading SensorFault, which can be acknowledged finally on the TRACKPILOT Master only.Heading Timeout 1)Data are no longer being received from the selected heading sensor or from the DCU. Anotherheading sensor will have to be selected by the operator if available.Special feature: The alarm is distributed over the entire system. Acknowledgement is possible onany MFD.When the TRACKPILOT is in an active steering mode, this alarm is repeated as TP Heading SensorFault, which can be acknowledged finally on the TRACKPILOT Master only.1) All display objects and operating possibilities for which the heading information is required are no longer shownor are inactive. If the cause of the alarm is not corrected within 30 seconds, the tracked targets are deleted onthe radar system.
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsV-2 Alarm Management V Alarms.fm / 10.11.11V-14Heading ValidThe compass system is again sending valid data.Special feature: The alarm is distributed over the entire system. Acknowledgement is possible onany MFD.Low Position Quality 1) The selected position sensor has reported a greater position-deviation than is usual for this type ofsensor.Special feature: The warning is distributed over the entire system.Remedy: Check the position sensor; select some other position sensor.New POSN Sensor SelectedThe sensor selection for the connected position sensors is operating in AUTO mode and the previ-ously used sensor is invalid or data are no longer received via the sensor interface. The new selectedsensor is indicated with its data, status and mode in the position instrument display.☞ If you want to use another sensor than the automatically selected one, you must go to manualselection mode by a click on the required sensor in the position sensor menu. A reactivation of AUTOmode can only be done by the operator (Click on AUTO in the menu).New HDG Sensor SelectedThe sensor selection for the connected heading sensors is operating in AUTO mode and the previ-ously used sensor is invalid or data are no longer received via the sensor interface. The new selectedsensor is indicated with its data, status and mode in the heading instrument display.☞ If you want to use another sensor than the automatically selected one, you must go to manualselection mode by a click on the required sensor in the heading sensor menu. A reactivation of AUTOmode can only be done by the operator (Click on AUTO in the menu).New SOG Sensor SelectedThe sensor selection for the connected SOG sensors is operating in AUTO mode and the previouslyused sensor is invalid or data are no longer received via the sensor interface. The new selectedsensor is indicated with its data, status and mode in the SOG instrument display.☞ If you want to use another sensor than the automatically selected one, you must go to manualselection mode by a click on the required sensor in the SOG sensor menu. A reactivation of AUTOmode can only be done by the operator (Click on AUTO in the menu).New STW Sensor SelectedThe sensor selection for the connected STW sensors is operating in AUTO mode and the previouslyused sensor is invalid or data are no longer received via the sensor interface. The new selectedsensor is indicated with its data, status and mode in the STW instrument display.☞ If you want to use another sensor than the automatically selected one, you must go to manualselection mode by a click on the required sensor in the STW sensor menu. A reactivation of AUTOmode can only be done by the operator (Click on AUTO in the menu).1) This alarm can only appear if activated on service level; it is required for ships with DNV NAUT-AW approval.
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsV-2 Alarm ManagementV Alarms.fm / 10.11.11 V-15NACOS PlatinumNo Valid Position SensorThe position sensor selection is working in AUTO mode and has temporarily switched to dead reck-oning (DR) mode,-or-The DCU connected to the system has failed. Acknowledgement is possible on anyindicator.Special feature: As soon as possible the system will automatically switch to a valid position sensorand deactivate this warning.Remedy: Check/repair the the connected position sensors.No WGS84 Position in UseThe selected position sensor- is no longer reporting the WGS84 position datum or- is reporting another position datum than WGS84.As a consequence the indicated and plotted positions could have deviations to the WGS84 system.Remedy: Check the position sensor and the data sentences transmitted to NACOS. Ensure correcttransmission of the position datum sentence.Position InvalidThe selected position sensor is sending invalid position data. Another position sensor will have to beselected by the operator. During the transition period, the system determines the position by deadreckoning (i.e. is internally temporarily switched to Estimated Position).Special features: The alarm is distributed over the entire system. Acknowledgement is possible onany MFD.Position Timeout Data are no longer being received from the selected position sensor,-or-The DCU connected to the system has failed.Another position sensor will have to be selected by the operator. During the transition period, thesystem determines the position by dead reckoning.Special features: The alarm is distributed over the entire system. Acknowledgement is possible onany MFD.Position ValidThe position sensor which had given the Position Invalid or Position Timeout alarm is againsending valid data again.Special features: The warning is distributed over the entire system. Acknowledgement is possibleon any MFD.
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsV-2 Alarm Management V Alarms.fm / 10.11.11V-16Redundant Gyro DiffersThe difference between the headings of the selected heading sensor and of the redundant headingsensor exceeds a specified alarm limit.Special features: This warning can occur simultaneously on more than one of the system's itemsof equipment.Remedy: - Check the available heading sensors, their mode and dataRedundant Gyro LostNo valid heading is received from the redundant heading sensor. The heading monitoring no longertakes place while the cause of the warning still exists.Redundant Position DiffersThe difference between the positions of the selected position sensor and of the redundant positionsensor exceeds a specified alarm limit.Special features: This warning can occur simultaneously on more than one of the system's itemsof equipment.Remedy: - Check the available position sensors, their mode and dataRedundant Position LostNo valid position is received from the redundant position sensor. The position monitoring no longertakes place while the cause of the warning still exists.Water Speed Invalid The selected STW speed sensor is sending invalid data. Another water speed sensor will have to beselected by the operator. At present, the speed that was last sent as the valid speed is being used.Special features: The alarm is distributed over the entire system. Acknowledgement is possible onany MFD.Water Speed Timeout Data are no longer being received from the selected water speed sensor or from the DCU. Anotherwater speed sensor will have to be selected by the operator. At present, the speed that was lastsent as the valid speed is being used.Special features: The alarm is distributed over the entire system. Acknowledgement is possible onany MFD.Water Speed ValidThe speed sensor which had given the Water Speed Invalid or Water Speed Timeout alarm isagain sending valid data.Special features: The warning is distributed over the entire system. Acknowledgement is possibleon any MFD.
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsV-2 Alarm ManagementV Alarms.fm / 10.11.11 V-17NACOS Platinum2.2.2 RADAR AlarmsACQ Zone OverflowA target has been acquired automatically in the guard zone. It cannot be tracked, because themaximum number of targets 1) are already being tracked. Remedy: Check the acquisition/guard zone; delete targets.ARPA TGT Capacity Limit100% of the maximum number of ARPA targets are being tracked.Remedy: Delete at least one unimportant target.Check ARPA Target Capacity 95% of the maximum number of ARPA targets are being tracked.Remedy: Delete at least one unimportant targetDangerous TargetThe target situated at the displayed red flashing symbol has become a dangerous target, becausethe CPA and TCPA values have become smaller than the limits that were set for them.Lost Target 2) The tracked target situated at the displayed lost target symbol has got lost.Special feature: For this warning it is possible to switch off the acoustic signal.Magnetron Fault The selected transceiver is reporting magnetron overcurrent.Special feature: Acknowledgement is performed by switching the radar over to stand-by.Remedy: Switch the transceiver over to stand-by, and then switch it back to radar operation. If thewarning occurs repeatedly, request service.No Antenna AzimuthThe azimuth angle information of the antenna is missing.Remedy:- If the antenna is not rotating: check the ship's mains and/or the antenna fuse or circuit-breaker. If the antenna is rotating: request service.- Select another radar transceiverNo HeadmarkerThe antenna's headmarker signal is missing.Remedy:1) ARPA targets and AIS targets together2) For AIS targets the Lost Target warning can be disabled in the Settings - Target menu.
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsV-2 Alarm Management V Alarms.fm / 10.11.11V-18- If the antenna is not rotating: check the ship's mains and/or the antenna fuse or circuit-breaker. If the antenna is rotating: request service.- Select another radar transceiverNo Radar VideoThe system is in a faulty condition, such that the radar video cannot be generated.Remedy:- Check the radar transceiver- Check the antenna- Select another radar transceiverRequest service.No Trigger The radar transmission trigger is missing, the radar video cannot be displayed.Remedy: - Check the radar transceiver.- Select another radar transceiverTarget AUTO-AcquiredA target which is not yet being tracked has been acquired automatically in the acquisition/guardzone. TGT Entered Guard ZoneA target which is already being tracked has entered the acquisition/guard zone.
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsV-2 Alarm ManagementV Alarms.fm / 10.11.11 V-19NACOS Platinum2.2.3 AIS AlarmsDepending on the type of AIS connected to the system, not all alarms and warnings listed below maybe supported.Nevertheless all AIS alarms which are implemented in the NACOS Platinum are listed here completely.The AIS related target alarms and warnings are documented in the chapter Radar Alarms, they are notrepeated here.The following warnings and alarms are only available in the system, if an AIS receiver is connected.AIS Ch.Man. Not AcceptedThe settings made for the channel management have not been accepted by the system.Remedy: Check the settings.AIS Check TGT Capacity 95% of the maximum number of AIS targets are being tracked.Remedy: Delete at least one unimportant AIS target.AIS External POSN LostThe AIS system does not receive a valid position sensor information and falls back to its internalposition sensor.Remedy: Check the sensor and the cabling.AIS General FailureThe AIS has stopped the transmission caused by an internal fault.Remedy: Call service as soon as possible. The AIS system must be exchanged probably.AIS GPS Antenna FailureThe GPS antenna of the AIS does not work correctly.Remedy: Check the GPS antenna and the antenna cabling (short circuit or missing contact at theconnectors). No immediate action is required, AIS is normally fed by an external GPS receiver fromthe integrated bridge system.AIS GPS ANT Short Circ.The internal check of the GPS receiver has detected a short circuit in the coax wire between theantenna and the receiver.Remedy: Check the GPS antenna cable.AIS GPS Receiver FaultThe GPS receiver of the AIS has detected an internal malfunction.Remedy: Call service at the next possible harbour. The transmitter is still operable, your vessel wilstill be visible for other ships, but you might not see other AIS tragets.
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsV-2 Alarm Management V Alarms.fm / 10.11.11V-20AIS TGT Capacity Limit100% of the maximum number of acquired AIS targets are being tracked.Remedy: Delete at least one unimportant AIS target.AIS New Safety MessageThe AIS has received a safety message.The safety message can be read under > Tools > Target > Message.AIS No Valid COGThe AIS system has no valid course over ground information.Remedy: Check the connected sensor and cabling. (Typically the COG information from an inte-grated bridge system which is derived from a GPS sensor, the AIS will continue to work but willtransmit less information to other ships.)AIS No Valid HeadingThe AIS system has no valid heading information from the sensor.Remedy: Check the heading sensor. (Typically the heading information from an integrated bridgesystem which is derived from the gyro, the AIS will continue to work but will transmit less informa-tion to other ships.)AIS No Valid PositionThe AIS system has no valid position information from internal position sensorRemedy: Check the cabling and the antenna of the internal GPS sensor. (Typically the positioninformation from an integrated bridge system which is derived from a GPS sensor, the AIS willcontinue to work with its own sensor, but the position, which is sent out to other ships might notbe as accurate as before)AIS No Valid ROTThe AIS has no valid rate of turn information from the sensor.Remedy: Check the sensor and the cabling. (Typically the rate of turn information from an inte-grated bridge system which is derived from the gyro, the AIS will continue to work but will transmitless information to other ships)AIS No Valid SOGThe AIS has no valid speed over ground information.Remedy: Check selected speed sensor. (Typically the SOG information from an integrated bridgesystem which is derived from a GPS sensor, the AIS will continue to work with its own sensor, butthe speed, which is sent out to other ships might not be as accurate as before)AIS OfflineRemedy: Check the AIS system. It might be possible to eliminate the fault by switching the voltagesupply to the AIS electronics unit off and then on again at the ship's mains.
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsV-2 Alarm ManagementV Alarms.fm / 10.11.11 V-21NACOS PlatinumAIS Oper. Unit Offline The indicator electronic does not communicate with the AIS electronics unit. The AIS continuesoperating.Remedy: Check the cabling and connection between RADAR and AIS system.AIS RX Ch. A MalfunctionThe AIS stopped the transmission on the channel A.Remedy: The AIS system must be exchanged.AIS RX Ch. B MalfunctionThe AIS stopped the transmission on the channel B.Remedy: The AIS system must be exchanged.AIS RX DSC MalfunctionThe AIS stopped the transmission on the channel 70.Remedy: The AIS system must be exchanged.AIS TX MalfunctionThe AIS system stopped transmission.Remedy: Check the AIS system. Check the antenna and the antenna cabling (short circuit ormissing contact at the connectors). Call the service at the next possible harbour, be aware that yourship might not be visible for other ships as an AIS target.AIS VSWR Limit ExceededThe AIS system continues operation: The VSWR (voltage standing wave ratio) checked by the AISis out of range. The distance from where your own ship is visible for other ships a an AIS target issignificantly reduced to a very few miles only.Remedy: Check the AIS system. Check of the AIS UHF antenna, antenna cabling and connectors.
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsV-2 Alarm Management V Alarms.fm / 10.11.11V-222.2.4 ECDIS Alarms Approach to WaypointThe ship is approaching a critical point on the pre-planned track, for example the WOP (wheel overpoint), which is indicating the approach to the next course change manoeuvre on the route.Special feature: This alarm can be activated or suppressed on the Alarms expander under ECDISAlerts with the selection of Critical point on route alarm.Area w. Special ConditionThe chart monitoring detected an area with special conditions (for example a user made DangerHighlight Area) ahead of the own ship´s position.☞ For this alarm it is possible to select wether it is supposed to be an alarm with priority 1 or an indi-cation.Area w. Special Condition☞ For this indication it is also possible to select wether it is supposed to be an alarm with priority 1or an indication.Crossing a DangerAn obstruction, a wreck, rock with depth below the user selected safety depth or Aids to Navigationor a user made Safety Line will be crossed soon or is touched by the guard sector set for the ECDIS..Crossing Safety ContourThe ship or its guard sector has actually crossed a depth limit for which this alarm has been acti-vated in the Alarms > ECDIS Alerts dialog.Deviation from Route The current position of the ship deviates from the planned position according to the route that hasbeen computed by the Route Editor. The limits of the cross track deviation can be altered in theXTD LIM column of the Route Editor.
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsV-2 Alarm ManagementV Alarms.fm / 10.11.11 V-23NACOS Platinum2.2.5 Trackpilot AlarmsThe following list of alarms, warnings and indications contains all alarms for all operating modes(Heading, Course, Track) of the TRACKPILOT. In systems with Heading mode only, alarms of the Courseand Track mode are not initiated.TP Astern Speed The TRACKPILOT is in the activated state and the selected speed sensor is producing negative(astern) speed data (which the TRACKPILOT cannot process).WARNING: While this alarm is present, the steering gear is not being driven by the TRACKPILOT.When the TP Astern Speed alarm appears, it is necessary to immediately change to some otherspeed sensor or to switch over to manual steering.Special feature: The alarm cannot be acknowledged. It is repeated and disappears when its causehas been eliminated.TP Backup Navigator AlarmThe TRACKPILOT Alarm signal was generated.Causes for generating the TRACKPILOT Alarm signal: See 2.2.6 on page V-32.Special feature: As long as the TP Backup Navigator Alarm alarm has not been acknowledged,the TRACKPILOT Alarm signal remains active.TP Change Position SensorWhile the system is in Track mode,- the selected position sensor has not transferred any valid data for a longer period, or - a switch-over has taken place to a position sensor which is not transmitting valid data, or- a switch-over has taken place to a position sensor which is not permitted as a continuoussensor for Track mode.- or -While a position sensor is being used which is not permitted as a continuous sensor for Track mode,a switch-over to Track mode has taken place.Special features: Until the cause of the alarm has been eliminated, the alarm is repeated after 1minute. The TP Track Mode Fault alarm appears after 10 minutes if the cause of the alarm hasnot yet been eliminatedRemedy: Select a position sensor with valid data, or a permitted position sensor.TP Course LimitThe set course limit has been exceeded.Remedy:- Increase the course limit or- wait until the TRACKPILOT has eliminated the course deviation, or- switch over to manual steering.
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsV-2 Alarm Management V Alarms.fm / 10.11.11V-24TP DeactivatedThe TRACKPILOT has been deactivated and is no longer controlling the rudder. The ship must besteered manually or by another autopilot.NOTE: This alarm is optional and must be configured on service level if required by the class or theowner.TP Drift Angle Limit The pre-set drift limit value for the Trackpilot has been exceeded; for correct course or track-keeping, a larger compensation angle is needed.☞ Even after acknowledgement, the drift angle contained in the actual course is limited for the TRACK-PILOT to the drift limit setting.Remedy: Increase the drift limit value or switch over to Heading mode or to manual steering.TP End of TrackThe ship, sailing in Track mode, will pass the last waypoint of the System Route in 60 seconds.Special features: Acknowledgement causes a switch-over to Course mode; the ship’s course hasto be set manually from now on.If the alarm is not acknowledged within 30 seconds, the Trackpilot Alarm signal is generated forthe purposes of triggering an external alarm. See 2.2.6 on page V-32.TP GC Course ChangeTrack mode is switched on and the sailing mode is set to Great Circle. In order to remain on theGreat Circle, a course change is necessary which exceeds 3 degrees or half of the set Course Limit.The new course is displayed as Next course in the TRACKPILOT data display.Special features: Acknowledge with Execute. Regardless of whether this alarm is acknowledgedor not, the planned change of the course takes place at the WOP.TP Heading Change Due to DriftThe ship is sailing in Course mode or Track mode and a drift change of more than 5° has occurredas a result of switch-over (manual or automatic) of the selected SOG speed sensor.Special feature: Up until acknowledgement takes place, the TRACKPILOT uses the longitudinal andtransverse speeds that were valid before the alarm. After acknowledgement, the TRACKPILOT usesthe new longitudinal and transverse speeds, so that a heading change which is of the same orderof magnitude as the drift difference occurs automatically.Remedy: Select Heading mode to avoid any heading change caused by a switch over of the speedsensor.TP Heading Sensor Fault The TRACKPILOT is in the activated state and the compass system or its transmission unit hasbeen switched off, is reporting incorrect data, or has failed.- or -With the TRACKPILOT in the activated state, the gyro heading value- has jumped by more than 1 degree betwen two high speed transmissions.
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsV-2 Alarm ManagementV Alarms.fm / 10.11.11 V-25NACOS PlatinumSpecial features:- Acknowledgement causes switch-over to Heading mode and acceptance of the displayed gyroheading value. The currently existing heading value is taken over as the set value. - In addition, acknowledgement can force the TRACKPILOT to generate larger rudder angles. - If the cause of the alarm has not been removed (i.e. the gyro heading is still invalid), the alarmis repeated even after acknowledgement.If the alarm is not acknowledged within 30 seconds, the TRACKPILOT Alarm signal isgenerated for the purposes of triggering an external alarm. See 2.2.6 on page V-32Remedy (after the switch-over to manual steering has taken place): Check the compass system; if possible at the compass system, select another heading source. Checkthe displayed heading before use. TP High Rudder Limit (high ROT) 1) The TRACKPILOT internal monitoring function of the rudder limit, set by the operator, has deter-mined that with this maximum rudder deflection at the currently sailed speed a high rate of turnabove the limit would be produced.Special feature: This warning cannot be acknowledged, it will disappear if the cause for thiswarning has been eliminated.Remedy: Decrease the rudder limit or reduce the speed.TP Low Rudder Limit 2) The rudder limit is set so low that - during Track mode - the next course-change possibly cannotbe performed with the planned radius.Remedy: Increase the rudder limit, increase the radius, or leave the Track mode.TP Low SpeedThe speed reported by the selected speed sensor is so low that the TRACKPILOT might not be ableto steer the ship correctly.Special feature: Acknowledgement causes a switch-over to Heading mode.Remedy: Switch over to manual steering.TP Low Track Limit2)The track limit setting is lower than the expected average position-error of the selected positionsensor.Remedy: Increase the track limit or select a more accurate position sensor.While this alarm is present, the steering gear is not being driven by the TRACK-PILOT.When this alarm appears, a switch-over to manual steering must be performed immediately.1) This alarm can only appear if activated on service level; for this function a maximum allowed ROT value must beset in the system configuration.2) This alarm can only appear if activated on service level; required for ships with DNV NAUT-AW approval.
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsV-2 Alarm Management V Alarms.fm / 10.11.11V-26TP Low Water SpeedThe speed through the water (STW) of the selected sensor is so low that the TRACKPILOT mightnot be able to steer the ship correctly.☞ This alarm can only appear if a speed sensor providing STW is installed but has not been selectedas system speed input.Remedy: Switch over to manual steering, if it is obvious, that the TRACKPILOT is not able to steerthe ship correctly.TP No Master MFD Selected There is no MFD defined as the TRACKPILOT Master by user selection.Special features: Acknowledgement can also be performed by clicking on the buttonor by pressing the TrackPilot Master key on the keyboard.The MFD on which acknowledgement takes place is automatically switched to act as the TRACK-PILOT Master.TP Position Drift 1) Since the beginning of the long-term position drift computation in Track mode, a difference has builtup between the dead reckoning position and the position given by the position sensor, and thisdifference is greater than a limit value which depends on the set track limit 2) or on the sensor selec-tion.Special feature: Acknowledgement restarts the position drift calculation with a difference of zero.Remedy: - Select a more accurate position sensor or speed sensor or correct the manual set and driftinput.- Select Manual DR (Dead Reckoning) instead of the position sensor and check the navigationsensors presently used.- Switch over to Course mode or Heading mode.- Increase the track limit.2)TP Position JumpDuring steering in Track Mode a position jump (e.g. mode change of the sensor, new sensor selec-tion or manual position adjust) exceeding the set track limit (or, if the track limit is set to a lowvalue, a position jump exceeding a value which depends on the sensor type) has been detected.Special feature: By acknowledgement, the new position is accepted.Remedy: Increasing the track limit increases the tolerance with regard to position jumps andstrengthens the filtering of the received position-data.1) Depending on the system configuration this alarm can be switched off on service level.2) In the case of ships with DNV NAUT-AW approval, the limit value depends not on the track limit but on theselected speed sensor and on the selected position sensor.
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsV-2 Alarm ManagementV Alarms.fm / 10.11.11 V-27NACOS PlatinumTP Reduced RadiusThe Track mode is in the switched-on state, but the set radius for the next turn is too large toenable the ship to reach the next leg by means of the manoeuvre that is planned at the TO-waypoint. For this reason, the TRACKPILOT will reduce the radius to such an extent that the coursechange can be performed.☞ A reduced radius can result in an increased ROT during the planned turn.Remedy: Switch over to Course mode or Heading mode.TP Rudder ErrorThe rudder engine is not obeying the instructions from the TRACKPILOT, or is not doing so withsufficient accuracy.Special feature: The message initially appears as an indication without an acoustic signal. If thecause of the fault continues to exist for more than 10 seconds, the acoustic alarm signal appearsadditionally and the priority is increased to Alarm (1). The alarm can be acknowledged, but isrepeated for as long as the cause of the fault continues to exist.Remedy: Check the steering gear, the rudder pumps and the TRACKPILOT interface.TP Rudder Feedback DiffersThe signal of the main rudder feedback unit deviates by at least 5 degrees from the signal receivedfrom the redundant rudder feedback unit.Remedy: Switch over to manual steering. Check the rudder feedback units (wiring, signal, mechan-ical function).TP Rudder LimitThe set rudder limit value has been reached; with this rudder limit, the activated manoeuvre canmost probably not be performed without a deviation- or -The present rudder angle lies outside the rudder limit.Remedy: - Increase the rudder limit or- wait until the rudder angle becomes less than the rudder limit or- switch over to manual steering.If this alarm is present for a longer time, it is necessary to switch over to manual steering.In Track mode on ships with DNV NAUT-AW approval, limitation by the set rudder limit is ignored when a planned manoeuvre is being performed (i.e. during the turn at the waypoint) 1).1) This function must be enabled on service level.
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsV-2 Alarm Management V Alarms.fm / 10.11.11V-28TP Rudder Relay FailureAn error has occurred in the relay controlled rudder control system.Remedy: Switch over to manual steering. Check the rudder control system (wiring, steering relaysetc.).TP Rudder Synch. ErrorThe rudder angles of the two rudders controlled by the TRACKPILOT differ by at least 5 degrees.Remedy: Switch over to manual steering. Check the rudder control system and the synchronism ofthe rudders.TP Short RadiusSo that the planned manoeuvre can be performed with the actually set radius, the expected rudderangle would have to be larger than the maximum value that the TRACKPILOT can apply.Remedy: Increase the radius or switch over to manual steering.TP Speed JumpThe speed transferred from the selected speed sensor has jumped by more than 5 knots.Special feature: Up until acknowledgement takes place, the TRACKPILOT uses the longitudinal andtransverse speeds that were valid before the alarm. After acknowledgement, the TRACKPILOT usesthe new longitudinal and transverse speeds.Remedy: Check the new speed value. If it is correct, acknowledge the alarm; otherwise, selectsome other speed sensor before acknowledgement.TP Speed Sensor FaultThe TRACKPILOT is in an active steering mode and the selected speed sensor is reporting incorrectdata or has failed; steering with the drift angle taken into account is not possible.- or -The TRACKPILOT had been operated in Track mode and the selected sensor is reporting incorrectdata or has failed or Manual Speed has been selected as the speed sensor. When the alarm appears,the system is automatically switched over to the Heading mode.Special feature: For as long as no valid speed data are being received, the alarm is repeated.Remedy: Select some other speed sensor or change to manual steering.TP Track Data ErrorThe TRACKPILOT reports transfer errors or data errors of the activated System Route or the routewas deactivated by the operator.Remedy: Switch to Course mode or Heading mode or manual steering. Check the waypoint data,of the activated route. Deactivate and activate the route again.If this alarm appears, the data of the pre-planned track are unreliable. The track data must not be used for navigation.
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsV-2 Alarm ManagementV Alarms.fm / 10.11.11 V-29NACOS PlatinumTP Track LimitThe track limit value set by the operator or taken from the activated route has been exceeded.Remedy:- Increase the track limit or- allow the ship to steer back to the track or- steer the ship with the joystick or- select manual steering.TP Track Mode Aborted 1) By operation of the joystick, the Mode buttons or the Mode keys (HDG, CRS) on the keyboard, theTRACKPILOT was switched from Track mode to Course Mode or Heading Mode.TP Track Mode Fault 1) The system was in Track mode, but the speed data, position data or waypoint data are no longeravailable or valid during sailing in Track mode.- or -The set course limit or the set track limit is exceeded for the track that was just recalculated.- or -The system was in Track mode and the latitude 85° has been exceeded.The system therefore automatically switches over to the Course mode.Special features: If the alarm is not acknowledged within 30 seconds, the TRACKPILOT Alarmsignal is generated additionally for the purposes of triggering an external alarm. See 2.2.6 on pageV-32.Remedy: Select some other speed or position sensor or define a new route as the System Routeor - after the course deviation or track deviation has fallen below the limit - activate Track modeagain.TP Waypoint Approaching The early course change indication announces, that the WOP of the TO-waypoint will be reached inXX seconds.XX = advance warning time which, according to section V - 2.2.4: "ECDIS Alarms" , has beenentered for the occurrence of this alarm in the TP-Settings dialog under WPT Approach.The distance and the time to go to the WOP as well as the Next track course and radius aredisplayed in the Route Data display.TP WOP Execution In Track mode the next WOP (the starting of the course change on the leg) will be reached 30seconds after this warning or alarm appears.Special feature: Acknowledge with Execute1) On ships with DNV NAUT-AW approval, this alarm also appears if the Chart Monitoring Offline or ConningSystem Offline alarm occurred.
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsV-2 Alarm Management V Alarms.fm / 10.11.11V-30If the planned change of the course is not to be executed: Switch over to Course or Headingmode and steer with the joystick or appologize a manual steering mode.If the preceding TP Waypoint Approaching warning has been acknowledged, the TP WOPExecution alarm appears initially as a warning, with a low intensity acoustic signal. If the TPWaypoint Approaching warning was not acknowledged, the TP WOP Execution alarm appearstogether with an intensive acoustic signal.If the warning TP WOP Execution is not acknowledged within 30 seconds, an intensive acousticsignal is generated even if the TP WPT Waypoint Approaching alarm was acknowledged before-hand. If not acknowleged 30 seconds after appearance of the WOP alarm, the TRACKPILOT Alarmsignal is generated for the purpose of triggering an external back up navigator alarm. See 2.2.6 onpage V-32.☞ If the manoeuvre period from one wheel-over point to the following one is less than 30 seconds,the TP WOP Execution alarm of the second wheel-over point does not appear until after the firstwheel-over point has been passed but already during execution of the first manoeuvre.TP Trackpilot Failure The TRACKPILOT reports an internal fault, and is no longer controlling the rudder.☞ Until the cause of the alarm has been eliminated, the status FAILURE is shown in the operationalmode field of the TRACKPILOT data display as well as on the Conning display.Remedy (after the switch-over to manual steering has taken place):- Attempt to reconnect the Trackpilot to the steering gear.- Restart the TRACKPILOT (See 2.8 on page G-49 for details). - Check the TRACKPILOT electronics unit, the TRACKPILOT Interface and their power supply.If installed, switch over to the second TRACKPILOT.Regardless of whether this alarm is acknowledged or not, the planned change of the course takes place at the WOP.When this alarm appears, a switch-over to manual steering must be performed immediately.
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsV-2 Alarm ManagementV Alarms.fm / 10.11.11 V-31NACOS PlatinumTrackpilot System Failurea) For systems with one TRACKPILOTThe communication between the MFD and the TRACKPILOT has failed.☞ Until the cause of the alarm has been eliminated, the word FAILURE is shown in the operationalmode field of the TRACKPILOT data display.Remedy (after the switch-over to manual steering has taken place):- Restart the TRACKPILOT (See 2.8 on page G-49)- Check the TRACKPILOT electronics unit, the TRACKPILOT Interface and their power supply.b) For systems with two TRACKPILOTs, a TRACKPILOT is connected to the steering gearThe communication between the MFD and the activated TRACKPILOT has failed.Special Feature: Through the acknowledgement, the other TRACKPILOT is selected but not acti-vated.Remedy: - Activate the other TRACKPILOT.- Restart the TRACKPILOT which has generated the alarm. (See 2.8 on page G-49)- Check the TRACKPILOT electronics unit and the TRACKPILOT Interface of the TRACKPILOTwhich has generated the alarm.c) For systems with two TRACKPILOTs, no TRACKPILOT is connected to the steering gearThe communication between the MFD and both TRACKPILOTs has failed.☞ Until the cause of the alarm has been eliminated, the word FAILURE is shown in the operationalmode field of the TRACKPILOT data display.Remedy: - Restart both TRACKPILOTs (See 2.8 on page G-49)- Check both TRACKPILOT electronics unit, both TRACKPILOT Interface and their power supply.When this alarm appears, a switch-over to manual steering must be performed immediately.When this alarm appears, a switch-over to manual steering or to the other TRACKPILOT must be performed immediately.
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsV-2 Alarm Management V Alarms.fm / 10.11.11V-322.2.6 Trackpilot Alarm Signal OutputsAdditional to the alarms, warnings and indications of the TRACKPILOT on the MFD, there are differentalarm outputs available on the interconnection board of the TRACKPILOT-Interface. The designations andfunctions of these isolated relay outputs are listed below.Please refer to the Technical Manual for more information.Trackpilot Failure AlarmThe TRACKPILOT interface puts out this signal if- there is no operating unit switched to act as the TRACKPILOT Master for more than 30 sec (the TP No Master MFD Selected alarm has been triggered), or- the TP Heading Sensor Fault alarm has been triggered, or- the TP Astern Speed alarm has been triggered, or- the TP Trackpilot Failure alarm has been triggered, or- the Trackpilot System Failure alarm has been triggered, or- the TRACKPILOT electronics unit or the TRACKPILOT Interface unit has been switched off,or- the supply voltage of the TRACKPILOT Electronics unit or of the TRACKPILOT Interface unitlies outside of the specification.TRACKPILOT Power AlarmThe TRACKPILOT interface activates this signal if- the TRACKPILOT Electronics unit has been switched off, or- the supply voltage of the TRACKPILOT Electronics unit lies outside of the specification.TRACKPILOT AlarmThe TRACKPILOT Interface outputs this signal if- the TP Heading Sensor Fault alarm appeared 30s ago and this alarm has not been acknowl-edged- in Track Mode the TP Change Position Sensor alarm appeared 1-2 minutes ago and hasnot been acknowledged- a wheel-over point has been passed but the TP WOP Execution alarm for this wheel-overpoint has not been acknowledged, or- the TP End Of Track alarm appeared 30 seconds ago and this alarm has not been acknowl-edged, or- the TP Track Mode Fault alarm appeared 30 seconds ago and this alarm has not beenacknowledged.
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsV-2 Alarm ManagementV Alarms.fm / 10.11.11 V-33NACOS PlatinumIn addition, at service level, it can be specified which of the following reasons are to cause the outputof this signal too:- The TP Waypoint Approaching alarm appeared 30 seconds ago and this alarm has not beenacknowledged.- The TP Track Limit alarm has been triggered. 1)- The TP Course Limit alarm has been triggered. 1)At service level, the signal output can be set for the TP Track Limit and TP Course Limit alarms insuch a way that it takes place after a delay of 30 seconds. The TRACKPILOT Alarm signal disappears as soon as the cause of the alarm is remedied or the alarmthat triggered the TRACKPILOT Alarm signal has been acknowledged.At service level, it is possible to define that the TP Backup Navigator Alarm alarm appears at theTRACKPILOT Master as soon as the TRACKPILOT Alarm signal is triggered. With this setting, theTRACKPILOT Alarm signal remains active until the reason for the TP Alarm is no longer valid and theTP Backup Navigator Alarm alarm is also acknowledged 2).TRACKPILOT Rudder AlarmThe TRACKPILOT interface outputs this signal if - the TP Rudder Feedback Differs alarm has been triggered, or- the TP Rudder Relay Failure alarm has been triggered, or- the TP Rudder Sync. Error alarm has been triggered.1) DNV requires BN alarm, issued 30 sec after TL and CL alarm without acknowledgement by the operator.2) The Trackpilot Alarm contact is used as the required system´s back-up navigator alarm output in installations witha connection to external Bridge Alarm/Watch Alarm Transfer systems.
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsV-2 Alarm Management V Alarms.fm / 10.11.11V-342.2.7 VDR AlarmsThe following warnings and alarms are only available in the NACOS Platinum system, if a VDR DEBEG4300 or 4350 is connected via its LAN interface.VDR Backup is runningIn the voyage data recorder, an incident backup is running.Special feature: The indication cannot be acknowledged. It disappears when the backup has beenfinished.This indication can occur simultaneously on more than one MFD.VDR FRM FailureThe Final Recording Medium is defective, or the data transfer to it is faulty.Special feature: This warning can occur simultaneously on more than one MFD.Remedy: Check the VDR.VDR Integrity FailedA fault or failure has been detected by the BITE (Built-In Test Equipment) of the VDR.Special feature: This warning can occur simultaneously on more than one MFD.Remedy: Carry out a restart of the VDR; see page 175. Check the VDR.VDR Main Power FailureThe uninterruptible power supply (UPS) of the VDR is no longer being supplied with power by the ship'smains. The VDR is supplied with power by the UPS for at least 2 hours.Special feature: This warning can occur simultaneously on more than one MFD.Remedy: Secure the supply of power from the ship's mains to the UPS.VDR Microphone FailedThe microphone test automatically performed by the VDR has shown that at least the recording functionof one of the microphones is faulty.Special feature: This warning can occur simultaneously on more than one MFD.Remedy: Check the VDR.VDR OfflineThe system has no contact to the voyage data recorder.Special feature: The warning cannot be acknowledged. It disappears when its cause has been elimi-nated.Remedy: Check the VDR and the LAN connections.
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsV-2 Alarm ManagementV Alarms.fm / 10.11.11 V-35NACOS Platinum2.2.8 Machinery AlarmsSystem AlarmsBesides the alerts delivered by the different applications running on the MFD or which are received fromthe connected equipment, sub-systems and sensors, there is a list of alarms, warnings and indicationswhich can additionally be issued by the integrated system and displayed on any MFD. These alerts are not connected to any application but to a system monitoring process running partly oneach MFD and on the Data Processing Unit. The possible systems alarms are very much depending on the installed system structure and componentsavailable on board and they are therefore part of the configuration database created for your ship.The following list of alarms can therefore only be an example, covering the most probable alarms whichcan be expected on small systems as shown in Figure I / 2 (an IMO RADAR Set with 2 RADARs) or largersystems as shown in Figure I / 4 (a system for large ships).Master DPU: Status of DPU 2The DPU or DCU which is currently running as the master has detected a problem with the secondaryDPU.Master DPU: Status of MFD (1 … N)The DPU or DCU which is currently running as the master has detected a problem with one of theinstalled MFDs. (1 … N) is indicating the range of identification number of the MFDs.DPU 1: SIO card 1 Channel (n)The DPU or DCU has detected a problem with one of the installed serial I/O cards. (n) is indicating the channel number on the SIO.DPU 1: SIO card 2 Channel (n)The DPU or DCU has detected a problem with one of the installed serial I/O cards. (n) is indicating the channel number on the SIO.DPU 1: SIO on CPU BoardThe DPU or DCU has detected a problem with the on-board serial I/O channel. Module 01C2C001 (SIO 2010) errThe serial I/O module with the identification 01C2C001 is reporting an internal error.Note:As soon as you add a Monitoring and Control System (MCS) as part of the NACOS Platinum, the numberof integrated and ship dependent monitoring and alarm functions will be increased significantly. In thiscase refer also to the Commissioning Protocol which includes the complete list of alarms for the systeminstalled on your ship. This document should also be available in printed form in the ship's files.The alarm priority of these alarms is generally defined by the system configuration which is only acces-sible by the so called Integration Manager, an offline tool for the manufacturer's commissioning andservice organisation. The output of this tool is a database which is loaded into the system (the MFDs andthe DPUs) after the database has been adapted to the system structure and its interfaces.
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsV-2 Alarm Management V Alarms.fm / 10.11.11V-36Refer to the part D Machinery MCS Platinum in these operating instructions for a comprehensive descrip-tion of the MCS integrated alarm system with all its sub-functions and possible settings.
LISTS AND INDEXES
ED 3100 G 140 / Rev 04 (2011-11)Operating Instructions List of FiguresOI_ANC2010_LOF.fm VI-3NACOS PlatinumList of FiguresFig. I / 1 MFD console design. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-22Fig. I / 2 Minimum installation – IMO set. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-23Fig. I / 3 Example of a small-ship installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-24Fig. I / 4 Example of a large-ship installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-24Fig. I / 5 MFD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-28Fig. I / 6 Possible pointing devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-30Fig. I / 7 Keyboard of a console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-32Fig. I / 8 Onscreen keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-32Fig. I / 9 The Optional ASCII Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-33Fig. I / 10 The RADAR Keyboard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-34Fig. I / 11 The Trackpilot Keyboard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-35Fig. I / 12 Date and Time Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-43Fig. I / 13 Example of Super Home. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-46Fig. I / 14 General screen layout of the NACOS Platinum (RADAR Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-47Fig. I / 15 NACOS Platinum title bar of RADAR application. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-48Fig. I / 16 Color schemes of the Color & settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-48Fig. I / 17 Active Application Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-49Fig. I / 18 RADAR sidebar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-51Fig. I / 19 Sidebar – permanent area of the RADAR application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-52Fig. I / 20 Sidebar – example of the non-permanent area of the RADAR application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-54Fig. I / 21 Opened NACOS Platinum main menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-56Fig. I / 22 ECDIS in full screen mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-58Fig. I / 23 Application area frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-60Fig. I / 24 Example: Machinery screen with three frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-60Fig. I / 25 Example: Machinery screen with tabbed panels in three frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-62Fig. I / 26 Tab after using tear-off function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-63Fig. I / 27 Example 1: Target List in RADAR sidebar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-64Fig. I / 28 Example 2: Alarm List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-64Fig. I / 29 Tooltip of a menu item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-68Fig. I / 30 Examples of NACOS Platinum controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-69Fig. I / 31 Zoom and pan control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-79Fig. I / 32 Visualisation types of indication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-80Fig. I / 33 Example of alarm types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-81Fig. III / 1 Overview of the RADAR Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . III-5Fig. III / 2 Overview of the Chartradar Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . III-6Fig. III / 3 Overview of the ECDIS Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . III-7Fig. III / 4 Overview of the Conning Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . III-8Fig. III / 5 Overview of the Trackpilot Expander. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . III-9Fig. III / 6 Overview of the Machinery Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . III-10Fig. III / 7 Common Functions for Products and Applications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . III-11Fig. III / 8 CCRP on RADAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . III-16Fig. III / 9 CCRP on ECDIS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . III-17Fig. III / 10 Structure of Context Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . III-19Fig. III / 11 Layer Context Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . III-20Fig. III / 12 The Chart Information window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . III-21Fig. III / 13 Permanent Area for Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . III-23Fig. III / 14 Display in the modes True Motion and Centered Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . III-31Fig. III / 15 Display in the modes North-Up RM, Course-Up RM and Head-Up RM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . III-32Fig. III / 16 The Chart Status Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . III-56Fig. A / 1 IMO-Set installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-8Fig. A / 2 INS-5 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-9Fig. A / 3 Radial and azimuthal distortions of the radar video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-16Fig. A / 4 Reduced Range of First Detection in Dependance or Precipitation in X-Band. . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-18
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / Rev 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsList of Figures OI_ANC2010_LOF.fmVI-4Fig. A / 5 Reduced Range of First Detection in Dependance or Precipitation in S-Band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-18Fig. A / 6 The RADAR Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-29Fig. A / 7 Overview of the RADAR screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-31Fig. A / 8 PPI with superimposed elements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-33Fig. A / 9 Zoom and Pan Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-34Fig. A / 10 An Overview of the Permanent Area of the RADAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-37Fig. A / 11 RADAR Sidebar of the Non-Permanent Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-53Fig. A / 12 Data of the Selected Target . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-60Fig. A / 13 The Target List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-68Fig. A / 14 Marked Target. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-69Fig. A / 15 Target Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-69Fig. A / 16 Vector Display in Trial Manoeuvre Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-74Fig. A / 17 Delay in Trial Manoeuvre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-75Fig. A / 18 Checking the Trial Manoeuvre. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-77Fig. A / 19 ARPA Training Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-80Fig. A / 20 User symbols on the electronic chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-84Fig. A / 21 Planned track with Clearing Line (Not More Than 025°). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-91Fig. A / 22 Overview of the CHARTRADAR screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-94Fig. A / 23 CHARTRADAR Application Area with superimposed elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-102Fig. A / 24 Diagram of the depth contour system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-104Fig. A / 25 The Depth Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-105Fig. A / 26 Overview of the Chart Maintenance Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-109Fig. C / 1 Planned Route. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3Fig. C / 2 Shape of the pre-planned track in the case of course changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6Fig. C / 3 Route Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-9Fig. C / 4 Settings for the route display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-9Fig. C / 5 Route Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-10Fig. C / 6 Display of Route Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-11Fig. C / 7 Route Editing - Context Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-16Fig. C / 8 The Waypoint and Route List window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-17Fig. C / 9 Radius at waypoint 5 does not fit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-26Fig. C / 10 Modification of waypoint 5 and 6, both radius values reduced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-27Fig. C / 11 Modified route, activated as System Route, displayed with Safety Coridor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-28Fig. C / 12 Generating the Chart Alarm with the Guard Sector (example: Safety Contour alarm) . . . . . . . C-40Fig. D / 1 Overview of the Conning screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-5Fig. D / 2 Conning Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-7Fig. D / 3 Docking Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-8Fig. D / 4 Conning Home Waypoint List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-9Fig. D / 5 Conning application area for automation data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-10Fig. D / 6 The Rate of Turn Indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-11Fig. D / 7 Conning Sidebar in the Permanent Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-12Fig. D / 8 Conning Sidebar in the Non-Permanent Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-13Fig. D / 9 The Alarm List of Conning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-14Fig. F / 1 AIS Message List after receiving a new safety message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-13Fig. H / 1 Nautical Charts Editor - Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-15Fig. H / 2 Selecting a cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-16Fig. V / 1 Alarm Indications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V-4
ED 3100 G 140 / Rev 04 (2011-11)Operating Instructions IndexOI_ANC2010Index_IOM.fm VI-5NACOS PlatinumAaccident prevention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-15Adaptive STC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-13alarm icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-81alive indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-49ambient light conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-48applicable standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-25application area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-47, I-60appliction main page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-47arrow double . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-82arrow pointer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-82Bbrightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-48brightness, of display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-42CCAUTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-14CCRS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . III-16centered display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . III-31check box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-69, I-75check mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-75click . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-31clicks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-31Close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-63Color & Brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-48color schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-48colour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-48colours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-42commissioningsafetycommissioning I-19compass control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I-79, A-34configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-23Consistent Common Reference System . . . . III-16context menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-31, I-63controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-69conventions in this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-10course and speed vectors of radar targetsrelative and true display . . . . . . . . . . . . III-31course up RM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . III-32cross hair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-82cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-82customisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-23DDANGER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-14danger zone, of radar antennas . . . . . . . . . . .A-5dangerous voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-15date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-49date setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-43dialogues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-66disconnection procedures, general . . . . . . . . I-15display brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-42display colours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I-42display settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I-42divider, between frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I-60DNV-W1 approval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .V-26, V-29DO key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I-30double arrow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I-82double-click . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I-31dropdown menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I-69, I-74Eedit window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I-67electromagnetic radiation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I-16electrostatic discharge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I-16Enhance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-13ESD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I-16expander . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I-69external keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I-32FFavorites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I-57field group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I-69, I-71fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I-70frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I-60frames, multiple . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I-61Full Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I-57, I-58GGraphical User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I-45GUI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I-45GUI controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I-69gun site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I-82Hhead up RM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . III-32help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I-46Help, how to find . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I-9help, how to find . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I-8hide sidebar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I-57, I-58Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I-57IIMO set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I-23information, how to find . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I-9Kkeyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I-32Llayouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I-60left mouse button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I-30light conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I-48line printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I-39lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I-64Index
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / Rev 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsIndex OI_ANC2010Index_IOM.fmVI-6Mmain page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I-47main screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I-46maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-18menu bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I-51, I-56Menu button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I-57minimum installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I-23monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I-36MORE key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I-30mouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I-30mouse pointer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I-82mouse, scroll wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I-31move (pointer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I-82multiple frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I-61NNACOS Platinum, system description . . . . . . .I-22non-permanent area . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I-51, I-54north up RM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .III-32notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I-14OOpen in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I-63Ppage printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I-39pan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-69, I-79, A-34permanent area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I-51, I-52personnel, qualification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I-18pointer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I-82pointing hand (pointer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I-82popup edit window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I-67prevention of accidents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I-15printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I-39push button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I-69, I-73Qqualification of personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I-18Rradarsafety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4radar, radiation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5radiation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-18resize (pointer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I-82right mouse button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I-30Ssafety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I-13electrical equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I-15electromagnetic radiation . . . . . . . . . . . .I-16electrostatic discharge . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I-16ESD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I-16maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-18radar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4radiation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-18safety inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-20turning devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I-15, A-6safety inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-20safety notes, general . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-17safety rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-15safety signs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-15screen layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-45, I-47screen layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-60scroll bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-76scroll wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-31scrollbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-69Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-57shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-57Show Full Menu Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-57Shut Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-57shutdown, of Workstation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-40sidebar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-51non-permanent area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-54permanent area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-52single click . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-31slider . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-69, I-72S-Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .II-4S-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-57spin box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-69, I-77standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-25start page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-46starting applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-46startup, of Workstation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-40Super Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-46system date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-49system description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-22system time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-49Ttab context menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-63tabbed panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-62tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-64tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-62Target enhancement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-13Tear Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-63text edit cross hair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-82TFT monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-28, I-36time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-49time setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-43title bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-48, I-51tooltips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-68trackball . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-30trackball pointer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-82true motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . III-31turning devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I-15, A-6types of clicks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-31
ED 3100 G 140 / Rev 04 (2011-11)Operating Instructions IndexOI_ANC2010Index_IOM.fm VI-7NACOS Platinumtypographical conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-10UUI controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-69Unhide Sidebar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-57Unhide sidebar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-58Vvoltage, dangerous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-15Wwaiting (pointer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-82WARNING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-14warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-14Workstation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I-6, I-27Zzoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-69, I-79, A-34
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / Rev 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsIndex OI_ANC2010Index_IOM.fmVI-8
ED 3100 G 140 / Rev 04 (2011-11)Operating Instructions List of TablesOI_ANC2010_LOT.fm VI-9NACOS PlatinumList of TablesTable I / 1 Typographical conventions in these operating instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-12Table I / 2 Applicable Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-25Table I / 3 Types of clicks in NACOS Platinum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-31Table I / 4 Visibility of Expanders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-55Table I / 5 Items on the NACOS Platinum main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-57Table I / 6 Mouse pointers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-82Table I / 7 RADAR and ECDIS pointers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-83Table I / 8 Machinery pointers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-84Table III / 1 NACOS Platinum and its Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . III-4Table III / 2 Range Rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . III-27Table III / 3 Integrity Marks for Heading/Speed Sensor Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . III-35Table III / 4 Integrity Marks for Position Sensor Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . III-42Table III / 5 Monitoring Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . III-45Table A / 1 Radiation danger zone of radar antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5Table A / 2 Categories of RADAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-7Table A / 3 RADAR Failure Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-10Table A / 4 Scheme of RADAR Video Evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-11Table A / 5 Qualitative description of Enhance levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-14Table A / 6 Achievable RADAR Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-14Table A / 7 Influences of Meteorological Processes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-17Table A / 8 Transmission formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-23Table A / 9 Latitude-Dependent Errors of the EBL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-47Table A / 10 Symbols of ARPA Targets in RADAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-56Table A / 11 Symbols of AIS Targets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-57Table A / 12 Manual Target Acquisition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-59Table A / 13 Maximum Number of Targets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-68Table A / 14 Differences between CHARTRADAR and ECDISPILOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-110Table C / 1 Route Editing - Predefined Radius . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-20Table H / 1 Limited-Lifetime Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-18
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / Rev 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsList of Tables OI_ANC2010_LOT.fmVI-10
ED 3100 G 140 / Rev 04 (2011-11)Operating Instructions List of AbbreviationsOI_ANC2010Abbrev_IOM.fm VI-11NACOS PlatinumAABS . . . . . . . . . Absolute (Bearing) AIS . . . . . . . . . . Automatic Identification System ANSI . . . . . . . . . American NAtional Standards Institute BBCR . . . . . . . . . Bow Crossing Range BCT . . . . . . . . . Bow Crossing Time CCOG . . . . . . . . . Course Over Ground CPA . . . . . . . . . Closest Point of Approach DDR . . . . . . . . . . Dead Reckoning EEBL . . . . . . . . . . Electronic Bearing LIne ECDIS . . . . . . . . Electronic Chart Display and Information System ENC . . . . . . . . . Electronic Navigation Chart ESD . . . . . . . . . Electrostatic Discharge , ETA . . . . . . . . . Estimated Time of Arrival GGUI . . . . . . . . . . Graphical User Interface HHDG . . . . . . . . . Heading IIBS . . . . . . . . . . Integrated Bridge System IEC . . . . . . . . . . International Electrotechnic Commision IHO . . . . . . . . . International Hydrographic Organization IMO . . . . . . . . . International Maritime Association INS . . . . . . . . . . Integrated Navigation System ISO . . . . . . . . . . International Standardisation Organisation MMMI . . . . . . . . . Man Machine Interface NNACOS . . . . . . . Navigation Automation Control System NMEA . . . . . . . . National Marine Electronics Association OOutstation List of Abbreviations
ANC2010ED 3100 G 140 / Rev 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsList of Abbreviations OI_ANC2010Abbrev_IOM.fmVI-12PPI . . . . . . . . . . . Parallel Index PPI PPI . . . . . . . . . . Plane Position Indicator,the Radar picture RREL . . . . . . . . . . Relative (Bearing) RM . . . . . . . . . . Relative Motion SSOG . . . . . . . . . Speed Over Ground SOG . . . . . . . . . Speed over Ground STW . . . . . . . . . Speed Through Water TTCPA . . . . . . . . Time to Closest Point of Approach TFT . . . . . . . . . Thin Film Transistor, a kind of Monitor TM . . . . . . . . . . True Motion UUI . . . . . . . . . . . User Interface VVRM . . . . . . . . . Variable Range Marker
DOCUMENT HISTORY
ED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsVII-1 Document HistoryVII Document History.fm / 10.11.11 VII-3NACOS Platinum1 Document HistoryDocu-ment Revi-sion Date Author Changed pages Changes390000 - Sept. 2009 Finke, Lass, SpratekAll Generation of the new operating instructions390008506 01 Jan. 2011 Finke, Spratek All Generation of the new operating instructions390008506 01 Mar. 2011 Finke All Chapter Chartradar added, correction of facts, pictures and faults. Adaption of description due to changes in software390008506 02 Juli 1st 2011 Finke Several Latest corrections, released in LiveLink and SAP
NACOS PlatinumED 3100 G 140 / 04 (2011-11)Operating InstructionsVII-1 Document History VII Document History.fm / 10.11.11VII-4

Navigation menu